
rt'. 


f . 


I I ■ ' I ' » • 














■ r ' i « ‘ t U] 

■ ■ -irtt’ 

■ *'••■. * 1 ? !' r T f 


- r < ' o* 

. p' ^v> * > J . 


tiff aL '. ', i’ ■ » ‘. ■ ' . 

BF. ^:;:::::iujU 

' ' r * ' ^ ' v> . ' 

\ ‘f'’ ■ ■ : ';' 



TTT*,* *> 


. ' • * - ?#< 


• . • - • •' f;' -. 


• • • ' ."‘•r • */ . j 




■ • 'r;*. ■■ ■,;■ ' : 


vv/v-f;. ■ . ■ 

■ .T ' ■ •' ' 






‘ k 









Pass T* Z 

Book. A . W' i JrL-jj-X 



CaPXRiGHT DEPOSrr. 



I 


*' y V ’ '‘ : I ' V :, ( V .! -v 


w 


’,i' 

4 

:f\ 


• t 

1 1 


yi 


4 * 


• ’>t ,; ^1, 

ri< 

A ?’ 


■:'J-.. I .. 


1 


‘K 


‘ V. 





%tj -'-f ' *•/' ' J • 

-.V,' ;'^' ■’’ .' ■ 'ClXwrV 


A 



''J 


V >. 


\l 


* *' ' .-I '^%i ‘ v' '' "’ 'Vf ^1 j0 


'jW 


(• 


if. 


. ■.- ’ 


I. 


I 

f/. '' 


'. V 


-, » 


K 

( •• 


;v yAf ^/f ^ . i' ■’’ 'r'l' C'v'/'Vfe*', !' ■ 




» 1 


i ,•■ 


„ . j 'V' ■' / ' ^ '• ..,-‘V«> 

' '♦/ ‘'^i' 5 


«k- 






'i'-i 






'. f -‘J ' 

‘ri- ^ r 




<: 




A*’ 


rA!.,<‘'', 


. »i:'u 


V- V : I ,. . 

|.W ^■ 






» • 


'• ,.'ii >:'U 


^V*): 




n 


yi\ 


B ifl/’- ' ■ . 'I‘Sk»V • > ■ - ‘-i fSWaiB&^SC Ml 

A'iWf/ o;- Tr*-' '> . ' ■ ' ' /' / >Vju.'^'-M ■ A-l&m 



w 


tWif 


t 


'•ft 




” . *•, t-t :*. ^ '. ’if't* ^!Ur \ jttlfliHrnE ' . *' 


L’i' 


f. 


y.i 


k* * .;■ f • 




» f. » 




'y€ .. ■■ '■■ ^'''l ^ ir^W 

»A'4i' ■ f.** I*. • t •'4i‘'-A'\ jBnf* 

I IT'" r ^ 

' , / L ■’ ^-'AijlS^''' ■'* *2^ ■''i^ 








iTr-^. 




i . 


’ ’-*»:•'■ 


L< 5 ' 


*.>r 




y 


\ 

■ \ 


iv T) ‘ W. 


m 




HI 


>if 


1 1, -I 




i.W’i 



■r.i i? ' l i V^r-VVAh 


»•< 




ir 




I V* ' . 



4 P ‘ 


If ' ' ' ■ . W ' 

•V,* , t I h • / • 




• '*»*• ^ i,/-, •' . 'V ^ * 
'-•.4. A X y 






..is ,r jiaAi\' ■■ . rOAmiv a/> 








.:'',-4! iy '. ''jl t'> i y'v .')-i-Ul‘, i.v. ' . Lis' 1 ■•y'fMi|fi';it''^>’. ■ ;4; /M 


v’-- V, •■» 


*■ ' ' ■• VV.*' ' '• ■ '/.^ 


^ . 



























THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 



f 


vTHE 

HIDDEN ISLANDS 



BOSTON 

SMALL, MAYNARD & COMPANY 
PUBLISHERS 


to- 4oi3 



Copyright, 1920, 

By small, MAYNAKD & COMPANY 

(LNCOEPOBATED) ^ 


-8 1920 ' 


0)CI,A5599G2 l> 


MY SON, WALFORD 

TO YOU, MY CONSTANT COMPANION 
AND ENDEARED CHUM, 

I DEDICATE THIS BOOK 




1 









t 







I 






t 




(• 



# 


I 


^ ft 




( 


i 





t 





4 


* ^ 1 
t 


If 


f 



t 


I 


I 


u 


I 







% 


I 


I 



I 

« 

f ^ ( 







\ 




« 


r. 


r , ' ‘ 

I i 


f' 




• I 


i 



■ 









TABLE OF CONTENTS 


CHAPTER page 

I Old Friends and New Projects . , , i 

II The Schooner Mercier ii 

III The Mystery of the Schooner , , , 23 

IV The Voyage Begins . , . ^ ^ * 34 

V A Taste of Salt Water — News of the 

Spy 42 

VI The Devil-Fish — Squalls, Calms, and 

Sponging . . ^ ^ . 53 

VII Crabs — News of the Miguel 
VIII The Fourth — Turtle-Turning ^ ^ ^ 6 y 

IX The Sighted — Lafitte Goya . , 75 

X Sailing Into the Unknown . . 84 

XI The Secret Log — The Pearl Isles . . 93 

XII Hiding THE Wireless — Prisoners. . . 103 


XIII Robert Escapes . . . . . . . *113 

XIV Sounds of Pursuit — The Hollow Oak . 123 

XV The Wireless Wrecked — The Cave . . 131 

XVI Doings on the Mercier 140 

XVH Julian and Loyo ........ 149 

XVHI The Mercier Comes ...... . 159 

XIX A Recruit ^ 169 

XX Battles, Sham and Real . . * . . 176 

XXI The Rescue 184 


XXII How Grant Norris Joined the Pirate . 197 
XXIII The Oper.\tion on Loyo — The Enigma . 207 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

XXIV Setting Up a Scarecrow 219 

XXV On the Little Isle 231 

XXVI The Copper Coffer — A Surprise for the 

Enemy 242 

XXVII The Message on the Arrow — The Mi- 
guel Sails 253 

XXVIII News of Ray 265 

XXIX Ray in the Enemy Camp ..... 272 

XXX The Treasure 286 

XXXI Home Bound . . ., . . 295 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


iVi 


Mr 'V ■'. . • ;.^ : 


» . f 


/ , .' 

• "■ 


t •>' / 


• \ 




. < it 



; •' .‘ ". v , . ■', '. j 


'•.. i 


' \ 
f • 


' t 

' • ■ V I 

. .1 


m ■ 


\ 


V / 





-.-.if" 


i . rf '’.*/ j .''' ' 


: X 


M'* 




I . • ' » 





'i • 






* ' > *' 




•!i. 




«. i 


I' Ml''' "',. 

N’-.;, ,. •,■ »\ '’‘V : 


■ j 


M 

.'5,^ ?:V 6,1 ..t * 


' ■' - ■ ■ t • ' ■ , ! 




t < 






t ' , t 


v: -A^'‘A'Kr ' . f ■ 


r ■ 


mXX'X- 


^ i 




^ « 

V- ‘ 

» •.. • 


i^J y tv'^' ■'■ ■ ' ■' ' V" 'i.*' 


' .!ll 


lU'jfJ}'* A.(l ' ' f 


te; f ^ 







V 

'■ ' 


j, 


' * »■' . •* .. 

^ I-'-,:; 
, . . I i 


' % 


n 




Mn 


/ ’• { 


;\ 

\ 

't 


. y. •- 

J -s .1 

,v • ••() ' :• 



"< , • <• i.; 

. ■ v* ' 


' -•• V ‘ ‘ I * ■r/."|’,'>Vk,V> 

J>V“ ■•■'' S : 


Mi 


LvV • 




■'■/ ,■ y;sf 4 Mi 




• , >. 

' •*• ^ 





. ■ V 

. . .-v A ,"‘'''' 


"miXXSX . 

i » : - J - '>* V>f J * 


.1 


... i * ,.' 


■ < •( 

^ . 


f.’ 

I 




ji'11' h>^ ' i'^ y ''•’< '* ■ 




t 


>rVo''f % 
'X •'’ ' ' .* 


'j, 




, ' 'A \ .> 

t 'i '/f'> ‘ 

fe-!/ Vw';/i^ 







. - I. 4i vll .V I* I '/V. 




-' ■' ...’ ' ; 'I ■ , . >' - • \\ 

,' i . ••. .:- yr .: : ■/</* A '-. 

=^- ■' ■ ■' ' ' ■' 


i *' A 


< ■ 




j’d 


w 




fX-yy : 


i <• 


■ ' iL.‘ J. ■’ ■ '• J'*' • r *► 











THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


CHAPTER I 

OLD FRIENDS AND NEW PROJECTS 

'jpHE train trundled steadily southward in the dark, in 
and out of the Louisiana clay banks. The two boys 
lolled on the cushioned car seats, in their travel-weariness 
all but forgetting about the new scenes and new adven- 
tures they journeyed towards; they had had one day and 
a night of it. There had been no talk for fifteen minutes. 
A glance now and then out of the car window revealed 
the dark and dancing outline of swiftly moving trees; 
and the wee flas'hes of stars showed in the intervals. 

The momentarily augmented roar of the wheels on the 
rails, between the opening and the closing of the door as 
the porter entered, seemed to rouse one of the two (the 
taller, the chap of the sandy pate), and he stretched his 
arms aloft, gaping wearily. 

“ Say, Wayne,'’ he began, “ if this thing was to last 
another day. I’d drop off and hike it the rest of the way.'* 

Wayne consulted his watch. “ Only two hours more," 
said he ; it’s nearly nine now." 

‘‘That’s comforting," grumbled the other; “it's six 
hours since it was eight." Again a stretching and yawn- 
ing. “ I wish Blaisdell was going to meet us at the sta- 


I 


2 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


tion; I don’t see how we’re going to find the way — at 
midnight.” 

Oh, don’t you worry, Ray, we’ll find it.’ 

Ray pouted. “ I don’t see why you’re always so all- 
fired sure. You always seem to know beforehand, like 
one of those — I don’t know what you call them. Let’s 
read the directions again.” 

So out came old Marvin Blaisdell’s letter once more, 
and Wayne read aloud the directions for finding the way. 

The train cut along resolutely for another hour. And 
then, to the boys, everything seemed to take on a new 
fashion. The members of the train crew began to whistle 
popular tunes, tripping up and down the aisle, and bang- 
ing the car doors, all in a cheerful bustle of preparation. 
Passengers filed into the washroom to slop off the grime 
of travel. Then, presently, the boys became aware of an 
unusual fragrance of flowers; and there came, too, in 
time, the smell of the salt sea, new to their nostrils. 

Weariness left them, they had begun to see the end of 
their long journey. Their eyes sought to pick out ob- 
jects without, sunk in the darkness. Then came the low 
and more musically-toned rumble, as they made over a 
long bridge. A little space, and then the porter appeared 
again, and sang out cheerily — “New Orleans — New 
Orleans! ” 

Wayne and Ray joined the eager procession, and soon 
stood outside of the station, on the street, looking for the 
street-car. It came; and at a quarter past eleven of this 


OLD FRIENDS AND NEW PROJECTS 3 

June night, they were afoot again — on broad, brilliantly 
lighted Canal Street, waiting for another car, that was to 
take them far out on Tchoupetoulas Street, to a certain 
corner mentioned in Marvin Blaisdell’s letter. 

They had not long to wait, and again found a corner 
of the car, where they set their suit-cases behind their 
shanks ; and as the car trundled on, the boys entertained 
themselves with studying the advertising posters over the 
windows, many of which were exact duplicates of some 
they had become familiar with in their northern home 
town. The few other passengers had soon left the street- 
car; and the conductor, now and again, sauntered to the 
front to exchange gossip with the motorman. Wayne 
and Ray noted, as they went, that fewer and fewer lights 
showed without; till finally the conductor called out, 
‘‘ Here's your street, boys," and clanged the bell. 

The brilliant car moved on, leaving the two beside the 
track, literally dropped in a sea of gloom. To be sure, on 
one corner a yellow light on a post made pretence to 
gleam, sending its faint beams as far as to a ramshackle 
house close to the walk ; but it served but to accentuate the 
darkness all about. As the boys stood, uncertain, a very 
distant bell tolled out dismally ; the intervals between the 
strokes were dolorously long, like a funeral knell — the 
strokes twelve in number. From speaking in low tones 
the boys got to whispering; it might be a neighborhood of 
thieves and cutthroats, and it were well to make as little 
noise as possible. 


4 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Well/’ said Ray, which way do we go now? ” 

To the left, Fm pretty sure,” said Wayne. There 
are no lights that way.” 

“ There aren’t any to talk about any way,*’ said Ray ; 

but I like a little, if I can’t get a lot. But you’re the 
leader, and you mostly guess right.” 

So to the left they moved. For perhaps half a block, 
they felt a ragged walk under them; then it broke short 
off, and their feet fumbled forward over what seemed 
a cinder pathway. 

“ Wish we’d thought to take a flashlight along,” mur- 
mured Ray. I feel as if I was going to hit a hole clear 
through to China every step.” 

Wayne pushed forward confidently; presently a big 
black mass loomed before. In another minute he stooped 
and took up something in his hand. 

Sawdust,” he said. ‘‘ Here’s the sawmill.” 

” You guessed again,” confessed Ray. 

The boys had sawmills in their home town in Illinois ; 
they sought out the stairs, and directly were mounting in 
the blackness. At the top they picked their way till they 
came to the summit of the incline, up which the logs were 
hauled from the water. They could make out the river 
below. Wayne led, going down the gangway; and at the 
bottom, the boys cast their eyes about on the many ob- 
jects that lay in the obscurity that covered the river. 
They stooped low, and to the right a square outline of 
something showed against the dim sky. 


5 


OLD FRIENDS AND NEW PROJECTS 

‘‘ There’s the Whippoorwill! ” said both boys together. 

The houseboat lay some fifty feet away. 

Blaisdell ! ” called out Wayne. ‘‘ Blaisdell ! ” And 
waited. No response. He felt about and picked up 
some pieces of bark. With these he bombarded the roof 
and side of the houseboat. 

Eh ! ” came a call from within. 

Then a figure appeared on the deck. 

‘‘ Hello, Mr. Blaisdell ! ” called Wayne. 

Eh!” 

‘‘ Hello, Mr. Blaisdell I ” repeated Wayne. 

“ Oh, Wayne. Well, well, I hadn’t looked for you 
in the night. Wait, I’ll push the boat over.” 

The skiff came skipping over, and the boys were soon 
on the deck of the houseboat. 

“ And here’s Ray, too. Well, well. And how did 
you find the way in the dark ? ” 

Oh, Wayne, here,” volunteered Ray, “ he’s got sec- 
ond sight. I’d never have found it.” 

And then all went within. 

“ It seems good to see the old Whippoorwill/* said 
Wayne. 

“ Surely it must,” said Mr. Blaisdell ; and he smiled 
through his mass of gray whiskers. And now you’re 
after hunting adventures on the broad seas. Well now, 
you boys stretch yourselves out in that bunk over there 
for a few minutes and rest yourselves.” 


6 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


The boys complied; and Mr. Blaisdell dodged into the 
galley. 

And now we’re ’way down south,” said Ray. 

Smells tropical, too. You’ve been reading up — what’s 
those sweet smells, anyway ? ” 

Oh, orange blossoms, and magnolias, and I guess 
some fig’ trees,” said Wayne. 

Soon odors from the galley set the boys’ appetites 
sharp ; and their host appeared. 

Now for a snack, boys,” he said. 

Fried ham, eggs, and potatoes, biscuits and molasses; 
and presently a dish that puzzled them. 

Mr. Blaisdell smiled. ‘‘ Fried bananas,” he explained. 
“We get them properly ripe in New Orleans.” 

“ It seems kind of wonderful that you should come 
to own our houseboat,” said Ray. 

“Yes,” said Mr. Blaisdell. “You see, it was this 
way — as I hinted in my letters: When I got to St. 
Louis, and sold all my pearls, I got a good deal more for 
them than I expected; a nice little fortune for a lone old 
man with few wants. So I decided to take a rest. And 
one day, having little to do, I hunted down along the 
levee, thinking to get my eye on your houseboat. And 
I found it with a For Sale sign on it. A happy idea took 
me, and I bought it, and floated down here to New Or- 
leans.” 

“ Well, I’m mighty glad no one else got it,” said 
Wayne. 


OLD FRIENDS AND NEW PROTECTS 7 


And then came talk of the boys' ambitions. 

We had been wishing/’ Wayne was saying; ‘‘that 
we could go on a cruise on the Gulf of Mexico. But of 
course that would cost too much. Yet we liked to talk 
about it, anyway; and wo studied maps and practised 
sailing with the skiffs, and read sea books. And then, 
this spring, Mr. Maclay called a special meeting, and 
told us he’d seen our parents, and he had found a way 
that maybe (not sure) maybe we could take that cruise 
on the Gulf.” 

“ You ought to’ve seen the roof bulge out,” broke in 
Ray. 

“ Mr. Maclay wouldn’t say where the money was com- 
ing from,” resumed Wayne. “ He just said, ‘ A good 
fairy.’ But it isn’t hard to guess it’s the Widow Al- 
bright. She’s been getting a lot of money out of the 
stone quarry ; and she’s always talking about how we got 
back her land for her. And now the rest of the fel- 
lows are ready to jump on the train just as soon as we 
find the right kind of a ship.” 

“Yes,” said Mr. Blaisdell; “ever since I got Mr. 
Maclay’s letter I’ve been looking out. There’s a new 
friend I’ve made, an old planter — Lamartine — lives 
on the other side of the river. I’ll take you -to see him. 
He says there’s a relative of his just died; and a small 
schooner, in which he did some small trade, is to be sold 
by the marshal, under the hammer. If the bidders are 


8 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


not too keen, it might be a chance to get what you want 
at a low figure.” 

The boys lay in their bunks in the old Whippoorwill 
for some time, awake, building pictures of coming experi- 
ences to be had along the coast of the Gulf of Mexico. 
But even in their wildest imaginings there was no hint 
of the adventures actually in store for them, which were 
to grow out of old Marvin Blaisdell’s new-made down 
south friends. 

In spite of the tardy hour of crawling in, Wayne and 
Ray were out early, making a shrimp-trap, under Mr. 
BlaisdelFs direction — of a hoop and a gunny-sack. 
This they let down to the bottom of the river. There 
followed a few hours of exploration in this less attrac- 
tive portion of the city, back from the river. But the 
boys found interest in the sour-orange trees, and the figs, 
and other tropic growths that hung over the tumble-down 
fences. They were back for an early dinner; and made 
ready for the trip over the river — the same old Miss- 
issippi that went by their home, so far away. 

The river is very broad here. When the boat had come 
into the lesser current of the farther shore, Wayne and 
Ray kept their oars creaking till Mr. Blaisdell directed 
them to a landing, about two miles up. The little party 
crossed the levee, and approached a quaint old planta- 
tion home, set amidst trees and a half-tended garden. 
Back, and to one side, the boys made out the plain negro 
quarters: a half dozen small, solid blocks of cabins, set 


OLD FRIENDS AND NEW PROJECTS g 

on short massive posts, in a row. Only one bore marks 
of occupancy, the others abandoned to decay. 

Howdy, Mistah Blaisdell,” came a salutation from 
the porch. 

The boys saw a slender, gray moustached gentleman, 
coming down the step. 

Ah ! you’ah Boy Scout friends,’’ said the man, when 
Mr. Blaisdell had introduced them. 

A cheerful-visaged black man brought out chairs. 

I heah that you contemplate a cruise on the Gulf,” 
observed Mr. Lamartine. 

‘‘ Yes, sir,’' said Wayne, if we can find a suitable 
vessel, and a good sailor.” 

Mr. Lamartine made observation that good sailors 
were not hard to find in New Orleans, and that it was 
seldom that one had long to look for vessels seeking 
buyers. 

As I have been telling my dear friend, Mr. Blais- 
dell, here,” he said, I have been info’med that a small 
schooner left by the death of a — ah — connection of 
mine, is to be sold at auction.” 

His mention of this connection ” of his was made 
with some show of disrelish. Later, the boys had occa- 
sion to recollect this circumstance, as well as the sad face 
of Mr. Lamartine, and other evidences of some old 
trouble that showed in the old southerner’s demeanor. 

‘‘ Rufe ! ” he presently called. And when the smiling 
black man appeared — Bring the bundle of papahs.” 


lO 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Soon there was spread before the boys’ eyes a sheet, 
bearing, among innumerable other advertisements, the 
announcement by the ‘‘ United States Marshal for the 
Eastern District of Louisiana ” — that there should be 
sold at public auction, on June loth, at 12 o’clock, M., 
at the main entrance to the Custom House on Canal 
Street in the city of New Orleans, the “ Schooner Mer- 
cier, her tackle, sails, and apparel, as she now lies in the 
New Canal near Claiborne Street, in the port of New 
Orleans.” 

A pleasant hour was spent with the lonely old gentle- 
man. Then the boys rowed back to the Whippoorwill, 
eager for the next step in their quest. The sun was low, 
beyond the river, when they made fast the skiff’s painter 
to the houseboat. The raising of the gunny-sack gave 
them nearly a quart of shrimps, that went to the making 
of the supper. 


CHAPTER II 


THE SCHOONER MERCIBR 

T he next morning, June 8th, the impatient Wayne 
and Ray, with Mr. Blaisdell for guide, were abroad 
early again. An hour’s ride, and then a walk to the New 
Basin; picking their way among barrels and boxes, and 
other odds and ends peculiar to wharves, they finally 
arrived at the spot where the canal put an end to Clai- 
borne Street. 

Schooners of various sizes, and differing as well in 
raiment and social standing, lined the canal. But the 
boys were not long in spying out a stern from which the 
name Mercier spoke out in plain white letters. 

There she is ! ” said Ray. 

Wayne was already hurrying to her side. Mainsail, 
foresail, and jib were neatly folded under the gaskets. 
A cabin roof peeped above the rail, forward of the wheel ; 
the box of a galley, flanked by water butts, nestled be- 
tween the cabin and mainmast ; then came the hatch, and 
forward of the foremast, a small scuttle, the windlass; 
and the anchor graced the bows. 

The three climbed aboard the lonely vessel. The cabin 
scuttle was padlocked. 


II 


12 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


There’s four bunks,” said Wayne, his eyes at a win- 
dow, and a table, and a bureau, and lockers.” 

They found access through the forward scuttle into 
the wee forecastle, where were four bunks and some coils 
of rope. The galley door was locked, but the window 
allowed view of a stove and cooking tools, and a cupboard. 
The hatch-cover was off, and the three looked into an 
empty hold — here and there bits of oyster shells. 

She looks like about our size,” said Wayne. ‘‘ Don’t 
you think so, Mr. Blaisdell ? ” 

It was just so I was thinking,” answered the old 
gentleman. ‘‘ And I should say she is a seaworthy 
boat.” 

Let’s see how long she is,” said Ray. And he began 
to pace from stern to bowsprit. Between forty and 
fifty,” he presently called from the bow. 

“ And she’s a little over fifteen feet in the beam,” added 
Wayne, having paced across amidships. 

Carved on a timber of the hatchway, they read — 
i-io tons.” 

'' Do you think there’s any chance of our getting her 
under two hundred fifty dollars, Mr. Blaisdell ? ” Wayne 
looked his doubts. 

It’s hard telling, my boy,” said Mr. Blaisdell ; but 
I think maybe it’s not so unlikely. — Here, let’s ask this 
chap.” 

He accosted a man passing. The man told of a recent 
instance of a twelve ton schooner selling for forty dol- 


THE SCHOONER MERCIER 


13 

lars. But there were other interested parties that had in- 
spected the Mercier, he said, and likely to be more. 

Our three explored the basin, for someday, up and 
down, and the boys bought and searched the advertising 
columns of the daily papers, but touched on nothing 
nearly so promising as the schooner Mercier. They had 
two days to wait for the sale ; and to relieve the suspense, 
Mr. Blaisdell started them off on a tour of sight-seeing. 

First, he led them to the PoydrasJMarket, where, in the 
booths, fish, turtles, crabs, vegetables, and the like, were 
finding sale. Then they perched on a trio of tall stools, 
before a lunch counter; and there was set before them 
such coffee as they had never tasted, and enormous 
doughnuts, jelly-filled. 

Crossing Canal Street, they passed into the environs 
of the old New Orleans. On Chartres Street, in the 
bird and animal stores, they watched the sleepy alligators, 
and listened to the garrulous parrots. At Jackson Square 
the old three-spired St. Louis Cathedral awaited them; 
and its bells chimed for them. One after another of the 
old historic buildings loomed up: the Haunted House; 
and on the corner of Dauphine and Orleans, the house 
of the “ Tree of the Dead.” 

“ Here,” said Mr. Blaisdell, '' the exiled brother of 
the Sultan of Turkey was stabbed to death in 1727 — 
the assassins were sent from Turkey expressly to do the 
deed. From the grave there grew a tall date palm.” 

They peeped into an old drinking-place, where the 


14 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


pirate Lafitte used to idle his time away (a name the 
boys were destined to reckon with) ; and looked over the 
noted French Opera House. And they didn’t miss queer 
old Exchange Alley, with its overhanging balconies. 

So interested were the boys in this quaint old section, 
they must go back the next day, in spite of the heat, and 
go over some of the same ground in addition to much 
else, notably the French Market. Under these old long 
sheds, with the age-stained pillars, the boys never tired 
of witnessing the bustle of marketing, and watching live 
crabs, and turtles who winked at them, and listening to 
the foreign talk. They again sought out a lunch-counter, 
where an oyster stew (and such an oyster stew!) was 
topped off with that same wonderful drip-coffee, rich 
cream, and jellied doughnuts. ‘‘Ah, gee!” said Ray, 
“a couple more, please — beats my flap-jacks.” 

Then next day, the Whippoorwill was again left to 
take care of herself, at the foot of the log-slide, and 
Wayne, Ray, and Mr. Blaisdell set off down town. This 
time there was serious business in hand. It was decided 
to leave Ray’s ready tongue to do the bidding. A group 
waited at the Custom House. At twelve the auctioneer 
appeared. 

A description of the schooner Mercier was read, her 
qualities extolled, and then — “ How much am I bid ? ” 

“ Twenty dollar,” faltered out a voice. 

“ Twenty-five! ” snapped out Ray, quick and sharp. 


THE SCHOONER MERCIER 


15 

‘‘ Bah ! friends/' scolded the auctioneer. This is 
no row-boat." 

‘‘ Thirty," spoke out another. 

“ Forty ! " came from Ray, like a flash. 

And so it went for a time. Wayne got over among the 
other bidding parties and heard some of their talk. Then 
he hurried to Ray's side, and spoke in his ear. 

Those men," he said, have got the idea that you 
are bidding in the interest of relatives of the last owner 
— determined to get it. Some think there isn't much 
use bidding against you." 

Ray put even more pep " into his demeanor. 
Finally one hundred was bid, and Ray snapped out — 
“ One Hundred and five ! " Then two or three heads 
came together for a moment's colloquy, following which 
all bidding seemed to have come to an inglorious end. 

Hundred and five ! — hundred and five ! " called the 
auctioneer, ‘‘ who’ll make it a ten? " 

But with all his urging he could not win another bid. 
All the bidders seemed at once to have become but stub- 
bornly silent listeners to his harangue ; till finally chagrin 
and anger showed in the auctioneer. And then, with a 
vicious bang, down came the hammer. 

“ Sold ! for one hundred and five dollars," was his ver- 
dict. 

The group broke up, and Wayne, Ray, and Mr. Blais- 
dell prepared to follow the auctioneer and clerk into the 


i6 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Marshal’s office. The boys met the smiling face of a 
handsome chap, as they turned. 

Ver’ good little schooner you ged,” he said, “ and 
you ged her ver’ cheap. I congradulate.” 

He shook the boys’ hands cordially, and was off. 

The money paid, and the '' bill of sale ” in hand, the 
three left the Marshal’s rooms, and sought a telegraph 
office. The good news was put into a telegram addressed 
to the other six members of the patrol, waiting in River- 
ton, Illinois. 

‘‘We have bought schooner. She couldn’t be better 
if she was built purposely. Don’t forget our trunks, and 
come right off.” 

Within the hour, the boys and their old friend were 
down to the New Basin and aboard the Mercier. Wayne 
whipped out of his pocket a Whippoorwill Patrol pen- 
nant, and in a little, it fluttered at the mainmast head. 

“ She’s all ours ! ” enthused Ray. “ Hooray ! ” 

Sunday intervened. 

Monday morning found them aboard the Mercier 
again, their minds taken up with the next problem — to 
find a suitable sailing-master for their new ship. The 
boys had gone into the little galley for a hasty inventory 
of the pots and pans and other pieces of cooking tools. 
Wayne’s eye chanced to a view of someone standing out 
on the quay, eyes on the schooner. It was the handsome 
fellow whom they had met on the Custom House steps 
the day before. Wayne stepped out. 


THE SCHOONER MERCIER 


17 


Come aboard, sir,” he bade the man. 

“ Good morning,” said the man, as he skipped lightly 
over the schooner’s rail. 

Jean Marat, he said, was his name. 

** I like to see the Mercier once more, before she go 
away,” he explained. “ You see, I sail her for the old 
Mister Lamartine — four year I sail in her. Ah, he 
was one extraordinar’ old man, thad Pedro Lamartine.” 

What did he use the schooner for?” asked Wayne. 

‘^Ah!” The dark complexioned , stranger shrugged 
his shoulders and seated himself on the rail. He breeng 
shell — the oyster shell — from down in thee Gulf some- 
where — ” 

If you sailed in her,” queried Ray, ‘‘ don’t you know 
where from? ” 

Marat shook his head. ‘'No, I never did know. And 
no one in the crew did know, excep’ one black man — 
Loyo — who is servant to ol’ Pedro Lamartine ver’ many 
year. I do not theenk eet was just the shell that was 
Lamartine hees bus-i-ness; but he do not tell any one. 
And I do not ask, for I do not have too much the curious’ 
about some one else hees business. And then, if a sailor 
— if he come to have too much the curious’, ol’ Pedro 
he discharge heem. You see, Lamartine he have one 
other schooner much like thees one — the Miguel — and 
when thees one sail out to the Gulf, we meet the Miguel 
some place — thad ees, we make anchor one side one 
island, and the Miguel make anchor thee other side; and 


i8 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


thee crew of the Mercier row roun’ to the Miguel, and 
the crew of the Miguel row roun’ thee other way to the 
Mercier. And then we take the Miguel, load weeth the 
shell, to New Orleans, and the other crew take the Mercier 
out for more of thee shell. You see, my crew never go 
to where ol’ Lamartine ged the shell, and we never see 
the other crew thad do go.’^ 

‘‘ I see,” said Ray, “ old Pedro Lamartine didn’t want 
any one to know where he got the shells.” 

Yes,” agreed Marat, “ that was id. Sometime he 
go in the schooner that go out. And then hees black 
man, Loyo, go in to New Orleans with the shell, with 
me. Loyo, he is out now.” 

Does the black fellow know that Pedro Lamartine 
is dead ? ” questioned Wayne. 

‘‘ No,” said Marat, ‘‘ I theenk he donot know. Pedro 
Lamartine die more than four weeks back, and no one 
know about Lamartine hees bus-i-ness. I tell thee Court 
about Loyo, and thee Court wait for Loyo to come. It 
was time the Mercier should meet him two week back; 
but maybe Loyo wait for the nex’ time. Pedro Lamar- 
tine he die in thad cabin.” 

Marat led the way to the cabin, and within, he pointed 
out the bunk, furnished with a wire-spring and mattress, 
in which old Pedro Lamartine had breathed his last gasp 
of life. 

He have some sickness in the heart,” explained Jean 
Marat, placing his hand over his own. '' He have one 


THE SCHOONER MERCIER 


19 


attack when we come through thee Rigolets — and he die. 
He was not happy, that ol’ Pedro Lamartine. He have 
too much money I theenk. He always suspicious of any 
who come at him, and he never make much talk with 
any one except Loyo.’^ 

“ Maybe he was smuggling something/’ suggested 
Ray. 

“ No,” declared Marat. “ He alway see -the revenue 
officers and pay thee duty.” 

Jean Marat’s story gave the schooner Mercier an 
added — a romantic — interest for the boys; and, too, 
this pleasant-faced Creole sailor began to grow in their 
esteem; and there grew in them also an idea that soon 
found voice. 

Mr. Marat,” presently began Wayne, and there was 
somewhat an eager light in his eyes, ** we are looking for 
some one to help us sail this schooner on our trip — ” 

There was an interested gleam in Marat’s eye as Ray 
broke in : 

‘‘ Mr. Wayne Scott, here, is too modest to come out 
with it flat, but the size of it is, that we’d like to have 
you, if you can, and your price is within our reach.” 

Wayne’s look gave corroboration. 

Marat smiled and said : I have been making some 

plan to take some little rest ; I have sail all thee time for 
four year. Well, I will come tomorrow and tell you if 
I can change my plan. And maybe if not, I can help you 
to fin’ some one who weel do for you.” 


20 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Jean Marat waved back a friendly salutation as he dis- 
appeared round a building backing the quay. 

‘‘ He’s ours,” declared Ray. 

Hope so,” said Wayne. 

Mr. Blaidell appealed to for his word, looked up from 
his fingers — at the finishing the whipping of a rope’s 
end. ‘‘ I think you’ll be very fortunate if you get him. 
He knows the boat ; and integrity shines out all over him. 
And now which is it, the French Market, or Poydras, 
for lunch ? ” 

‘'French!” said both boys together. 

As the three moved market-ward, through the streets, 
Wayne’s abstraction was apparent. Ray gave him a 
glance or two, and then edged up to Mr. Blaisdell and 
spoke in pretended confidence. 

“ Say, Mr. Blaisdell,” said he, “ our patrol leader, here, 
has jumped into the belly of another whale of a mystery. 
I’ll bet he’ll be a regular Jonah on our hands till he’s got 
that old Pedro’s shell game all figured out.” 

Going in at one end of the long low shed, they passed 
down with the procession by the colonnade, among 
booths displaying tropical fruits, vegetables, fish, crabs, 
and shrimps, fresh from the water. They were making 
straight for the lunch-counter at the far end. Then, be- 
fore them, making purchases, they came upon Jean 
Marat. 

“ Ah ! my frien’s, these is fortunate,” he smiled. “ I 
was jus’ these momen’ theenking how pleasant to have 


THE SCHOONER MERCIER 21 

you come and have thee lunch with me, and meet my 
moth-er.’’ 

Excuses of politeness were vain, and our party was 
borne along among ancient-looking structures, and intro- 
duced to tidy and home-like quarters on a second floor. 

Make yourselv’ free,” said Marat, with a graceful 
wave of the hand, and permid me to leave you one min- 
ute.” 

He disappeared through a door, and his voice was 
heard joined with another. 

The boys observed with interest the old pieces of furni- 
ture; and the many samples of curious shells and coral 
that covered an old book case, and the mantel, above 
which hung the framed likeness of a gentleman in of- 
ficer’s uniform; and apparently, the real sword of the 
picture having a place on the wall above. 

Marat senior,” suggested Ray. 

The voices from tht back continued for some time. 
And then the door opened, and our three rose to meet 
a dignified and most handsome old lady, with a smile like 
her son’s. 

“ My mother,” said Jean Marat, with some hint of 
pride in his tone and manner. 

Each guest pronounced his name for her as he took her 
hand, and she repeated it in her quaint and pleasing for- 
eign enunciation. Waved back to their chairs, Mr. 
Blaisdell gave Madame Marat some account of the boys 
and their ambition for a taste of the sea, and some hint 


22 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


of their new-found desire to put themselves under the 
guidance of her son, for whom they had already begun 
to feel some attachment. 

She looked on the boys with a mother’s eyes for some 
moments of silence. 

“ And they have mothers at home,” she then said, with 
a tender softnes's of tone, who pray for their safe’ and 
happiness. — Ah, oui! they shall have my Jean. I can not 
sl’p in thee night eef I feel they do not have one who ees 
good to look out for them.” 

And so it was decided. And she went to join Jean, 
who was attending in the back. And presently all were 
seated at the table. It was then the boys had their 
palates tickled with crayfish bisque, daube, and other 
savory French things, unlike anything they’d ever yet 
put to their tasters. 

Madame finally allowed her guests to go, exacting the 
promise of an early repetition of their visit. 


CHAPTER III 


THE MYSTERY OF THE SCHOONER 

T he remainder of the day was given to some prep- 
aration for the coming of the other six adven- 
turers. And then Wayne and Ray dismounted from 
the street-car at the station, at ten thirty. A little past 
eleven, the expected train came rumbling into the long 
shed. The two boys stood at the high iron fence, eyes 
eager, as the train vomited its passengers. 

There’s Phil ! ” said Ray, ‘‘ and Leslie — they’re all 
there!” 

Hello! Ray.” 

Hello! Charlie.” 

Hello! Wayne.” 

Hello! Slicky.” 

Hello ! Bert.” 

‘‘Hello! Joe.” 

There filed through the gate: Leslie Dunn, Charles 
Manners, Phil Conger, Bert Hill, Joe Hunt, and Robert 
(Slicky) Murtry. 

As the street-car trundled on through the night, Ray’s 
and Wayne’s tongues were kept going at a rate, with 
much urging. They were required to give detailed ac- 
count of their movements since leaving Riverton. 

23 


24 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


And say, fellows ! ” finally came from Ray. 

Wayne’s found another cryptograph.” 

The hubbub that then was let loose attracted the few 
other passengers; and Ray drew the heads of the boys 
close. 

Well, it isn’t exactly a cryptograph,” he went on. 
“ But it’s a mystery just the same. And you know what 
a funeral it’ll be till he gets his claws into it. It’s about 
our schooner — and there’s a ghost in that schooner al- 
ready.” 

Aw, cut out the preliminaries ! ” complained Phil. 

And so Ray repeated the story told by Jean Marat. 

At their corner, the boys left the car and marched to- 
ward the river in the dark. 

I guess old Pedro Lamartine smuggled something on 
the side,” ventured Charlie Manners. 

No,” declared Ray, '' Jean Marat said he was always 
straight with the revenue officers.” 

Mr. Blaisdell awaited the crew on the house-boat; and 
soon the good old Whippoorwill was noisy with feasting, 
and recounting of past adventures, and vain conjectures 
as to those now to come. 

June thirteenth dawned hot. The impatient boys were 
on the way to where Claiborne met the New Basin. 

^‘Scrumptious! Ain’t she a daisy! Just our size! 
Purty as her name ! ” The encomiums were sung to the 
schooner Mercier. 

“ Too bad she’s got to have a ghost,” said Phil. 


THE MYSTERY OF THE SCHOONER 25 

That’s one of the best parts of her,” said Ray. 
“ — Ask Wayne.” 

Jean Marat soon appeared, and introductions went 
round. 

I like thee look of my crew,” said Marat. 

And the crew saluted. 

And now, how soon weel you sail ? ” asked Marat. 

The boys all looked to their leader. 

As soon as we can get ready,” responded Wayne. 

** Ah,” said Marat. And now we make some list of 
theengs we need to ged.” 

Ray made notes as Jean Marat enumerated desirable 
articles of wear, stores, and so on. 

Wayne and Robert remained on board with Marat, to 
help overhaul rigging and the like; Ray led the others 
forth to begin the purchasing. At noon, at the Poydras 
Market, Wayne and Robert parted with Marat, who was 
to visit the ship chandlers for some rope and a block or 
two. The two boys returned to the schooner. 

With not the least premonition of setting his foot in the 
way of a discovery that was to turn round the whole 
course of events Wayne made a most natural move. 

Let’s give the cabin a good cleaning out,” said he, 
going through the scuttle. 

It’s awful hot and stuffy in here,” observed Robert, 
who had followed. 

Yes,” agreed Wayne. Marat says they always 
slept on deck in the hot season — all except old Lamar- 


26 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


tine. He says the old fellow always slept in his bunk, 
summer or winter. Let’s get out his smelly old mat- 
tress.” 

So Robert pulled the mattress out to the deck. 

Wayne was setting his fingers to one of a pair of hooks 
that held the spring fast in the bunk, wondering over the 
need of such security, when his eye was arrested by a 
slight peculiarity in the contexture of the back wall. 
Where the bed-spring touched the wall the narrow plank 
was sawed through in two places, about eight inches 
apart. But it was not this alone that so much took 
Wayne’s interest; the paint on this short bit of plank bore 
the soil marks of much thumbing. He brought out his 
knife and tried to pry out the piece. It held fast. 

Then some inches below, protected by the bunk-spring, 
his eye was attracted to a hole in the wall, of a size to fit 
a nail. 

Wayne mounted through the scuttle to the deck, and 
found Robert interestedly watching a tug-towed proces- 
sion of fruit-laden schooners, just arrived. His hand 
clutched several bananas. Wayne, with other interest, 
jumped onto the quay; and directly returned, holding a 
piece of telegraph wire. Back again in the cabin, he set 
the end of his wire into the hole. Then came a push on 
something stiffly yielding, like a bit of clock-spring — 
and the piece of eight inches of plank above popped out 
from the wall half an inch. 

Wayne then set his fingers 'to the sides and pulled out a 


THE MYSTERY OF THE SCHOONER 27 

drawer. Robert was just coming below to begin a story 
about the fruit schooners, only to be cut short by Wayne’s 
more startling revelations. 

‘‘ A secret drawer,” Wayne explained. 

Putting his hand in to the back of the recess, he felt 
two spiral springs, which had served to push the drawer 
out when released by the spring catch below. In the 
drawer the boys found a small account book and two 
large envelopes. One was addressed: ‘‘To Julian 
Lamartine,” the other: “To Loyo.” Beside these, a 
leather bag, tied with thongs, lay in a corner. It seemed 
as if it might hold a handful of beads. 

“We won’t open it till Jean Marat comes,” said 
Wayne. 

Marat appeared within the hour, rope laden. 

“ Ah, eet was ver’ clever in you to fin’ thad,” said 
Marat, when Wayne had told him of his discovery; “I 
never know of thad.” 

Wayne untied the bag and poured its contents into his 
hat. 

“ Pearls I ” said Robert. 

“ Yes,” said Marat. “ It ees like sometime’ I suspec’. 
He tell no one of thee pearl’, excep’, I guess, the officers. 
Led us look in thees book. — Yes, I see here thad he pay 
the duty on the pearl’ w’en we meet the officeers this trip. 
Never have he speak once aboud thad he have the pearl’.” 

“ What are we going to do with these things ? ” said 
Wayne. 


28 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Ah, yes,'’ said Marat. They will, of course, have 
to go to thee Court. Bud you say you have meet the 
cousin of Pedro Lamartine.” 

'' Yes, Mr. Charles Lamartine,” said Wayne. 

“ He maybe know,” said Marat, who is thees Julian 
Lamartine thad thee letter is address’.” 

So it was decided to go first to the old planter across 
the Mississippi, the only known living relative of Pedro. 
And Marat and Wayne made up a packet of the contents 
of the secret drawer and set off at once, leaving Robert 
to await the coming of the boys. 

The two found Mr. Blaisdell on board the Whippoor- 
will, who rowed with them across to the Lamartine planta- 
tion. 

The lonely old gentleman met them with his usual smile 
of welcome. And Wayne looked on Mr. Lamartine’s 
face with not a guess that he was about to touch on the 
one great trouble of the old southerner’s life. 

While Wayne undid the packet on the table, Mr. Blais- 
dell gave a short account of Wayne’s disco verey of the 
secret drawer in Pedro Lamartine’s bunk. Then he took 
up the envelope addressed to Julian Lamartine, handing it 
to the old gentleman. 

We thought you might know the one to whom this 
is addressed,” said Mr. Blaisdell. 

Mr. Lamartine, who had so far shown little more than 
a polite interest, reached for the long envelope. His 
eyes had barely turned upon the writing, when his hand 


THE MYSTERY OF THE SCHOONER 29 

began to shake, his face to turn a ghastly white; the en- 
velope fell to the floor, and the old gentleman collapsed 
in his chair. 

Wayne ran to the door, opened and called, Rufe! 

The darky appeared. 

Yas, seh,” he replied to Wayne’s explanation, and 
in very short space he had a tumbler of wine to his old 
master’s lips. 

Pardon me, gentlemen,” said Mr. Lamartine, when he 
had recovered. ‘‘ That is a name very dear to me. It 
is the name of one of whom I have been bereaved these 
eleven years. I beg, Mr. Blaisdell, that you will read 
what is within.” 

It was with a show of eagerness that he watched Mr. 
Blaisdell take out and unfold the written sheets. 

Mr. Blaisdell began: 

To Julian Lamartine — 

I beg that you will restrain as much as you can the 
feelings of bitterness, and I fear worse, that may rise in 
you as you read these confessions of a wretched and peni- 
tent old man. 

I have practiced deceit on you all these years, in mak- 
ing you believe that your grandfather, my cousin, Charles 
Lamartine, was in the grave. He still lives and grieves 
you. My motive in this deceit, cowardly as I confess it 
to be, you will understand as you read. 

It is now more than ten years since I stole you away 
from your home. It came about in this way: After 
buying the secret of the pearl oyster banks, I was low in 
money; and it became necessary to buy boats and tools. 


30 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


I knew that, many years back, my father had loaned to 
the father of my cousin Henri Lamartine, fifteen thou- 
sand dollars ; and though I could not find the note, I went 
to cousin Henri and demanded payment. Henri made 
the declaration that the note had been paid before the 
deaths of our fathers, and that the note had been de- 
stroyed. I persisted, and the breach between us — that 
had begun with our fathers — widened. I determined 
to gain by force the money Henri refused to pay, for I 
knew he had considerable in cash, and that it was not in 
bank. I watched till I learned its hiding-place. And 
then, on the fatal night, I forced a way into the house 
when all were asleep, set a candle on the floor by the fire- 
place, and pried out a stone. I lifted out and forced open 
the box, and was beginning to count out the fifteen thou- 
sand dollars that I believed was due me, when I heard 
the stairs creak under a foot. I looked up, and Henri 
rushed down the stairs, stumbling on the bottom steps and 
striking his head on a stone of the fire-place. 

He lay limp. I stooped over him. He was dead. 

Then you, a little boy, had come, and I felt you beside 
me. You were six, and old enough to say what you had 
seen. You believed I had killed Henri (though after- 
wards I told you a story that convinced you it was an 
accident). My cowardice took possession. I grabbed 
you up, seized the money-box, and fled. 

Believe me now, Julian. I swear this is how it hap- 
pened. I did not commit murder ; I did not mean to take 
all the money — twenty-eight thousand — which was in 
the box. I dared not attempt to return the rest. It was 
afterward that I found evidence that the note for fifteen 
thousand had truly been paid, as Henri said. 

But I have now also to confess that for years I took a 
secret delight in the pain your disappearance caused your 
grandfather, Charles. He had forbidden me to come 


THE MYSTERY OF THE SCHOONER 31 

near his house, and insulted me with talk. I confess I 
read with satisfaction newspaper reports that he was ar- 
rested for the murder of Henri, on evidence of a quarrel 
between them that same night. He was soon freed. 

Julian, all these years of my wrong-doing have been 
years of misery for me. My penitence has grown; yet 
I have not had courage to jeopardize myself by making 
things right. But now I have a disease of the heart that 
may take me off any time; and I want to make what 
reparation I can. I have made you heir to all I have. I 
have made a will. It lies in hiding in the piece of land 
’w'here you now are. Loyo will find the spot. There also 
lie the choicest of the pearls I have taken from the sea. 
I recommend that you make sale of them, piecemeal, in 
foreign markets, where they will bring the better price. 
I have but two boons to ask you ; that you will believe in 
my penitence and try to forgive me ; that you will expend 
$10,000 in making my faithful Loyo a comfortable home. 

I may have a month or a year to live. When I am 
gone, Loyo knows where to look for my last word to 
you, and to him. 

Forgive a miserable old penitent. 

Pedro Lamartine. 

‘'Julian lives!’' spoke old Charles Lamartine, who 
with difficulty had contained himself during the reading. 
Great joy shone in his face. “ Julian lives I Thank God I 
— Thank God 1 Fd almost given up all hope.” 

He got on his feet and made several paces forth and 
back. 

“ Gentlemen,” his smile was good to see, “ I could 
forgive him myself — I am a happy old man.” 

Then he told the story of his bereavement. How on 


32 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


that evening he had gone to his cousin Henri’s home, tak- 
ing his orphan grandson, Julian, along; how he had 
quarrelled with Henri for not forbidding his house to the 
despised Pedro, whose father had disgraced the Lamar- 
tine name by his marriage and his usurious practices ; the 
son Pedro following in his tracks, besides inheriting his 
mother’s miserliness, and other ill dispositions. He told 
how in the morning Henri’s body was found, and he, 
Charles, arrested, the quarrel being known ; but soon ac- 
quitted on evidence; how his grandson had disappeared 
that same fatal nightj never to be heard of again. 

And now,” said Charles Lamartine, showing a bit 
disturbed, where is my little Julian? Where can I 
find him? ” 

Ah,” said Jean Marat, “ w’en we see Loyo — he 
know.” 

The letter addressed to Loyo was short, recommend- 
ing Julian to his care, and directing him to search out a 
copper coffer, holding sorne treasure to be put into the 
hands of Julian; and a reference to some method — in 
which Loyo had been drilled — for locating the treasure. 

And then came a discussion of probabilities. How 
was Loyo to know? How was he to come? Where 
was he? Jean Marat alone could say what was best 
to be done ; and when our little party rowed back to the 
house-boat, Wayne’s mind bubbled with enthusiasm over 
a plan which he meant to lay before his comrades. 


THE MYSTERY OF THE SCHOONER 33 


It was in the dark they made fast to the JVhippoorzmll. 
All the others were by that time aboard. 

Then came the story all over again. The boys were 
much moved by the thing, seeing which, Mr. Blaisdell 
offered a word. 

Well, lads,'' he said, it looks very much to me as 
if you had, in buying the Mercier, come into inheritance 
of a call to do what you can to help find this boy who was 
kidnapped so many years ago." 

Wayne had his say; and Jean Marat offered counsel; 
and it was finally decided. Moreover, a definite pur- 
pose would give them no less experience of the sea. 
And Wayne, in particular, thrilled with the prospect. 


CHAPTER IV 


THE VOYAGE BEGINS 

T he canal smoked with the heat. On the deck of 
the schooner Mercier, the eight boys were grouped 
about their old friend, Marvin Blaisdell, who offered them 
words of advice. 

“ The open sea is not quite like the old Mississippi,” 
he said. ‘‘ You are not experienced sailors ; ano I want 
to impress upon you the need of instant obedience to 
your captain. Take no advantage of Captain Marat’s 
good nature and your unusual relation to him.” 

Aye, aye. Sir,” said Ray, saluting. 

A tug came puffing down the canal, two schooners in 
tow. Mr. Blaisdell stepped to the quay and threw off 
the mooring ropes. Wayne sprang to the bow with 
Captain Marat, and threw the tow-line to the hind-most 
of the two towed vessels; and the Mercier swung into 
the moving line of ocean-bound wind-jammers. 

Don’t forget — we’ll call at Biloxi and send you a 
line,” called Wayne to Mr. Blaisdell. 

'' Regards to Mr. Maclay — and to Mr. Lamartine,” 
shouted the boys. 

Aye, aye,” called back Mr. Blaisdell. Bon voy~ 
age!^’ 


34 


THE VOYAGE BEGINS 


35 


Before eleven o’clock, the procession passed West End, 
with its cupola-topped pavilion, band stand, and other 
amusement structures, and the broad Lake Pontchartrain 
received our voyagers. A dead calm made the sails use- 
less, and they were allowed to sleep on, tucked under the 
gaskets. The tug drew its burden of vessels well out on 
the lake before abandoning them, and then puffed back 
to the mouth of the canal. 

Soon, smoke and a rattle of pans came from the little 
galley, and a black head showed through the window. 

Rufe’s starting something,” announced Phil Conger. 

Hey? ” said Ray. Two bounds, and he had his head 
in at the galley window. Say, Rufe, I hope you’re used 
to having real eats-importers round you.” 

Say,” grinned Rufe, exhibiting an enormous, spank- 
ing-new stew-pan, “ who is it buy dis heah ? ” 

Why — ” faltered Ray, in fear lest he had made a 
bad beginning with the ship’s cook. “ Why, I guess I’m 
guilty.” 

Wall,” returned Rufe, his eye sparkling with the 
shining pan, ‘‘ you is jes’ aftah Mah heart. Dat pan is 
jes’ mah size. I ain’ got no use roun’ me fo’ no picka- 
ninnies — white er black — as has got stummicks like 
pecking, yaller canary-birds. Ef I fin’ you-all is dat 
kin’ ! — when we goes through de rail-road bridge, I is 
guine t’ climb de mast and jump on de bridge and fut 
right back fo’ New O’leans — -dat w’at I am.” 

Rufe had been loaned to the voyagers by Mr. Charles 


36 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Lamartine; to act as cook, and because it seemed desir- 
able to have in the party at least one who knew the lad, 
Julian, in search of whom they were making voyage. 
The announcement of the arrangement had caused Rufe 
fairly to bubble over with pleasure. 

I guine be de fust to see mah li’le marster agin ! An^ 
I guine to jump him on mah knee some more. You say 
he seventeen now. Dat ain’ guine make no diff’ence — 
Fd know ’im if he was seventy! An’ dat las’ day I see 
’im, he was only six. He was de gen’l, an’ I was his 
whole army; an’ we charge de enemy, an’ kill um off, 
ebery one.” 

The tears stood in Rufe’s eyes, as he told over his and 
li’le marster Jul’an’s ” old pranks. 

According to Captain Marat, old Pedro Lamartine, 
had he lived, was to have sailed the Mercier back down 
the Florida coast to a certain small, uninhabited island, 
some way below Naples; there to meet the shell-laden 
Miguel, with the darky, Loyo, on board. The meeting 
at the rendezvous had been set for a time on or about 
May 31st. Owing to the death of Pedro Lamartine, this 
meeting had failed. 

There had been a former occasion, when old Pedro had 
been detained; and Loyo, per instructions, had sailed on 
to Punta Rassa and sent a telegram of inquiry, which 
Jean Marat himself had answered — in old Pedro’s ab- 
sence. But this time no word had come from Loyo. 

Maybe Loyo is dead, too,” suggested Robert. 


THE VOYAGE BEGINS 


37 


Id ees nod impossible,” admitted Marat. Bud I 
theenk Loyo now wait for thee nex’ time to meet; thad 
ees aboud thee twelve of July.” 

It was to the chance of this meeting that the Mercier 
now sailed. 

The voyagers were just come to the end of the noon 
meal, which had been spread on a table set on deck, since 
the cabin was too hot and stuffy for other use than that of 
a store-room. Leslie Dunn suggested to Wayne that 
they go down into their trunks for the binoculars. The 
cabin had not been entered since coming aboard this day ; 
so Wayne produced the key, unlocked the scuttle, and the 
boys went into the airless place. The spectacle set them 
aghast. 

Great Caesar ! ” began Wayne. Who could have 
done that ! ” 

The four trunks stood agape^ contents scattered on the 
floor — a whirlwind couldn’t have done a better job of 
havoc. 

“Here, Scouts!” called Wayne, his head out of the 
scuttle. 

Every one came to look, and be equally astounded. It 
was found where a window had been forced. And the 
condition of Pedro’s bunk led Wayne to the finding evi- 
dence of some one having been at the secret drawer. 

“ Some one else knew about that,” declared he, “ and 
was here last night. Do you think it was Loyo ? ” He 
directed his eyes on Jean Marat. 


38 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


“No, I donot believe,’’ said Marat. “ Loyo would 
come to me if he come back ; I sure of that.” 

“ Then,” said Wayne, “ somebody else found out about 
the secret drawer, and was after what was in it. Do you 
think it could be one of your crew? ” 

Jean Marat shook his head. “ No. He would not 
wait all these weeks to break in these place. It was some 
one who have jus’ come to New Orleans.” 

“ Then,” pursued Wayne, “ it must be some one from 
the pearl banks, who found out something about the 
treasure and all from Loyo. — Glad I didn’t leave those 
papers in the cabin. Perhaps something has happened 
to Loyo ; and it would explain why you have not heard 
from him.’^ 

Marat nodded. “ That w’at I be ’fraid for for some 
time.” 

Bert Hill interrupted the discussion to report the ap- 
pearance of patches of ripples on the smooth surface of 
the lake, come to herald the wished-for breeze. ’ 

Marat spread the boys about to cast off the gaskets, and 
man the halliards and sheets. 

“ Now, up with thee jib! ” he called. 

The jib bellied in the light breeze. The mainsail and 
foresail followed, and the schooner answered to Marat’s 
touch on the wheel; and after a time, a wake astern 
showed that the Mercier was in her paces again. 

It was later, Wayne Scott and Robert Murtry leaned 


THE VOYAGE BEGINS 39 

together on the port bow rail, trying to glimpse land 
ahead. 

Say, Wayne,'' began Robert, if something has hap- 
pened to that black Loyo, do you think we’ll be likely to 
meet the Miguel? 

Well, Slicky,” returned Wayne, '' I've just been talk- 
ing with Captain Marat about that. He thinks that we 
will. It looks as if some of those fellows down there 
(wherever the place is that the pearls are fished) had 
found out, some way, about that secret drawer, and sent 
somebody to rifle it; and they found somebody else had 
beat them to it; and of course they suspect us. Well, 
they very likely still want the information they expected 
to find, and likely saw us start, and suspect where we’re 
going ; and whoever came up here will take the train back 
and get to the Miguel; and they’ll wait for us, hoping to 
get this information from us some way. That’s how we 
have figured it out.” 

I suppose, then,” ventured Robert, that they thought 
there was something in that drawer to tell them where 
the treasure is hid.” 

'' Yes,” agreed Wayne, “ and that would go to show, 
too, that they have not found that out from Loyo. — 
Something’s sure happened down there.” 

The breeze had continued to freshen, relieving, in some 
measure, the sultriness that was so hard on the unac- 
climated boys; and it put increasing speed into the Mer- 


40 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


cier. The afternoon was far gone when the low marshes 
began to show ahead ; and the schooner was soon within 
hailing distance of the railroad bridge. The fog-horn 
was put into the hand of the strong-lunged Phil Conger, 
who blew an ear-splitting blast. 

Say, Phil,” said Ray, his face showing alarm, that’s 
the only fog-horn we’ve got on the ship — may need it 
again.” 

The bridge-tender had answered, and the span swung 
slowly open. The Mercier passed through, soon well into 
the Rigolets, a crooked channel that meandered through 
the marsh, to join Lake Pontchartrain to Lake Borgne, 
which in turn opened into Mississippi Sound, and so into 
the Gulf of Mexico. 

The schooner was still far short of the exit from the 
Rigolets, and the sun still an hour above the western 
horizon of marsh-grass, when the breeze let down. The 
boys’ faces fell as they looked out over the miles on 
miles of lonely, cheerless marsh, to which they would 
have preferred the open sea, if they must be becalmed. 

But there showed one object to give relief to this worse 
than desert. A single sentinel stood guard at this half- 
way point of the channel, in the shape of an old fort. 
Opposite this rampart, our voyagers let down the anchor. 
To relieve the tedium till another breeze should release 
them, the boys were encouraged to make a visit to the 
fort. Both boats were unlashed and set into the sluggish 
water; and soon the boys were within the walls, inspect- 


THE VOYAGE BEGINS 


41 


ing the old guns, walking upon the parapets, and explor- 
ing the dark cells below; till twilight sent them back to 
the schooner and supper, which was interrupted with 
many slaps on the face, angry beating of the air and 
petulant expressions of annoyance, notwithstanding the 
smudge with which the grinning Rufe sought to envelop 
the table. 

Say, Ray,” finally came from Phil. What are you 
fanning the air so much for?” 

Oh,” returned Ray, “ Fm just leading the orchestra 
— hear ’em sing? — But I don’t need any help — what 
are you shaking your baton for?” 

There was no room for table manners, pestered as the 
diners were by the increasing hordes of mosquitoes ; and 
most threw down their knives and forks and abandoned 
the table, half satisfied. 

‘‘ Just look at the clouds of them in the marsh-grass,” 
cried Charlie Manners. A fellow wouldn’t live an 
hour if he was thrown in there.” 

The boys were soon driven to the protection of their 
cheese-cloth mosquito-bars, which they set up on deck, 
edges tucked under blankets, two boys under each. 


CHAPTER V 


A TASTE OF SALT WATER NEWS OF THE SPY 

HE newly risen sun sent long, spiky shadows of 



A the schooner’s masts across the marsh, when 
Wayne, already abroad, and conversing with Jean Marat, 
turned to the white, cheese-cloth, box-like affairs, from 
which came sounds of various sorts common to sleepers. 

‘‘Pile out, Scouts! Pile out! A breeze is coming.” 

“ Eh ? ” came the drowsy and puzzled inquiry from 
one white inclosure. “ What’s the matter? ” came from 
another. 

The edge of a third bar lifted, and out came Ray’s 
head. “ I was just dreaming,” he said. “Two hun- 
dred millions of mosquitoes stuck their bills into me and 
flew off to the top of a ten mile high mountain, and 
dropped me into an eagle’s nest; and the eagle came fly- 
ing along and said, ‘ Pile out! a breeze is coming.’ ” 

Rufe Stuck his grinning face out of the galley. “ How 
high dat mountain was, did you say ? ” 

“ Ten miles,” repeated Ray. 

“ Ho-wee ! ” laughed Rufe. “ I reckon it a good thing 
you wuk up ’fore you piled out.” 

The glaring sun had not gone high in its morning 


A TASTE OF SALT WATER 


43 


climb, when the Mercier passed the buildings at Look- 
out, and her cutwater disturbed the waters of Lake 
Borgne. The boys were grouped in the bow, finding 
pleasure in the new objects that opened to view, as the 
Mercier sped on under a strong breeze. 

Ah, Mr. Wayne!” called Captain Marat from the 
wheel. And as Wayne hurried up, he added, Ged your 
boys aft.” 

“All hands aft!” called Wayne; and there was a 
scramble. 

Beckoning to Robert, Jean Marat gave him the tiller. 
“Hold her south-east by east — just so. Now,” turn- 
ing to the others, “ who do you want for mate? ” 

“ Oh, there isn’t any pick,” spoke up Ray. “ Wayne 
is the only one of us who can boss — he’s been at it two 
years.” 

“ Ver’ good,” said Marat. “ Wayne, you are my 
mate. Now we pick our watches. Ray Reid, you step 
to starboard. Your turn, mate.” 

“ I take Slicky. You’re in my watch,” said Wayne, 
turning to the wheel. 

“ Aye, aye, sir,” said Robert, his eye on the compass. 

“ That is right,” said Captain Marat, smiling approval. 
“ Charlie Manner’.” 

“ Leslie Dunn,” said Wayne, “ step to port.” 

“ Philip Conger,” said Captain Marat. 

“ Bert Hill,” said Wayne. 

“Joe Hunt is ver’ handy with the tools,” explained 


44 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Captain Marat. '' He will be carpenter, and will help 
in any wadch w’en it is need.’* 

Then came a short lesson in the names of the various 
parts of the schooner’s rig, and in the way to execute cer- 
tain orders. 

When the light-house was passed, the course was 
changed to northeast by east. At noon, the Mercier was 
plunging forward a little over half way down Mississippi 
Sound. 

Captain Marat struck the bell — Ding ding — ding 
ding — ding ding — ding ding.” Eight bells. Now 
thee starboard wadch go on duty. Ray, go on lookout — 
Charlie, take the wheel. Hoi’ her east by northeast.” 

At four, Phil Conger, who had relieved Charlie at the 
wheel, struck eight bells, and the port watch went on 
duty — four to six. 

Slicky on the lookout,” said Wayne — “ Bert, take 
the wheel.” 

Leslie had just relieved Bert at the wheel, at two 
strokes of the bell, when the Mercier passed just within 
a small island off Biloxi. 

These will be the bes’ place,” said Captain Marat to 
Wayne. 

''Slicky! Bert!” called Wayne. "Down with the 
jib!” 

" Aye, aye, sir.” 

" Man the fore halliards ! 

" Now Leslie, heave to ! — over with the wheel ! ” 


A TASTE OF SALT WATER 


45 


“ Aye, aye, sir.” 

The sails flapped, as the schooner pointed into the 
wind. 

“ Let go the fore halliards ! ” Wayne hauled in on the 
sheet. Main halliards ! Let go ! Now over with the 
anchor!” 

Slicky and Bert sprang forward and threw the anchor, 
while Joe helped Wayne furl the mainsail. Soon all was 
snug, and Captain Marat smiling. 

That was ver’ good — ver’ good. I could not have 
believe’ you learn soqueeck.” 

Say, Captain Marat,” said Ray, saluting. Mr. 
Wayne Scott, here, is some mate, isn’t he? You ought 
to have seen him two years ago, the day he became our 
leader. He’d told us he didn’t like to boss people. And 
one day, a fellow who was anxious to be leader, took us 
out and ordered us around like a bunch of tin soldiers. 
He managed to set fire to a cow-shed, and then didn’t 
know what to do — right. Then Wayne got excited — 
in that unexcited kind of way, you know — and took 
charge; and ordered us around like a circus man training 
horses — kept us all humping ; and first think you know, 
the big blaze was all out and hardly any harm done.” 

Captain Marat laughed. "‘Yes, I begin to fin’ heem 
out. He talk ver’ little and theenk ver’ much ; and w’en 
it is something to do, he wake up and know how to do it, 
queeck.” 

The boys stood casting curious eyes across the choppy 


46 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


half mile or so of bay, to the light-house and buildings 
of Biloxi. Captain Marat leaned on the rail beside the 
house, looking into the water. Presently he called to 
the others. 

I know you like veP much the oyster,’’ he said. ** In 
one hour you can get so many you want.” 

Looking into the clear water, the boys made out a 
rough matting of mottled gray. 

“ Now, Phil,” said Ray, “ get out your hook and line 
— Rufe’ll give you a slice of bacon for bait — and maybe 
we’ll have an oyster supper.” 

“ Some kinds of fish might bite at your tongue,” re- 
turned Phil. 

Maybe I don’t know your halt/* said Ray. Say, 
Captain, you ought to see Phil’s fins and steering-gear 
wiggle when his eye gets on my flap-jacks and bread pud- 
ding. He’ll tell you Fm some chef.” 

Rufe was got to hold back supper; and when the tide 
had ebbed enough, Wayne and Robert slipped overboard, 
clad in old shoes and trousers. Then came a shower 
of oysters on the schooner’s deck. 

After a time, Rufe sized up the pile. Bar’s nigh 
onto four bushel,” he said. “ I reckon, boys, dat 
enough.” 

The darky brought oyster-knives from the galley ; anti 
showed the boys how to break off an edge of shell, insert 
the knife, and cut loose the tidbit. He picked up a pep- 


A TASTE OF SALT WATER 


47 

per-shaker. “ An’ den you shakes de pepper, an’ — smack 
you’ lips, like dat.” (The — means he did it). 

The whole operation was done so quick, it was like 
sleight-of-hand. The boys followed Rufe’s example, 
though with less nimbleness; and it was not long till a 
bushel of the bivalves had gone the way. 

'‘An’ now,” said Rufe, “ ef you-all’ll jes’ climb de 
mas’, Stan’ on yo’ head, an’ settle yo’ ballas’ a li’le; I’ll 
make you de bes’est oystah stew you eveh got yo’ stum- 
micks roun’.” 

Nine white bowls were ranged round the table, each 
companioned by some one in some sort of sailor dress. 
The bowls were not yet empty, when black Rufe edged 
up to Phil Conger to deliver a sly nudge and wink; and 
Phil slipped to the galley and peeked in to the round 
nickel clock, skipped back down the starboard alleyway 
to the stern, and struck six bells. It was Phil’s watch, 
and he’d forgotten. 

" Too bad, Phil,” observed Ray, when Phil got back 
to his stew. " Next time we’ll have to rig up a line from 
the bell to the table.” 

It being a little late for a visit to town. Captain Marat 
hied the boys off in the boats to the little island, for a 
first swim in salt water. Soon there were many eyes 
smarting of the salt, and an unwonted spitting. 

" Say, fellows,” said Ray, making a wry face. 
" When I go home again I’ll bet it’ll be in a herring-keg.” 


48 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Soon Bert Hill and Charlie Manners were observed in 
shallow water, making unrecompensed grabs at something 
in the bottom. 

Crabs,” said Wayne. 

Then the whole company joined in the pursuit, moving 
down the beach ; but no one made a strike. Finally Ray 
straightened himself, his face showing disgust. 

** Say,” he began, those side-steppers haven’t any 
more accommodation than a base ball umpire. At first 
it looked as if they thought it was a foot race and they’d 
just get out of the way; but I saw that last fellow laugh- 
ing at me.” 

Then he followed Leslie’s eyes to something down the 
beach. “ Look at that giant frying-pan sliding for the 
water,” he said. And it’s going handle first.” 

ril bet that’s a loggerhead turtle,” said Wayne. 
“You remember those we saw in the French Market?” 

And then Phil claimed all attention, as he limped out of 
the water. “ Ow ! Ow ! ” he howled. “ I’m stung.” 

And eight pairs of eyes inspected his foot — no wound 
visible. 

“ Aw,” mocked Ray. “ Just a game to show off your 
purty little tootsie wootsies.” 

“ I tell you it hurts ! ” exploded Phil. “ You can’t see 
every hurt. And I saw it — looked like a thin turtle, 
and had a long tail.” 

“ And thereby hangs a stinger,” misquoted Ray. 

Dusk sent the boats back to the Mercier; and while 


A TASTE OF SALT WATER 


49 

Bert pulled aloft the white anchor-light, the boys re- 
counted their adventures, to the loud guffaws of Rufe. 

“ An’ you-all didn’ ketch nary crab? ” he grinned. 

Aw, we were just making believe,” said Ray; just 
to scare ’em.” 

I show you nex’ time how to get those crab,” smiled 
Captain Marat. 

Then came the story of Phil’s hurt. 

It was the stingaree,” explained Jean Marat. 

Light broke in Phil’s face. I might have known that 
was the name of the thing,” he said. Stingaree! ” 

“ Then I’m going to name these things stingarissees,” 
Ray avowed, slapping his neck viciously. 

“ Most on dem’s san’-flies — de li’le ones,” explained 
Rufe. 

“ And what are these big fellows ? ” said Ray. 

O dem’s gallinippers,” said Rufe. 

Gall’nippers,” sniffed Ray. Do they take me for a 
gal? Tell ’em different, Rufe.” 

Rufe exploded immoderately. O dat ain’ de way — 
haw! haw! — Dey’s de gals deyselves!” And the jolly 
black turned to the galley, where, setting things to rights, 
he continued alternately to roar and snicker over his joke 
for some time, under the silent observation of the mos- 
quito-pestered Ray. 

Darkness fell in the short space that characterizes the 
more tropic regions, and the boys retreated to the protec- 
tion of their mosquito bars. 


50 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


They were up ahead of the sun in the morning; and 
while Rule’s biscuits browned in the oven, they made 
dives into the stifling cabin for suitable raiment for their 
trip to shore. Rufe, alone, stayed on board ; and as the 
boats swung off, he leaned on the rail to admonish the 
crews to be back for dinner at one, sharp. 

At the post office news awaited them in the way of a 
letter from Mr. Blaisdell. Our voyagers grouped them- 
selves in a corner ; and — interrupted now and then with 
such ejaculations as : That’s the fellow that broke into 

the cabin ! ” and Looks like something doing ” — Wayne 
read the following : — 


Dear Friends — 

I have now to tell you of a circumstance very appar- 
ently bearing on the purposes of your voyage. When 
you had finally passed out of view down the basin, I 
turned to find a strange chap at my elbow, evidently 
wanting a word with me. “ You’ frien’s in the schooner 
— they sail far? ” he asked. — “ Some distance, perhaps,” 
I told him. — “They go some special places?” he asked 
again. The man’s interest seemed to have some design. 
— “Perhaps,” I ahswered. “iWhy do you ask?” He 
appeared disconcerted ; and it occurred to me that given a 
little patronage, he might reveal something of the source 
of his concern. So I added, offering as much informa- 
tion as I felt could do no harm — “ They are going down 
the Florida coast to meet friends.” — “Ah!” he said, 
surprised into a stronger expression of his interest. 
“ They go to meet Loyo ? ” He hung eagerly for the 
answer. — “You know Loyo?” I asked in turn: and he 
hesitated, doubtful how he ought to answer. I con- 


A TASTE OF SALT WATER 


51 


tinued, You come from Loyo?” He hesitated a mo- 
ment again; and then he said — ‘'Yes. Do they have 
paper for Loyo? ” Now his ardency had got the better 
of his caution. — “ Yes, I think they have perhaps,” I 
said. With that he seemed to have got all he wanted, 
and was eager to be off; and parried all my efforts to 
probe further, with evasions and bows. And at last he 
tore himself away, and tripped off. 

He was a little man, a type of what is called the 
“ Dago ” sailor ; and shrewd and cringing — should you 
meet up with him. 

Now, lads, during this rencounter, I did as fast think- 
ing as can be expected of a grizzled old head; and it 
seemed to me that the information I gave might serve 
your turn better than silence. If he really came from 
Loyo, it will prepare Loyo to meet you. If he does not 
come from him — you will, as well, be likely to meet 
those who are in some way linked with him. And so you 
will be in the way of making as much as you can of a 
greater or less opportunity to seize guidance to the un- 
known and mysterious goal of your voyage. 

Again I counsel you — be not rash. And bon voyage! 

Marvin Blaisdell. 

“Whew!’^ whistled Ray. “The plot deepens.” 

“What do you think?” said Wayne, turning to Jean 
Marat. 

“ Thad man do not come from Loyo,” insisted Marat, 
and there was no doubt in his manner. 

Wayne added a line to a letter already prepared for 
Mr. Blaisdell, and deposited it. As the boys moved up 
and down the interesting streets, canopied with moss- 
hung great-oaks, Wayne kept in the wake — very pen- 


52 THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 

sive, and entirely unconscious of the good-natured inu- 
endoes his comrades directed back to him from time to 
time. His mind was over busy with sorting, and fram- 
ing, and building on the mystery, to the solution of which 
Mr. Blaisdell’s letter had given more or less matched 
material. 


CHAPTER VI 


THE DEVIL-FISH — SQUALLS, CALMS, AND SPONGING 

O N the morrow, a favorable breeze coaxed aloft the 
sails of the Mercier before five o’clock. During 
the summer months. Captain Marat said, the winds were 
none too certain ; it was mostly “ a feast or a famine,” 
and wise sailors took advantage of anything between. 
Then came two days of watch on and off, the boys each 
getting a taste of the wheel, and large measure of gazing 
on the panorama of distant shore, the sporting of por- 
poises, the fishing activities of generous-billed pelicans. 
Mobile Bay was allowed to slip by; and the Mercier 
spurned all invitations to hang up, till the forts guarding 
the gate to Pensacola Bay hove in view. 

The anchor found the bottom off the town, amidst a 
whole city of ships. A cosmopolitan city it was, for here 
nearly all countries were represented, with vessels of 
every grade of tonnage, and of every approved pattern 
of rigging. That forest of spars delighted the young 
voyagers, and their heads swam with the effort to follow 
intelligently Jean Marat’s technical lecture on a few of 
the nearest. 

We shall not follow the boys in their visits ashore: 
to the town, the fort, and the navy yard ; more important 

53 


54 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


things — at sea — are developing. So passed some days. 
The schooner Mercier lay becalmed on the smooth sea; 
the unbroken ring of horizon all about was but clear sky 
and clear sea. A whole day and night had passed thus. 
Even Ray pulled a long face, and refused to look abroad 
on the monotonous plain. The Mercier rose and fell ever 
so gently in the otherwise imperceptible swell. The bell 
tolled the time each half hour; and the ever more insistent 
mosquitoes sang, and f^d by short spells on the tender 
necks of the crew. 

At eight bells, noon. Captain Marat, to divert the boys, 
got out his sextant and took the observation, and on the 
chart marked the location — lat. 29° 52' north; long. 
85° 56' west. 

“ On the chart,” observed Wayne, it doesn’t look so 
far from shore.” 

No,” said Captain Marat, only thirty mile. And 
Cape San Bias nearly alway rough.” 

What’s that commotion in the water over there ? ” 
said Leslie, looking off eastward. 

‘‘ Ah ! ” said Captain Marat, stepping to the starboard 
rail, ‘‘ a school of feesh — I guess thee devil-feesh after 
them. Ged thee harpoon.” 

Robert sprang down into the cabin and brought out the 
weapon. Jean Marat made the long rope fast to the 
rigging, climbed on the rail; and, harpoon in hand, 
watched the ruffled water coming closer. Then the boys 
made out the long, radiating ropes of tentacles. And the 


THE DEVIL-FISH 


55 


next instant the harpoon flashed into the midst. The 
water foamed — the stick was seen to fly over the surface 
as the rope payed out ; and the next moment there was a 
snap, and the section of rope flew back, striking the deck 
with much force. 

He’s gone! ” said Ray. I hope he’ll have joy of 
that harpoon.” 

He was ver’ big one,” explained Marat. 

Looks as if that devil-fish whistled up a breeze,” said 
Robert. 

Catspaws showed here and there. 

Ray,” said Captain Marat, '' haul in on thee jib 
sheet till she come roun’ — So, thad is good. Now help 
Charlie trim thee main sheet, and then thee fore. Phil, 
hoi’ her southeas’ and by eas’, half eas’.” 

By the time the port watch (Wayne’s) went on for 
the first dog-watch — at eight bells (four o’clock), the 
Mercier was making a good six knots; and there was a 
lively sea on. The mosquitoes were less insistent, not 
caring to brave the wind; and altogether, cheer shone 
out from bowsprit to rudder. At nine. Cape San Bias 
Light showed to the north. At six bells (eleven o’clock) 
Wayne called Captain Marat; Cape St. George light 
shone to the southeast. 

Ah, now we soon be in the West Pass,” said Marat. 

When the rest of the starboard watch was called, they 
were told they were in Apalachicola Bay; and lights of 
the town beckoned to the anchorage. 


56 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


On the second morning after, the Mercier ambled along 
up St. George’s Sound, under a southerly breeze, puffy 
and threatening to go out, like a lamp drained of oil. 
The schooner passed Dog Island Reef a little after noon, 
and set her nose out into the Gulf. Then soon, a black 
blanket of cloud loomed up in the northwest. 

** A beeg squall ees coming,” said Captain Marat. 

Over weeth the anchor, and take in sail. Make your- 
se’f queeck! ” 

Everything was barely got snug when the wind bore 
down. In a few moments the bowsprit was invisible 
from the house, so dark had it become. And the 
schooner plunged like a frantic horse; and the wind 
whistled fiercely in the rigging. Though the crew stood 
closely grouped, each must shout to make himself heard 
by the others. 

Eef the anchor should geeve,” called Captain Marat, 

hang tight to sometheeng.” 

Wayne and Robert got down on hands and knees and 
crawled slowly, and with immense difficulty, to the bow, 
where they watched the powerful wrenching on the an- 
chor-chain, dreading each moment to see it parted from 
the anchor. Spray whipped their faces with stinging 
lashes, and went hissing down the deck. A bucking 
broncho was the only analogy Wayne could find for the 
wild antics of the Mercier now, lashed by the whip of this 
fierce squall. 

And then, as if considering that ten minutes of such 


THE DEVIL-FISH 


57 


punishment was all that even a staunch schooner could 
be expected to bear, the storm withdrew its fury. The 
last of the black clouds scampered seaward; the sun came 
out; and, except for the billows that continued to roll, 
and a normal breeze that came on the tail of the storm, 
all was tranquil. 

When the anchor came up, there showed a slight bend 
in one arm. 

‘‘ Ah ! eet was hard pull,’' said Marat. 

In a couple of hours, now, the land had dipped below 
the horizon behind; and Robert, at the wheel, held the 
fore and aft mark on east by south. Before going off 
the second dog-watch, at eight, Ray set the side-lights. 

When the port watch was called, at four in the morn- 
ing, Captain Marat informed his mate (Wayne) that the 
wind had considerably slackened soon after two bells 
(one o’clock), but that land should be visible soon, where- 
upon he should change his course to south southeast. 
Wayne took the wheel, Robert went forward on lookout, 
and Bert and Leslie conversed in the waist. 

Wayne would let his eye rest a moment on the compass, 
where it swung in the binnacle, illumined by its lamp; 
and then his eye would travel to the gently pulling sails, 
standing well out to port under the fair but mild breeze ; 
and he would in turn look out over Robert’s head, where 
he paced the bows, and note the growing light in the 
east. The ripples tinkled their soft tune along the 
schooner’s sides. But Wayne heard neither this nor the 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


58 

murmuring of Leslie’s and Bert’s voices amidship. His 
mind was deep in conjectures bearing on the ultimate 
goal of the voyage. He asked himself such questions 
as these : Why had not Loyo himself come to New Or- 
leans, or sent a telegram of inquiry relative to his mas- 
ter’s failure to meet him at the rendezvous? Or if, as 
was feared, something had happened to Loyo, what was 
the motive of that chap who had broken into the Mer- 
cier's cabin, evidently in search of the papers in the secret 
drawer? Was he friendly to Loyo’s and Julian Lamar- 
tine’s interests? If friendly, why had he not communi- 
cated with Jean Marat, as Loyo would have done? If 
unfriendly, what sort of crew was to be met with at this 
rendezvous down the coast? And where was this mys- 
terious place, where bided the lost Julian Lamartine? 
Wayne in time began to squirm with impatience for an- 
swers to these riddles. Finally there came an interrup- 
tion to his painful revery. 

“ Land-ho ! ” called Robert, perched on the fore-cross- 
trees, to which he had climbed. 

Wayne awoke to the realization that it was broad day ; 
and he blew out the binnacle light. Leslie and Bert had 
already taken down the red and green side-lights. 

It was near another hour before those on deck made 
out the line of land below the now some time risen sun. 
Wayne changed the course to south southeast and re- 
linquished the wheel to Leslie. 

The schooner was making barely three knots, so Cap- 


THE DEVIL-FISH 


59 


tain Marat said, and it was going to three o’clock in the 
next port watch, when Cedar Keys was sighted. Out of 
the northwest, a squall of considerable liveliness came 
down and carried the Mercier at a canty pace inside Sea 
Horse Key Light, and left her almost becalmed a con- 
siderable way to the southeast, and a few miles off shore. 

It was in the first dog-watch; Wayne, Robert, Leslie, 
and Bert were observing some spongers, a group of small 
vessels near a mile away. Captain Marat was explain- 
ing how they tore the sponges from the sea bottom with 
their long pairs of rakes, joined scissors-like. Then came 
a leaning over the rail to spy for sponges in the clear 
water — the bottom quite visible thirty-five feet below 
the barely moving schooner. Nary a sponge could the 
boys see, or said so. 

Marat laughed. '' I show you,” he offered. ‘‘ Now, 
see there, thad black roun’ — like a stone. Thad thee 
sponge.” 

Think of it!” said Bert. '‘Sponges, free — only 
to pick them.” 

“ Let’s try,” said Wayne. 

In fifteen minutes, Joe had rigged a bunch of grappling- 
hooks on the end of a small rope, and the hooks fastened 
as well to the end of a long rod. The free end of rope, 
fast to the fore rigging, Wayne took a position on the rail, 
beside the cabin, and thrust the pole into the deep, till 
the hooks hovered just over the sea floor. 

Presently, slowly there came into view a round black' 


6o 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


stone. Thrust ! went the pole, and the hooks clawed into 
it. They tore out. Two more failures. And then the 
fourth black ball clung to the hooks. Gingerly, Wayne 
pulled in. The round black thing came aboard, less re- 
sembling a sponge than a large wet ball of black yam. 
This new kind of fishing ceased only when a round dozen 
lay on the deck. 

The captain, who for a time had been using his binocu- 
lars on some object off the port bow, called the boys. 

You can not see ver’ good,” he said, but I explain.” 

And then he told them that what they saw so imper- 
fectly were some sponge-corrals, that lay in shallows, 
between a sm,all island (key) and the mainland. These 
corrals were constructed of stakes set close together ; and 
the new-plucked sponges were dumped within. At flow 
of tide they were covered by the sea ; at the ebb they lay 
high and dry, beaten by the sun. This alternate wetting 
and drying rotted off the black envelope in a few days. 

Wayne and Joe seized on the hint, and gathered the 
catch of sponges into an improvised corral on deck. And 
for the next few days the boys made them their especial 
care, wetting them every evening and morning with 
buckets of sea water. In time they were able to tear off 
the black covering, and the sponges came to light, and 
were then hung in the sun to bleach. 

Times held down by calms, times kicked along lively 
by squalls, it was July third before the crew of the Mer~ 
cier lay up for a real bit of play. 


CHAPTER VII 


CRABS — NEWS OF THE MIGUEL 

T he *Mercier set her bowsprit through Boca Grande 
Pass at six bells of the morning watch, sailed down 
within Charlotte Harbor, and at two o’clock dropped her 
anchor off the white sand beach, backed by the intermin- 
able line of graceful palms. 

There was now to be several days of uninterrupted 
play, and such bits of Scouting as the boys saw fit to 
practice. 

The grinning Rufe squatted on the deck, in the shade 
of his galley, and turned his eyes on Ray. 

** I reckon we-all’s guine t’ have a mess o’ crabs foh 
suppah, ain’ we?” he said. 

Say, Rufe,” returned Ray, we’re going to have that 
kettle of crabs if I have to build a corral around them — 
if I can only get to shore ahead of Phil, here. When he 
gets after those stingarees — well — ” 

Aw, stingaree yourself,” pouted Phil. You didn’t 
even catch that much, that day.” 

Soon the two boats were pulled up on the beach of the 
key, and the whole ship’s crew were on the white stretch 
of sand. Under the direction of Jean Marat, each of 

6i 


62 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


the boys got himself a stick and whittled it to a sharp 
point. 

‘‘ Now,” said the smiling Marat, thee firs’ one who 
catch a crab weel egsplain to the res’ how he do it.” 

Then the boys scattered along the hot, glaring beach, 
watched by Marat and Rufe. The stick spears began 
confidently to stab at things in the shallow water, but al- 
ways came up again empty; to the astonishment of the 
spearsmen, who made most rueful faces. 

The sight was too much for black Rufe, and he rolled 
in the sand, holding his sides and shouting to keep from 
bursting with the laughter that accumulated in him faster 
than he could vent it. 

Ray was the first to take cognizance ; and he poised his 
wee spear in his fingers, as he looked on the convulsed 
darky, put on his serious face, and said to his nearest 
comrades : 

Say, fellows, look at Rufe. He’s getting something 
— religion maybe.” 

And that brought fresh explosions from the sea-cook.^ 

But there were two of the boys, each of whom, after 
a couple of jabs, stopped to analyze his failure — in this 
art of spitting crabs on a stick; with the result that finally, 
first Joe, and then Wayne, exhibited a crab on the end of 
his spear. A shout from Phil brought the fishers all to- 
gether. 

“ Ah,” said Jean Marat, I see you two have fin’ out 
thee tr-rick. Now, Joe, you tell how you do eet.” 


CRABS — NEWS OF THE MIGUEL 63 

“ Well/’ began Joe, thrusting his spear on a slant in 
the water, ‘‘ you see, the stick looks like it makes a bend 
forward just where it enters the water, and the end of 
the stick in the sand bottom seems to be forward of the 
spot to which the stick actually points. So a crab on the 
bottom really looks to be farther away from you than he 
really is, and you have to aim this side of where he seems 
to be in order to get him.” 

Thad is ver’ good,” said Captain Marat. Thee 
science men say id ees thee refraction of thee light at the 
top of thee water.” 

We ought to have known that,” offered Charlie Man- 
ners ; we had that in high school.” 

I tells you how it look to me,” interposed Rufe. ** It 
look to me like dey’s moh science den crabs in dis heah 
speculation. Ef you-all’s a-guine to eat crabs foh sup- 
pah, an’ ef de sticks have to go crooked befo’ dey gits de 
crabs, you-all bes’ git crooked sticks an’ go after um.” 

But for all that Rufe contented himself with a straight 
stick, and joined in the pursuit; and the pail was soon 
filled. 

Robert and Leslie rowed Rufe, with the crabs, back 
to the schooner, returning to rejoin the rest of the boys, 
who scampered through the narrow grove of tall palms 
to the Gulf side of the key; where for some time they 
rolled in the surf, and collected many wonderful shells, 
and marvelled at the many samples of star-fish that 
studded the wide beach. 


64 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Listen, fellows ! ” said Charlie at last. 

The boys then heard the croaking of the fog-horn, 
coming through the palms. 

Into your pajamas! ” said Ray. That’s Rufe yell- 
ing — * Cr-a-abs ! ’ ” 

The smoking dish in the center of the table soon began 
to melt of its heap, and the little piles of broken bits of 
claws grew beside the plates. 

‘‘ Tomorrow’s Independence Day, fellows,” said 
Wayne. How are we going to celebrate?” 

And we’ve got nary a firecracker,” wailed Phil. 

“ There’s a town, according to the chart,” said Wayne, 
“ about seven or eight miles down the big island. Do 
you think. Captain Marat, we could get some firecrackers 
there ? ” 

I theenk maybe,” encouraged Marat. 

Then came the suggestion that one watch go down 
there in the morning in one of the boats, and take a 
wireless set, for practice. 

Day had not yet dawned, when — ^^Bangl” A gun- 
shot jolted the loose things on the deck. The boys poked 
out their heads from the bars, to see Jean Marat smiling, 
his smoking shotgun in his hands. Both barrels had gone 
off. 

I thought that was Rufe — getting something,” ob- 
served Ray. 

The sun was not yet up, when the port watch climbed 
into one of the boats, with a suit-case holding a wireless 


CRABS — NEWS OF THE MIGUEL 65 

set, and pointed the bow southeastward. It was slow- 
going, and it was near eight o’clock when Wayne and 
crew found their bunches of firecrackers, in a general 
store. The clerk was the proprietor’s son, a talkative 
chap. 

‘‘ That’s your schooner over by the key, isn’t it ? ” said 
the boy. 

Yes,” said Wayne. 

What’s her name ? ” 

“ The Mercierl' 

We don’t see many schooners, inside here,” the boy 
ran on. There was one here last month — named 
the Miguel/' (The name brought the boys sharp up 
with eager interest). The captain was a Dago — was 
looking for cartridges for Mauser rifles. We don’t have 
any. Nobody uses them kind o’ rifles here. I started to 
ask one of the men where they was from, but the cap- 
tain pulled him away. He was a grouchy cuss that cap- 
tain was.” 

'‘Was there a black man with them?” questioned 
Wayne. 

“ No,” said the boy. “ I rowed out to take a look at 
the schooner, but I didn’t see no nigger on her. I like to 
sail. I’m goin’ to buy a sloop that’s up at Fort Myers. 
She’s a dandy big sail, brass letters — ” 

“ When was it they were here? ” asked Wayne. 

“ Oh, about three weeks ago.” 

“ Which way did they sail? ” 


66 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


** Oh, they went back south. Dad told the captain he 
didn’t think he could get them Mauser ca’tridges this side 
o’ New Orleans, an’ the captain just nodded his head like 
he thought so too. We’re going to have some fireworks 
here tonight. Say, I can sell you some o’ them rockets 
cheap — an’ some pin-wheels.” 

Wayne and Robert, full of the news, went to join Bert 
and Leslie, out front; where they found them watching 
some of the town’s boys exploding firecrackers in an 
old gasoline can. 

“ What do you think they wanted with those car- 
tridges?” finally queried Leslie. 

Wayne shook his head. “ Don’t know,” he said. 

We’re on the track, I guess. An4 Loyo wasn’t along.” 
And he fell to musing over the thing. 

Within the hour, they had the boat on the beach, a mile 
up shore from the town; and they set up the aerial wires 
between trees. 


CHAPTER VIII 


THE FOURTH TURTLE-TURNING 

O N board the Mercier, preparations went forward. 

First, up went the Stars and Stripes to the main- 
mast-head; the patrol pennant was hauled to the fore- 
mast-head; and Ray and Phil scouted out every bit of red, 
white, or blue rag on board, and stuck it to the jib-stay. 
Then while Ray, Charlie, and Phil prepared to swab the 
decks, Captain Marat threw into the second ship’s boat 
a net, and called Joe Hunt to row him. 

“ I theenk, Rufe,” said Marat, “ maybe we have some 
mullet for dinner.” 

Rufe came out from his galley, where the pans had al- 
ready taken on a shine like mirrors. 

Bake’ mullet,” grinned he. Dat jes’ one o’ mah 
speshalities, captain; an’ ah’s got jes’ de stuff foh de 
dressin’.” 

Joe rowed quietly; and Marat in the bow, stood gazing 
into the clear water. Presently he began to gather the net 
on his right arm, holding a coil of rope in the left hand. 
The boys on board gathered at the rail to watch. Then 
suddenly, the captain gave a swing to the net, and it 
spread over the water, bell-shaped, and sank. By the 

67 


68 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


rope, he soon had it into the boat, and the flapping things 
told of his success. Two more throws, and a plenteous 
mess of mullet was brought in to black Rufe. 

Dis is whah I shines, boys,” he enthused. Dis is 
whah I shines. Jes’ you wait, an’ ef I doan make yo’ 
mouths water ! ” 

When the boys had thrown the last bucketful over the 
decks, Jean Marat exhibited his cast-net, spreading it out 
to its bell shape. The edge was weighted with leads, 
and from all around small, ropes converged, like spokes 
of a wheel, to the center, where they were bent to a single 
rope that passed up through a ring at the apex of the 
bell. 

You see,” explained Marat, w’en I throw it out, it 
on thee rope, and thee side’ they come together like one 
spread, and come down over thee feesh ; and then I pull 
bag, weeth the feesh in — thees-a-way.” And he pulled 
on the rope in demonstration. 

“ Gee,” observed Ray. “ That would lasso a whole 
family, and the sisters-in-law. — Say, fellows,” on a sud- 
den recollection,^' it’s about time we’re setting up the 
wireless. The port watch might be calling.” 

Using the flag and pennant halliards, it took not many 
minutes to swing the aerials between the mast-heads ; and 
Ray, always quick, had the instruments in working order 
in no time. With the receiver clasped to his head, he 
moved the slide forward and back, intent on picking up 
the call. But it wasn’t till there had passed half an hour 


THE FOURTH — TURTLE-TURNING 69 

of frequent visits to the instrument, that Ray finally got 
the flash of the call. 

There they are ! he said. And he flashed back, I 
I.^’ And he called Charlie to take down what should 
come. 

Ray called out the letters, as he got them in dashes and 
dots, and Charlie set them down — M-i-g-u-e-1,” and so 
on. When it was completed, Charlie exhibited the mes- 
sage, as follows : 

Miguel here three weeks back. Loyo not along.’’ 

Jean Marat took the paper in his fingers and read the 
words silently. He shook his head solemnly and repeated 
aloud — 'Loyo not al-ong.’ Thad w’at I been ’fraid of. 
Sometheeng wrong weeth Loyo — seeck maybe.” He 
spoke as if he thought that last should be the most favor- 
able construction. For he knew Loyo never failed to 
come with the Miguel when his master was absent. 

The exchange of wireless messages continued for some 
time, each of the boys at either end trying his speed at 
sending and receiving. Rufe made frequent visits to ex- 
press his wonder — qualified by much doubt of the verity 
of this " talkin’ sebben mile widout no wire tube.” 

" Say,” he persisted, " you-all is jes’ a puttin’ on, to 
fool dis heah niggah. You ain’ sho’ nuff talkin’ wid dem 
port watchers.” 

" Give us a message to send them,” offered Ray. 
" And then when they come, find out for yourself.” 

" Jes’ you tell um,” began Rufe, " dat we has baked 


70 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


mullet wid dressin’ foh dinnah; an’ to come soon’s dey 
kin git dey-alls contraptions in de boat. Kin de wire — 
dat ain’ no wire — hoi’ all dat, or is it gwine jes’ fall in de 
bay? ” And he grinned his doubts. 

Joe flashed the message. 

An hour and a half later, Wayne’s boat had come within 
hailing distance, and black Rufe leaned over the Mercier's 
rail. 

Poart watch, ahoy ! ” he called. Did you-all git 
mah message ? ” 

Baked mullet with dressing for dinner,” called back 
Wayne, and come as soon as we can get our contrap- 
tions in the boat.” 

‘‘ 0 -wee!” shouted Rufe. “Dat jes’ w’at I sayed. 
Golly! but ain’ dat wonderful! Dat sho nuff settles it. 
I nebber would a beliebed it.” 

After dinner, a few firecrackers were unbunched, and 
were soon snapping zealously over the water. Jean 
Marat brought out his armory. Besides the shot-gun, he 
had a pair of handsome rifles : a 32 repeater, and one of 
larger calibre. 

“ Now I show you w’at thees one can do,” he said, pat- 
ting the latter arm. “ Take your glass, and look at thee 
piece of paper w’at I feex on one palm yesterday. Thad 
is aboud 450 yard’.” 

“ Over a quarter of a mile,” said Wayne. 

“Jus’ so,” said Marat, adjusting the sights. “Now, 
do you see thad paper ? ” 


THE FOURTH — TURTLE-TURNING 71 

Yes,’^ said the boys, their eyes to the binoculars; and 
they watched the square bit of paper, so far away. 

Jean Marat, standing free, put the rifle to his shoulder. 
In the next moment came the report; and the boys saw 
what seemed like a blot of ink suddenly appear about the 
the center of the paper. 

The astonishment was general. 

Now keep thee eyes on the paper till I say,*’ re- 
quested Marat. 

And then, immediately following each of four reports, 
there appeared a blot near each of the four corners of the 
paper. 

Say,” said the astounded Ray. Do you suppose 
you could miss if you tried hard enough?” 

‘‘ Thees gun never mees,” said Jean Marat, again pat- 
ting the rifle. 

Rufe put into the boats some cooking utensils and eat- 
ables, and all the company went to the ke) , It was a 
gala afternoon, what with firing of crackers, target prac- 
tice with the smaller rifle, tumbling in the surf, and spear- 
ing crabs for supper, and all. \nd then, after dark, came 
the whirring of the rockets over the bay, and the colored 
pin-wheels, and finally a trial at turtle-turning. 

Wayne’s watch hunted up the outer beach, and the 
starboard watch went southward. 

Wayne and his crew had trod the beach near three 
miles ; it was nearing ten, and the moon was slowly mov- 
ing down for its dip into the sea, when Robert’s sharp eye 


72 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


spied something far ahead, and he darted forward. 
When the others came up, he had a green-turtle on its 
back. It measured seventeen inches across. 

Well,” said Wayne, we’ve got the dinner for to- 
morrow, even if the other fellows don’t get anything.” 

So they took up the march back to the anchorage. The 
boys had never been in so attractive a situation. The 
moon laid a glistening track on the lightly disturbed 
water of the Gulf, and gave a pretty light to the surf as 
it rolled on the edge of the broad, white beach. On the 
other side, the tall palms appeared at once dignified and 
friendly; and the lower dried fans rustled — soothing; 
and the clear air was balmy, and redolent of flowers and 
the sea. 

“ Say,” said Leslie, I’d like to spend all the rest of 
the time right here.” 

The starboard watch had turned two loggerhead 
turtles ; but they were set loose, to scamper turtle fashion 
into the sea; and the more edible green-turtle found his 
way into the kettle next day — to come out as one of 
Rufe’s “ speshialities.” 

Several days thus passed, before the boys were con- 
tent to leave these pleasure-grounds. And then the sails 
went up, and no stop was made again till they were come 
to a place but eighty miles to the north of the spot where 
the two schooners of Pedro Lamartine were used to 
meet; and there remained nearly a week till the time 
when, in the usual order, Loyo should be on hand at the 


THE FOURTH — TURTLE-TURNING 


73 


rendezvous. If, indeed, Loyo should come, a thing 
which, Jean Marat confessed to Wayne, seemed very 
doubtful. 

The Mercier had come to a little bay, whence the boys 
meant to penetrate the mainland, to get a taste of the 
scenes there, and to seek some sort of adventure with al- 
ligators; and that, Jean Marat assured them^, would be 
no very difficult achievement. 

It was Friday evening, two hours before sunset, when 
the anchor was dropped, above a mile off from shore, in 
the shallows. The next day was but just in its dawning, 
when the two boats, bearing all of the ship’s company 
but Rufe, moved shore-ward on the incoming tide. They 
made for the mouth of a creek, and were soon moving 
between the hammock-fringed shores: first the tangled 
mangrove, then palms, oaks, magnolias, mattings of wild- 
grape vines. The boats cut through floating islands of 
water-lettuce, a bit of which Phil nearly choked on, before 
Marat could call a warning. For it has a rough sur- 
face, like a cow’s tongue, and thereby an unhappy ten- 
dency to travel quickly toward the throat. 

Look how funny that log moves, over there,” said 
Bert Hill. And he pointed to something having the look 
of two knots of a heavy log just topping the water. 

I theenk thad log sink ver’ queeck,” said Captain 
Marat. And in that moment it disappeared. 

It was the alligator,” explained Marat. 

They had not to go far till they discovered another, 


74 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


lazying it on a piece of sand shore. This one, with ap- 
parent reluctance, made some strides and vanished in the 
water. Marat then took up his rifle ; and when the boats 
turned a point, surprising another alligator basking on 
the shore, the report of the rifle came just as the saurian 
got to the water’s edge. There was a few moments’ vio- 
lent commotion, and Mr. Alligator floated, belly up. 

When they dragged him ashore, Marat measured him. 

“ Thad good size,” he said. Thirteen feet.” 

The alligators proved to be almost as plentiful as tur- 
tles; and two miles up Marat caught one in the pine 
woods, lassoing it, a small four-footer; which was finally 
freed, when the boys had witnessed sufficient examples 
of its vicious nature — snapping at sticks, and lashing 
about with its tail. 


CHAPTER IX 


THE MIGUEL SIGHTED LAFITTE GOYA 

H OW the boys canre upon herds of deer; how Marat 
discovered signs of a wild turkey roost, and they 
returned before daylight and brought down a gobbler; 
and how Rufe turned him into a feast; and the fishing, 
and many another expericence in the Florida wilds, 
might be -here recorded. But with the nearness to the 
island rendezvous, and the time, Wayne, especially, be- 
gan to experience impatience for the answers to the riddles 
that had so filled his mind since the beginning of the voy- 
age. And it is doubtless equally so with the reader. So 
we will pass over those few days, and take up the legend 
with the Mercier some sixty miles to the south. 

The voyagers had been off Naples at daylight; and 
now, after near fourteen hours under the mildest of 
breezes, the Mercier was keeping to her three knots, in a 
position seven or eight miles off shore, and pointing her 
bowsprit to a small palm key five miles distant. With 
the exception of Leslie (at the wheel — just striking five 
bells of the second dog-watch) the boys all clustered at 
the bows, eyes on the little island ahead. For that was 
the rendezvous, Jean Marat had told them. 

75 


76 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Marat stretched out his arm toward the sun, fingers 
closed, thumb up; the lower edge of his hand on a line 
with the watery horizon, the tip of his thumb just touch- 
ing the sun. 

In one hour thee sun go down,” he said. 

Can we make it before dark. Captain? ” said Ray. 

No,” answered Marat. But we have good moon- 
light to fin’ thee anchorage.” 

I don’t see any schooner,” said Ray. And he gazed 
intently through the binoculars. 

'' Well,” said Phil, she isn’t due till tomorrow. What 
kind of glasses do you think you’ve got, you mutt? ” 

Well I swan ! ” said Ray, feigning astonishment, 
while he inspected the binoculars. I thought these 
were yours ; and they’re only just my own — no wonder.” 

The sun sunk in the sea, and night seemed to come on 
almost at once. The captain was at the wheel, as the 
Mercier slowly approached the anchorage Marat knew so 
well. The moon, approaching the full, made the white 
stretch of beach to shine, and put some sparkle in tall 
trunks of palms, which towered still and ghost-like, their 
high, over-luxuriant heads bristling, as it were with curl- 
papers. 

There lay a small bight of shore, between a point to 
the north and another southeast. It was in this sheltered 
place the anchor was let go. Before all had been made 
snug, Wayne pointed out a glimmer of light coming 
through the island growth at the south. 


THE MIGUEL SIGHTED 


77 

“ Ah! ” said Jean Marat, looking, I theenk we will 
go and see/' 

Directly, a boat, bearing Wayne, Ray, and Marat, 
moved in to shore. Pulling the boat high on the beach, 
the three passed among the palms and came out to the 
south of the point. A fire burned on the white sand; 
and about it lounged five men. Off from shore, bathed 
in the moonlight, there stood out the masts and hull of 
a small schooner. As our three approached, one of the 
five stood up. 

‘‘ Is thad the Miguel?” asked Jean Marat. 

Si, senor” spoke he who stood. An' you come in 
the Mercier? ” he added. 

“ Yes," said Marat. “ Is Loyo with you? " he asked. 
At this question Wayne saw a significant look pass among 
the loungers. 

‘‘ No," said the other. Loyo — he has thee seeckness 
— thee — rheumatiz'. I — a — Captain Lafitte Goya, 
my nam' — I come in hees place." 

I am Jean Marat," said Marat, and these young 
men are Wayne Scott and Ray Reid." 

Senor Pedro Lamartine donot come ? " queried La- 
fitte Goya. “ He nevaire before sen' any one helse to 
meet my crew." 

His manner was of one trying to carry himself off well 
in a false position. 

Pedro Lamartine ees dead," said Jean Marat. 

Dead I " said Goya. Ees those possib' ! " 


78 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


To Wayne’s eyes Lafitte Goya’s astonishment was al- 
together feigned ; and he observed an eloquently derisive 
smile on one single intellectual face among the men, a 
smile that seemed to give the lie to Goya’s pretensions. 

Marat went through the farce of corroborating his 
statement with certain details, well confident himself that 
it was not, any of it, news to Lafitte Goya. Goya then 
reported that the load of shell had been carried back, 
when the Mercier failed to meet the Miguel on the former 
voyage; and he gave some fragmentary account of Loyo’s 
sickness, an account which, as it seemed to Wayne, did 
not ring altogether true. Strike a bell having streaks of 
impure metal, and to the acute ear it will ring with subtle 
inflections of tone of a false quality. And so it seemed 
plain to Wayne that Lafitte Goya was not telling the 
whole story of Loyo. 

You maybe have — a — some message for Loyo ? ” 
ventured Goya at last. 

‘‘ Yes,” said Jean Marat, ‘‘ and for Julian Lamartine.” 

“ Ah, well,” said Goya, I weel take heem.” 

‘‘We make plan to sail with you — it ees necessary.” 
Marat put it so, at a venture. 

An antagonistic gleam mingled with Goya’s startled 
look, as he replied : 

“ Na, na! those thing will not do. Loyo have thee in- 
struction not so.” Concealing the fact, as it is to be dis- 
covered, that Loyo was in no condition either to affirm 


THE MIGUEL SIGHTED 


79 

or deny any procedure that Lafitte Goya might choose to 
make. 

The two then continued their argument in Spanish; 
and Wayne and Ray drew up to the men by the fire, 
Wayne seating himself close to the one whose look seemed 
immeasurably more inviting than the rest, and something 
in whose accent soon proclaimed him an Englishman. 

“Have you been here long?’’ said Wayne. 

‘‘ Two days,’’ said the man. “ We picked up a jolly 
stiff wester coming by the Tor — ” 

Norris ! ” came a hissing mandate from the watch- 
ful Goya. 

The man broke sharp off in his speech, and with a con- 
temptuous hunch of his shoulder, turned away from 
Wayne. But presently he turned on his belly, and with- 
out seeming, he whispered so Wayne could hear: 

** That fellow isn’t on the square — watch out for 
him.” 

All the while, as he debated with Marat, Goya kept 
a sharp eye on the group. And Wayne took note of 
Lafitte Goya’s outstanding characteristics: black coarse 
hair, and apparently much chewed moustache; nose, 
broad and like a knot in its midway; sharp eyes in am- 
bush behind the drooping brim of his hat. 

With a final nod of the head, Jean Marat turned from 
his parley, and called the boys. When the three were 
well out of ear-shot, Marat began : 


8o 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


He weel not agree that we follow thee Miguel with 
thee Mercier — eet was no use to talk more. But he 
finally agree that two of you boys can go weeth in the 
Miguel, and take weeth you thee message’ for Loyo and 
Julian; and we meet here again in seex week’. I donot 
know w’at to theenk. I donot like thees Lafitte Goya — 
he make too much the pretend. I tell him I led him 
know at daylight w’at we decide.” 

“ Captain Marat,” began Wayne. Will you leave 
me here alone for an hour or so? I’d like to think about 
this. I’ll make a little fire when I’m ready to come 
aboard.” 

“ Say, Captain,” said Ray. I know him. If he 
stays here an hour — alone — he’ll have enough thought 
out to fill a book. And you’ll get a headache hearing it 
all.” 

And so Marat and Ray rowed aboard, leaving Wayne 
among the palms, alone in his cogitation. He walked 
toward the upper end of the small key. He set his mind 
to going over all the matter bearing on the business in 
hand, beginning with his finding the documents in the 
secret drawer of old Pedro Lamartine’s bunk in the 
Mercier s cabin. Here was a boy of seventeen — Julian 
Lamartine — in a way, a captive in some secret place, 
having been kidnapped when a child of six, from his 
home with his grandfather. His kidnapper, now dead, 
has left written instructions to a servant — Loyo — di- 
recting him to return the lad to his home, and at the same 


THE MIGUEL SIGHTED 


8i 


time to recover a certain hidden treasure — by some 
method known to Loyo, and partially hinted at in the 
written communication to the black fellow. This treas- 
ure is willed to Julian. The breaking into the cabin of 
the Mercier, with the marks on the secret drawer, point 
to the reasonable certainty that others beside Loyo, by 
some means have gained knowledge of the existence of 
the treasure, and hope by the possession of the documents 
contained in the secret drawer, to be set in the way of 
securing the treasure. Suspicion points to Lafitte 
Goya. 

But then, it is not altogether impossible that Goya may, 
after all, be working for the interests of Julian and Loyo; 
and Goya^s demeanor may be merely evidence of his suspi- 
cions, in turn, of Marat and the boys. 

And then, finally, what is the duty of his — Wayne’s 
— party? Have they not undertaken to seek out the 
missing Julian, and endeavor to return him to his grand- 
father, who even now sits waiting for news of a happy 
issue of their undertaking? And have not the boys their 
parents’ approval of their purpose? 

If Lafitte Goya is guilty of the evil purpose to steal the 
treasure, his one present aim is to gain possession of the 
documents addressed to Loyo and Julian. And these 
papers once on board the Miguel, he was sure to achieve 
his object; for what obstacle could two boys present? 
But then — happy thought! — it is not either of these 
letters that tells the hiding-place of the treasure. It is, 


82 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


obviously, some knowledge locked up in Loyo’s mind 
that is the key to the treasure-house. 

And now, all the uncertainties aside, there is but one 
way open to gain knowledge of the whereabouts of the 
lost Julian. And the dangers in that way? Well, the 
end justifies them. 

It took Wayne, then, but a short time more to deter- 
mine on a plan which he would lay before the others. 
And so he made his little fire on the shore; and was 
soon brought on board the Mercier. 

The whole company got about him as he went over 
the details of the situation as he had thought it out. 

“ And now,” he said, I propose that Slicky and I go 
with them in the Miguel — take along one of the wireless 
sets, wrapped up in some clothes in one of the chests; 
hide it on shore, when we get there ; and when the chance 
comes, tell the Mercier, as near as possible, where the 
place is, and you can come to us. You see we can make 
a little log of the voyage, putting down everything that 
can help.” 

‘‘Ah!” said Marat, “you have one good head.” 

“Isn’t that what I told you?” said Ray. “And he 
knows Slicky’s the one to take along.” 

“ And,” continued Wayne, “ in case they should take 
the letters away from us, I can make copies and leave them 
here on the Mercier 

And so Wayne set to work at once to pen the copies, 
taking a location under a mosquito-bar, out of reach 


THE MIGUEL SIGHTED 


83 


of the night pests. And Ray helped Robert to tuck away 
one of the wireless sets in a leather steamer-trunk, with 
a few other things judged by Robert to be of possible 
use. 


CHAPTER X 


SAILING INTO THE UNKOWN 

I T was rather a low-spirited group that collected in the 
dark by the Mercier's rail. The steamer-trunk and 
rolls of blankets had already been passed down into the 
small boat. It was past three, the moon long ago gone 
down; and Wayne and Robert were saying their adieus 
to their comrades, excepting Marat and Ray, who were 
to row them to shore. 

‘‘ I h'ate to see you going with that band,” said Charlie 
Manners. 

Don’t take any chances with them,” urged Leslie 
Dunn. Keep them friendly.” 

They’ll be the innocent kids, all right. I’ll bet,” said 
Ray. 

That we will,” returned Robert. 

'' Well, good-bye, fellows,” said Wayne. Don’t 
worry about us.” 

Jean Marat and Ray slipped down into the boat, fol- 
lowed by Wayne and Robert. And the boat moved 
shoreward, propelled by Robert and Ray, helped by the 
light breeze off the mainland. 

Now, Wayne,” said Jean Marat, “be ver’ — ver’ 
84 


SAILING INTO THE UNKNOWN 85 

careful. Thad Goya ver’ sharp. Don’ led him fin’ your 
telegraph. Thad would be bad.” 

We won’t give him any chance to suspect,” assured 
Wayne. 

The boat’s prow touched the sand, and the little party 
filed out over the bow, setting the chest on the sand. 

Well, Ray,” began Wayne, don’t forget the wire- 
less for a minute, when the time comes. We may have 
very little chance.” 

I won’t forget, Wayne,” said Ray. I’ll keep some 
one at it half of every hour. Don’t let that worry you 
a second.” 

I know I can depend on you, Ray. I wish our busi- 
ness was as sure.” 

‘'If something happen to the telegraph,” said Marat, 
“ remember we hunt for you all thee summer — and all 
thee winter if eet is necessar’.” 

And then Marat took the piece of baggage on his shoul- 
der, and led the way, plunging into the obscurity, thread- 
ing among the pillar-like palms. 

No light of fire greeted them this time, as the four came 
out on the beach below the point. But directly, their 
ears caught the medley of sounds, from whispered breath- 
ing to stentorian snoring, that told of the nearness of 
slumberers; and they approached the crew of the Miguel, 
stretched on the sands, in the lee of the embers of fire, 
now converted into a smudge, to keep off the blood- 
hungry mosquitoes^. 


86 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


One of the company immediately arose, and with dried 
palm leaves and sticks, coaxed a blaze. It was Lafitte 
Goya. 

** Ah, these the boy^’’ he said, eyeing Wayne and Rob- 
ert, blanket laden. 

‘‘ Yes,” said Marat, putting down his burden, “ these 
the boys thad go weeth you.” 

Goya smiled on them friendly-like. Well, there 
come up some small win’ ; I theenk-a we mague sail.” 

And so he aroused those of the crew who were not al- 
ready awake. 

‘‘To thee boads,” ordered Goya. 

In the light of the fire, Wayne caught the eye of the 
Englishman, called Norris, and nodded to the chest. 
Norris caught his meaning, and took the leather trunk on 
his shoulder. 

“ Well, good-bye, boys,” said Jean Marat, giving each 
a hard squeeze of the hand. 

Ray’s farewell was of like warmth. 

“ Remember us to Mr. Blaisdell and the rest,” called 
Robert, as the boys followed Lafitte Goya toward the 
boats. It was a speech meant for Goya’s ears; for he 
thought it as well Goya should think it was planned for 
the Mercier to go back direct to New Orleans. 

Arrived on board the Miguel, Norris carried the boys’ 
chest into the cabin; and the boys stowed their blankets 
under a thwart of one of the boats, when they had been 
hoisted aboard. Sail was made at once ; and a little be- 


SAILING INTO THE UNKNOWN 87 

fore daybreak, the two boys, their binoculars to their eyes, 
looked back over some miles of water to the wee island 
with its graceful palms, and saw a fire, and as the light 
of day increased, what they knew to be the moving 
figures of their comrades. And finally the island faded 
away. 

It was just a little after four,” said Wayne, giving 
expression to his consciousness of his and Robert’s du- 
ties. 

“ Yes,” murmured Robert, “ and we’re making about 
three knots now — don’t you think ? ” 

Let’s squat down by this boat,” said Wayne, and 
you watch while I take a peep at my compass.” 

Lafitte Goya was at the wheel; and the men lounged 
forward, showing that Goya kept up ship discipline. An 
old dark-skinned Spaniard was busy in the galley. 

All right,” said Robert, after a glance around. 

‘‘ We’re making due south,” said Wayne, slipping his 
little compass back into his shirt. 

Captain Goya presently called one of the men to the 
wheel, and then came forward to the boys, his mien 
friendly ; though it did not seem to Wayne that his smile 
was ‘genuine quite. 

‘‘ It iz goin’ be fine-a day,” he said. '' But I would 
like much-a it be ‘more strong — thee win’.” 

“ We’re not used to the ocean,” said Robert, ** and we 
don’t like awful strong winds. Looks like we’re going 
pretty fast now.” 


88 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Robert was beginning at once to play his part of an 
innocent. 

Goya smiled. '' You nod much acquaind' wid de sea. 
Der is some rule’/’ he said. ” De sailor’, he stay in de 
bow, an’ de passenger’, he stay in de back place of de ship; 
an’ de sailor’, he not allow’ to talk wid de passenger’.” 

The cook beat a signal, and Goya invited the boys to 
join him at breakfast. The captain’s difficulties with 
the English language were, to an extent, greater than 
has been indicated. So he tortured his tongue no more 
than he thought necessary to convince his company of 
his friendliness. 

The boys found the Miguel, in most particulars, a sister 
ship to the Mercier. She seemed a trifle shorter, and 
more blunt in the bows ; she carried about an equal show 
of canvas, and was of slightly less tonnage. 

They missed Rufe’s cooking. The dishes they now at- 
tacked were unduly hot with spices; and in spite of the 
passing hours, their mouths had not yet cooled, when 
hunger and the cook’s signal called them to another in- 
ward bath of fire. 

It was during the noon repast that the boys noted some 
activity telling of a change of course. In Spanish, Goya 
gave an order to the man at the wheel; and the sheets 
were eased away to take the breeze from astern. So 
when the lads got themselves alone again, there was an- 
other peep at the compass. 

West by south, a half point south,” announced 


SAILING INTO THE UNKNOWN 89 

Wayne. “What do you think we are making now?’^ 

“ Nearly five knots, I guess,” said Robert “ It would 
be great if we could have a chart.” 

“ Yes,” agreed Wayne. “ Fve got a kind of a picture 
of the one on the Mercier, but Fm afraid it won’t help 
much. Now let’s see: course, south, four o’clock to 
twelve — eight hours, at three knots. That’s twenty- 
four miles. Hope that’s right. We’ll have to jot that 
down tonight. And we’ll have to keep watch, turn 
about.” 

“ You notice,” observed Robert, “ we’re going pretty 
much west now. As they were going that way anyhow, 
they might have pointed that way when we left the is- 
land, instead of sailing straight south twenty-four miles 
first. And the wind would have been right behind, too.” 

“ Yes,” agreed Wayne, “ Fve just been thinking about 
that. And of course the reason is, that Goya wanted to 
fool Jean Marat, and not let him get a guess at the direc- 
tion to the place we’re sailing to. You see, just as soon 
as we got far enough south to be sure he wouldn’t be 
seen by the Mercier, he changed the course. I’ll bet if we 
should meet any vessel, he’d change the course again, till 
we got out of sight.” 

At night, the boys spread their blankets and rigged 
up their mosquito-bar on deck, beside the port boat. 
Screened under a blanket, Robert furnished an occasional 
gleam from his flash-light, while Wayne wrote on a small 
slip of paper, as follows : 


90 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


S 24 M — W by S 1-2 S. 

Robert then made a copy on another bit of paper. 

Now, Slicky,^' whispered Wayne, if you take the 
watch eight to twelve. I’ll take twelve to four. The deck 
planks are pretty straight, fore and aft.” 

So Wayne removed his shoes and trousers, and turned 
over, to sleep. Robert bared a piece of the deck, set his 
compass on it; and, taking a corner of blanket for a 
screen, used his flash as he regulated the compass; and 
soon made out that the deck cracks were pointing west 
by south, half south. About every half hour he repeated 
the operation. And finally, when there were sounds of 
the sailors changing watch, a flash of light on his watch 
showed the time twelve o’clock; and he shook Wayne 
awake. 

“ No change,” he reported. Breeze about the same.” 

But the first half hour of Wayne’s watch had not gone, 
when he noted a pufliness in the wind; and directly, he 
heard the squeak of the blocks, as the watch hauled in a 
foot or two of the sheets, the wind having veered a little 
to the south, and considerably freshened. The moon 
shone bright on the bulging mainsail, which Wayne 
studied some minutes. I believe she’s making six 
knots now,” he finally told himself. And he set his com- 
pass on the small patch of bare deck, under the mosquito- 
bar, and found that the course remained unchanged. 

Twelve hours at four knots,” he calculated to himself ; 
that’s forty-eight miles on this course.” 


SAILING INTO THE UNKNOWN 


91 


He got out the bit of paper and wrote in the figures. 
When he called Robert, at four, he gave him account of 
the changed conditions, and recommended that he make 
his notation. 

And so it went without anything more to note till a 
little before eight of the morning. Then the man on 
watch sent some word in Spanish back to the captain, 
who climbed to the fore-cross-trees, and leveled his 
glasses toward the southern horizon. 

“ We’ll act like we pay no attention,” said Wayne. 

But when Goya returned to the deck, and was gone aft 
to put away his glasses in the cabin, Wayne and Robert, 
each in turn, smuggled a look through their binoculars. 

“Did you see it?” murmured Wayne. 

“ Yes,” said Robert. “ It’s some island.” 

“ The only islands I remember seeing on the chart, over 
this way,” said Wayne, “ are the Dry Tortugas.” 

“ Do you remember the distance? ” questioned Robert. 

“ No, Slicky, I didn’t notice. But let’s figure up, now. 
Yesterday noon, twenty-four miles south; then west by 
south half south, twelve hours at four knots — forty- 
eight miles; then eight hours (to now) at six knots — 
forty-eight miles more, or ninety-six miles on this course. 
I’ll bet it’s the Dry Tortugas.” 

“ Let’s listen,” suggested Robert. “ We might hear 
some one say the name.” 

Without moving too near toward the bows, which were 
forbidden to the boys, they edged over on the deck; and 


92 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


as they glanced toward the sailors, they noted the English- 
man, Norris, looking as if to attract them, and nodding 
toward the south. Then, speaking to one of the sailors in 
the Spanish — Tortugas ” rang out amongst the words 
he spoke. It was plain, he meant to convey the name 
to the boys. 

Why,” said Wayne, at the same time nodding ac- 
knowledgment to the man, that’s the name that he 
tried to speak to me on the island, when Goya shut him 
up. Well, we guessed right. That’ll help if we get a 
chance to reach the Mercier by the wireless.” 


CHAPTER XI 


THE SECRET LOG THE PEARL ISLES 

S O soon as that faint streak of an island of the Dry 
Tortugas had faded into the east of south, Wayne 
and Robert became conscious of another change of course. 
The men were again trimming sail ; and the rising billows 
struck more on the beam. And this was the signal for 
the boys to crouch on deck, under shelter of a boat, and 
consult the compass once more. 

Southwest by west, a half south,” announced Wayne. 
Except for short periods, during squalls and the like, 
this was the course destined to be held till they should 
make land again. The wind continued to freshen, and 
Wayne and Robert were driven to make new calcula- 
tions — or guesses — as to the speed of the Miguel. 
And that night — because of the wind — they must dis- 
pense with the shelter of the mosquito-bar; and yet it was 
not so great a deprivation, since the same wind kept all 
but a few of the most bold of the mosquitoes in their lairs 
below decks. 

The boys had soon begun to feel the irksomeness of 
their isolation. With the exception of the Englishman, 
Norris, there was no soul among the lot toward whom 
93 


94 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


they could feel any sense of fellowship, with whom know 
any wish in common. Again excepting the Englishman, 
the men were in all ways as exotic as their speech; a 
swarthy, rough lot, with ambitions but little above beasts. 
The man Norris, too, the boys easily made out, was sick- 
ened of his dark associates; and recognizing something 
of his own quality in the boys, would eagerly have fra- 
ternized with them. With many smiles and secret nods 
he created a kind of intimacy. And the boys took much 
comfort of this friendly understanding. 

As time went on. Captain Lafitte Goya was at less pains 
to smile conviction into the boys’ minds of the amity of 
his intentions. Times, at meals, he ignored them com- 
pletely; and he began to be quite sharp with them when 
they inclined a least bit toward the bows. So it became 
very plain to them that Goya’s aim was to keep them 
from all contact with the man Norris, of whose attach- 
ment to his interests he had come to have none too great 
conviction. And it was one named Gomez — a thin- 
lipped, sneak of a creature, who habitually wore a red 
bandanna, turbanwise, for head-gear — who spied for 
Goya. There were periods when this chap seemed never 
to take his eyes off them; it seemed almost as if he were 
trying to cast a spell upon them. And doubtless he held 
some exaggerated notion of the importance of his vigil- 
ance. 

The boys had early become convinced that this Gomez 


THE SECRET LOG— -THE PEARL ISLES 95 


was the very person whom Mr. Blaisdell had encountered 
on the quay in New Orleans, and the one who had broken 
into the cabin of the Mercier and ransacked the trunks 
and the secret drawer. He tallied well with Mr. Blais- 
dell’s description; and none of the others could be picked 
as having sufficient cunning. 

It happened one day that Robert caught the fellow 
Gomez’s eye peering along the alleyway from behind the 
house, to where Wayne sat in the boat’s shelter, busy with 
his secret log. Immediately after, Robert saw Goya 
leave the wheel and start briskly forward. 

Gomez saw you — the captain’s coming! ” whispered 
Robert. Chuck it overboard 1 ” 

Wayne instead thrust the small paper into his mouth; 
and at once began making drawings on another bit of 
paper, of uncouth moon faces. 

W’at it ees you write?” said Goya, having come 
round the boat. 

Wayne showed him the drawings; whereupon he 
sniffed, and began to question the boys with the (to them 
evident) design to learn what they might know regarding 
the situation at sea. But they were equal to the pinch; 
and he got such responses as seemed to satisfy him of 
their total ignorance. It was more in their puzzled look 
and silence, as they cast wandering eyes about the un- 
broken horizon, as if for landmarks, than in anything 
they finally found to say, that he seemed to find convic- 


96 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


tion that they had no guess where they were. Thus they 
hoodwinked him. And he went back to the wheel to 
give Gomez a round scolding for his zeal. 

So it came about that Wayne had to make a new copy 
of his log — from Robert’s. 

Tranquillity had not long reigned again, when it be- 
came suddenly evident to the boys that there was some 
spring of dissatisfaction on board. On the forecastle, 
the men, heads together, were talking and gesticulating 
angrily. But the boys had no suspicion of being in any 
relation to the show; till finally one of the men stalked 
back to the captain with a word frorn the crew. 

The boys, attracted by the sailor’s unusual demeanor, 
were looking on when the captain received him. They 
saw an angry gleam in Goya’s eye, as he listened to the 
man. And the next minute he ordered the whole crew 
aft. They came boldly; each had something to say, ex- 
cept Norris, who seemed indifferent; and Goya made 
some kind of hot speech. And then he turned and called 
the boys, who came forward wondering what possible part 
they could have in so warm a debate. Goya addressed 
them : 

“ You have one lettar to Loyo — one lettar writ’ to 
Loyo from Pedro Lamartine — not so? ” 

Yes, we have,” said Wayne, at the same time putting 
his hand over the breast of his jacket, to indicate the ex- 
act resting-place of the document. For he had begun to 
have some fear that a search might be made in the chest 


THE SECRET LOG — THE PEARL ISLES 97 

for the paper thought so much of, and so lead to the dis- 
covery of the wireless set. 

At Wayne’s reply, the captain’s face took on a disdain- 
ful and superior smile, and with a sharp word or two he 
sent the men forward again; and it seemed as if some 
moot question were thus settled. It had the appearance, 
too, of some kind of triumph for Goya; for he showed 
it plainly, and played his authority thereafter with the 
greater assumption. 

The boys, of course, could not understand a word of 
the talk between the otheris. But they were busy putting 
two and two together; and, although neither was at all 
sure of his premises, both anyhow arrived at pretty much 
the one conclusion. Wayne expressed it very fairly, 
when they got back to their usual place by the boat again. 

I’ll tell you, Slicky,” he finally said ; “ the men have 
been promised a share, and weren’t sure that we had the 
letters with us — especially Loyo’s, supposed to tell where 
the treasure is — and thought the captain told them we 
had them without being sure himself. And so he asked 
us before them to prove he was sure.” 

Robert confessed his like interpretation. 

And then maybe they wanted him to take the letters 
away from us, if we had them; and most likely he told 
them that we might run across a government boat or 
something, and the officers would find out from us that 
something was wrong, and so he’s waiting.” 

That’s how it looked,” agreed Robert. Yet,” he 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


98 

continued, fearing to jump at a conclusion, *^‘it might be, 
after all, that Loyo is just sick, and everything can be ex- 
plained in a friendly way. But — ” 

“ Yes,’^ said Wayne. But the looks of this Goya, 
and his being so anxious, and — . No, I don’t think, 
from what Jean Marat says, that Loyo would trust others 
to go and get those letters from the Mercier, even if he 
was sick. And then you remember what this Norris 
whispered to me about Goya not being on the square? 
No, I’ll tell you — when we get to the place, we’ve got 
to look out, sharp, and get the wireless and our logs hid 
the first chance, or everything will go against us.” 

The breeze, fair and constant for so many hours after 
the passing of the Dry Tortugas, petered out in the night, 
leaving the Miguel, as it were, stranded on a dead calm. 
But not for long; a wet squall out of the. west pounced on 
die schooner. Sail was shortened, and they beat it out 
short-hauled. The rain poured down for above an hour, 
driving the boys into the cabin. Then finally it settled 
down to a chill nor’ wester, that kept the Miguel at a 
steady pace for another twelve or fourteen hours. 

This fickleness of the elements all but drove Wayne 
and Robert into despair, as they struggled with their 
calculations; till finally they concluded that it would be 
safe to ignore the influence of the storm. 

It was while they were in the cabin, out of the rain, 
that the boys took advantage of an interval when Goya 
was above, and gave a look to their leather chest. 


THE SECRET LOG — THE PEARL ISLES 99 

‘‘ They’ve been trying to pick the lock,” declared Rob- 
ert, pointing to marks on the brass about the key-hole. 

'' Well, they didn’t get it open,” said Wayne. And 
I don’t believe they’ll bother again, since I’ve let them 
know I’ve got the letters in my clothes.” 

The sun had but just relinquished its lingering hold on 
the watery eastern horizon, when the boys were awakened 
by voices lifted in shouting. Goya they saw on the 
deck, looking to Gomez, aloft, legs clinging to the main 
cross-trees, from which perch he called down news of 
something far away, off the bow. 

By six, the boys were able to make out a rise of land 
ahead, to which the schooner pointed direct. 

That’s where we’re going to,” declared Robert. 

“ Yes, looks like it,” said Wayne. And I believe it’s 
an island.” 

Under the stiffening easterly breeze, the Miguel moved 
steadily in, bringing the picture ever larger and more dis- 
tinct in the field of the binoculars. 

“ Doesn’t it look pretty ? ” said Robert. 

“ And the palms look as if they had been planted there 
for a park,” observed Wayne. 

** And there are some pretty big hills,” said Robert. 

Looks like a range of them running southward,” said 
Wayne. 

By nine o’clock the Miguel had come fairly close in, 
and directly was standing to round the northwest point 
of the island. To the starboard, here and there, the 


lOO 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


water foamed over hidden rocks of coral. And the boys 
took note of a line of bursting breakers, going all around 
the upper end of the island as far as they could see, and 
giving evidence of a barrier of reefs. 

The boys stood by the port bulwarks, as the Miguel 
moved leisurely southeastward, down the lee shore. A 
pine forest, with here and there a clump of palms, opened 
out beyond the point, and continued to fill their eyes with 
its attractions till, a mile down, the forest abruptly ter- 
minated on the edge of marshy ground, in the midst of 
which showed the opening of a bayou, or the mouth of 
a stream. Then came into the panorama a thick forest 
of hard woods, all backed by the tier of hills. All the 
way the beach shone glaring white, and the line of break- 
ers continued, giving warning not to snuggle too close 
to the shore. 

The boys kept a keen lookout for some sign of habita- 
tion. But it was not till they had had about three miles 
of this coasting, that their eyes got glimpse of any work 
of man. 

There!’’ said Wayne. “In among those palms. 
See it?” 

“ Yes,” returned Robert, peering through his glasses. 
“Looks some like a Japanese house roofed with palm 
leaves.” 

Then, as the Miguel moved on, there came an end to 
the island, and another island showed to the southeast- 
ward, the water between about a quarter mile across. 


THE SECRET LOG — THE PEARL ISLES loi 

The steersman hove to the schooner, and the anchor 
was dropped. Opposite this space between the islands 
there was a break in the reef chain, as shown by an in- 
terval of smooth water. Here was the passage to the 
inside; but both wind and tide opposed the sailing in. 
It was the noon hour when the sails were taken in; and 
long before two o’clock, the tide turned, and the flood 
began again. But the wind held on, coming from be- 
tween the islands, and Lafitte Goya had out one of the 
boats, and with two men — one was Norris — went 
ashore. 

I wish we could land,” said Robert. 

‘‘ I’ve just been thinking,” said Wayne, that if we 
don’t get there till dark, it’ll suit us better.” 

'‘Yes, that’s so,” admitted Robert; “on account of 
the wireless.” 

“ I wish, though,” said Wayne, “ that we could have 
got a chance to talk with the man, Norris. He might 
help us.” 

“Yes,” said Robert. “If we just only knew Goya’s 
plans, so we could have an idea how we can manage.” 

“ We’ll just have to watch our chance,” said Wayne. 

And so the boys suffered on, hour after hour, on pins 
and needles, as the critical time approached. They saw 
an occasional figure on shore, among the palms, where 
the house stood ; but nothing to relieve the suspense. 

Toward sundown the wind eased, and Goya and his 
men came rowing back. 


102 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


The other boat was put overboard, two ropes passed 
out, and they began towing the Miguel through the pas- 
sage into the lagoon. In half an hour the anchor again 
was cast; and dusk was on when the boys got a gruff 
order from Goya to prepare for shore. Goya’s mien now 
had lost all seeming of friendliness; it suddenly became 
as if he owed the boys a grudge, and was now set on 
venting it. 


CHAPTER XII 


HIDING THE WIRELESS PRISONERS 

I N the tropics there is no lingering twilight. Daylight 
fled from the lagoon, as night shadows spread 
abroad, as from leafy caverns of the island forest. But 
the white beach reflected the softer light of a bright moon, 
and some scattered palms still showed their comely forms 
in silhouette. 

For the boys there had already begun that period of 
trial. They strove to hide their sufferings under calm 
faces. It was with great relief they saw Norris volun- 
tarily shoulder their chest and carry it to the boat, seem- 
ing almost as if he divined their wish to keep others from 
feeling its weight. They climbed into the boat with Goya, 
each with his blanket-roll, and directly, they were moving 
shoreward. 

Wayne and Robert scarce glanced at one another in 
the moonlight, each busy with dread thoughts of a new 
status in which they were like to find themselves the mo- 
ment they stepped on shore. Lafitte Goya’s new and dis- 
tinctly unfriendly attitude gave force to all the suspicions 
that had racked them heretofore. They looked forward 
to the meeting with the lad, Julian Lamartine, and Loyo; 
103 


104 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


but Goya’s present hostile mien taken into account, his 
ambiguous report of Loyo’s sickness, and all — they got 
but meager comfort of the prospect. 

In spite of their perturbed state of mind, the beauty 
of the moonlit beach, backed by the dark, pillared arcades 
of the forest, was not lost on the boys. So attractive a 
play-park they’d never thought to see; if only they might 
enjoy a season there under happier auspices. 

The men pulled up to a bit of rustic wharf, and all 
climbed up; and the boys marched across the beach be- 
hind Norris, who again bore their precious chest on his 
shoulder. Among the hammock of palm and oak, the 
party came upon the little house. They entered a room, 
unoccupied, in the center of which hung a lighted kero- 
sene lamp from the roof and over a table. Taking up a 
lantern, Lafitte Goya waved the boys into another room, 
at the back, where were a pair of beds, bearing signs of 
recent occupancy ; and there showed a single window, to 
the west. Here Norris put down the leather chest, and 
at a word from the captain, retired. 

And then, with a sinister look out from under his hat 
brim, and an imperious gesture, Lafitte Goya spoke. 

Now den, mague you’ sev’ de troub’, an’ ged oud dem 
lettar,” he said. And as Wayne hesitated a wee moment, 
he added in a sharper manner, “ I tol’ you, give dem let- 
tar!” 

Then, Wayne immediately unpinned the breast pocket 
of his jacket, and drew out the documents, which Goya 


HIDING THE WIRELESS — PRISONERS 105 

snatched from his hands, going out, taking the lantern, 
and closing the door. 

This is our one chance! ” whispered Wayne, if the 
window will open. Try it. I’ll open the trunk.” 

Robert examined the window, and found it held merely 
by a nail, loose in its hole, and he slid it easily back. In 
a minute Wayne had the chest open, and the suit-case, 
holding the wireless set, unwrapped of its coverings. 

'' Get out through the window, and I’ll hand it to you,” 
whispered Wayne. And he gave Robert a hand, to get 
him through without noise, and put out the suit-case. 
“Here’s my log — put it in,” he added. “Now find a 
good place — and make sure of your landmarks, so we 
can find it again.” 

“ Never fear,” assured Robert. And he hurried off 
in the shadows. 

The underbrush was not over thick immediately back 
of the house, and Robert made good progress for about 
two hundred yards north, on a course parallel with the 
beach on the west. Then he came to a shallow stream, 
through which he splashed, to find the brush, under 
large moss-hung oaks, very rank, in clumps. Stopping 
by the second bit of thicket above the beach, he put into 
the suit-case the two logs of the voyage, and his flash light 
and binoculars. He thrust the suit-case under the fallen 
branch of an oak in the thicket, and pulled down hands- 
full of Spanish moss for additional covering; and then he 
turned back. 


io6 THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 

Wayne listened to the excited voices in Spanish talk, 
in the front room ; and made out that Goya was stumbling 
through the reading of Loyo’s letter, now and then de- 
manding a word of help from Norris. He stood by the 
window shaking with the fear of discovery, and pray- 
ing for speed on the part of Robert. 

Then finally the dreaded thing happened. Wayne 
heard the clatter of chairs pushed back, and he had just 
glided to a seat on the leather chest, when the door opened 
and Lafitte Goya appeared, holding the lantern. His 
face showed his disappointment ; but when, with a sweep 
of his eyes, he noted Robert’s absence, and the open win- 
dow — Wayne felt he’d never seen a more diabolic ex- 
pression of face. The man thundered forth something 
in Spanish; and then demanded the whereabouts of the 
missing boy. 

Before Wayne could make a reply, Robert climbed in 
through the window. 

The irascible Goya broke out in Spanish again; and 
then he put some dire threats in English. But too intent 
on another matter, he gave over to make further demands 
for explanation; and calling Gomez, he ordered Wayne 
to unlock the leather chest. He searched carefully 
through the pieces of clothing. Then, with Gomez’s help, 
he searched the boys, from hat bands to shoe soles. He 
finished with a Spanish oath. 

Now you boy’, tell me de true! he thundered, or 
I break-a you’ head ! ” And he made a threatening ges- 


HIDING THE WIRELESS — PRISONERS 107 

ture. “ Whar is one more lettar of Pedro Lamartine? ” 

“ I gave you all there was,” declared Wayne. 

** You lie ! — you have hide one ! ” threatened Goya. 

No,” insisted Wayne. I gave all there was.” 

Who fin' de lettar’ — in dat box ? ” demanded Goya. 

I did,” said Wayne. 

Goya seemed at an end; and he and Gomez eyed one 
another a mom,ent. Then Goya broke out on Gomez in 
Spanish, lambasting him in some harangue, the terms of 
which were all unintelligible to the boys, except a single 
word — the name of “ Loyo ” which found frequent 
repetition. It was as if some circumstance, closely con- 
nected with the black man, Loyo, had vitally disarranged 
Lafitte Goya’s enterprise, and that Gomez was at the bot- 
tom of the fault, whatever it was. 

After a warning to the boys not to again leave the room 
without permission, Goya went out with Gomez, closing 
the door. The talk continued for some minutes in the 
next room, then came sounds of their going out by the 
front door, and all became quiet. 

Wayne and Robert, left in darkness, removed their 
shoes and snugged up to one another on one of the beds, 
the better to carry on converse in whispers. 

‘‘We got the wireless out by the skin of our teeth,” said 
Wayne. “ How came you to be so long? ” 

“ I had to go a long way to find a place,” returned 
Robert. 

“ Can you find it again, easy? ” 


io8 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Yes, and it’s a good place.” 

Well, there’s no guess-work now about how things 
stand.” 

No, Goya’s after old Pedro’s treasure-box, all right. 
I wonder where Julian Lamartine and Loyo are.” 

I’ve got an idea they were here till Goya went ashore 
today. He probably moved them to some other place — 
didn’t want us to see them.” 

He’s boss of everything here now, looks like. What 
do you think he’s going to do ? ” 

“ Well,” mused Wayne, ‘‘ of course he’s going to try 
to find that treasure. He didn’t get what he expected 
out of those letters — especially Loyo’s ; and now he’ll 
try to get what he wants out of Loyo himself. You re- 
member what Pedro’s letter says to Loyo about the ‘ di- 
rections drilled ’ into Loyo’s mind ? ” 

Yes,” said Robert, “ but why wasn’t Goya satisfied 
about that? Why did he search us for another letter? ” 

Maybe he just hoped there was some other letter 
of directions. If we could only get to see Loyo and 
Julian!” 

I reckon he’s going to keep us prisoners — afraid on 
general principles we might interfere some way with his 
plans.” 

'"Yes, I think so,” agreed Wayne. '‘And now we’ll 
have to watch for a chance to get away and try to signal 
the Mercier. If they only knew the general direction we 
sailed, they might be part way here.” 


HIDING THE WIRELESS — PRISONERS 109 

“ But we’ll have to get hold of some grub,” said Rob- 
ert, “ and — ” 

Sh ! ” interrupted Wayne. '' Listen ! ” 

Immediately the whispering ceased, and the boys set 
their ears to listen. They heard a sound resembling 
somewhat a mouse’s gnawing. 

Is it a rat? ” 

Sounds to me like some one boring,” said Rob- 
ert. You breathe loud, like sleeping, and I’ll sneak 
over.” 

Robert cautiously stocking-footed it over to the tongue- 
and-grooved partition, where his ear caught faint sounds 
of some person crouched close on the other side. And 
directly, he heard a wee jarring in the wall, as of an in- 
strument breaking through. Robert toed it back to the 
bed, whence he saw the light of the next room through 
a hole the size of a nail. But before he had time to be- 
gin a whispered report to Wayne, the door opened; and 
both boys observed the clawed, monkey-like hand of 
Gomez thrust slowly in, to set a lantern on the floor. The 
hand withdrew, and the door closed, leaving the boys 
the hypothetic comfort of a light. The boys, quick to 
discern a motive, lay back, heads together. 

A peek-hole,” said Wayne. His eye is there by 
now. Let’s wake up and begin fooling them. I guess 
they think we know more than we do.” 

‘‘ All right,” agreed Robert. 

So, for the benefit of the spying eye at the peek-hole, 


no 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


they began to play their parts. Wayne got on his elbow, 
and shook Robert. 

Somebody has given us a light, he said aloud. 

‘‘ Sure enough,” said Robert, turning over to look. 

They sat on the edge of the bed and stretched them- 
selves, like a pair newly awakened. 

Is it morning yet ? ” said Robert, affecting a yawn. 

Wayne consulted his watch. ‘‘ It isn’t midnight yet.” 

I feel better.” Robert stretched again. 

“We ought to have lots of fun on this island,” ob- 
served Wayne. “ I don’t see what made Captain Goya 
so mad at us. No harm in your slipping out the window 
a minute. I hope Julian’s a nice fellow. He might 
have let us give those letters to Julian and Loyo.” 

And there continued the mock-innocent prattle, calcu- 
lated to disarm the suspicions of the listeners at the peep- 
hole. The boys turned out the contents of their chest, 
and laid out some change of wear; and finally got into 
bed again, soon to fall into genuine sleep, as evidenced 
in their breathing. 

One keeping vigil might, after a time, have heard an- 
other sleeper on the other side of the partition. And, 
too, outside, he might have seen the figure of a man played 
upon by an occasional moon-beam, as the leaves moved 
aside under the breath of the gentle night breeze. The 
man squatted, his back to an oak, so situated as to con- 
trol a view of the boys’ window. 

These precautions on the part of Lafitte Goya, did not 


HIDING THE WIRELESS — PRISONERS 


III 


augur well for the comfort of the boys against whom 
they were taken. And from these measures it was evi- 
dent Goya was in fear that the boys would escape to some 
one of the innumerable hiding-places, there to bide an 
opportunity to signal some chance passing vessel. For 
he could not be altogether sure that they had not dis- 
covered his designs; considered his procedure of the 
evening. And, too, there was the suspicious slipping 
away through the window of one of the boys. 

Except for the gentle rustling of the lower dried leaves 
of palms, and the distant croaking of the bullfrogs, the 
night hours passed in quiet. Then suddenly there piped 
out the sweet, half melancholy note of a whippoorwill. 
‘‘ Whip-poor-wi-11 ! whip-poor-wi-11 ! went the call. 
And one of the boys started up, on an elbow, rubbing his 
eyes, and ’listened. He shook his comrade. 

'^Slicky!’’ he whispered. Slicky! Listen! — Do 
you hear ? ” 

“ Yes,” said Robert, sitting. “ Our patrol call.” 

“ It’s a funny thing,” began Wayne. “ I was just 
dreaming I was home in bed, and I heard one of you 
fellows whistling the patrol call, outside ; and I wondered 
who it was could whistle it so good. And then I woke.” 

The lantern still burned within the door. The boys 
crawled out and over to the window, hoping the better to 
hear the bird, who continued his sweet night call. 

‘‘Look!” whispered Wayne, pointing to the half-hid 
figure by the oak. 


II2 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


The sight brought the boys down with a shock, to the 
recollection of their present troubles; and, dispirited, they 
limped back to bed. There each settled down to his own 
more or less gloomy thoughts ; which, however, were not 
without some flares of hope. And finally sleep came 
again to recruit them for the trials to come. 


CHAPTER XIII 


ROBERT ESCAPES 

T he light of day shone in at their solitary window 
when Wayne and Robert awoke, hearing foot- 
falls and voices in the next room. They were pulling on 
their clothes when the door opened, and the side-looking 
Gomez appeared, and with signs indicated to the boys 
that they were to come forth. When they had finished 
dressing and emerged from the door of the house, 
Gomez stood ready, and waved them toward a building 
of greater size, some hundred yards eastward, near the 
shore. At the back stood a long table, roofed over, from 
which near a dozen men were just rising, having finished 
breakfast. 

The boys looked about them as they went. They had 
never viewed anything in nature so attractive. Looking 
between the tall trunks of the cocoa-nut palms and 
the royal palms, close under which their path bore 
them, their eyes went above the forest of oaks and 
other hard woods, to the barren crown of the hither 
end of the range of hills. To the south, they looked 
across the third of a mile of clear, green and blue water 
— quiet by reason of the protecting barrier of reefs 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


1 14 

— and noted the glittering beach, and palms and hills of 
a lesser island. Flowers near their feet, and singing 
birds among trees, helped to give the region a peaceful, 
joyful look. But for the boys the whole was black- 
stained with the skulking figure of Gom^z who came be- 
hind them, and who, they were to find, was especially 
delegated to be their keeper. And when they took seats 
at an end of the long table, their ears were vexed by the 
harsh sounds of Lafitte Goya’s voice, coming from the 
long house close by. 

Before the boys had finished their meal, brought from 
a cook-house at the end, the men appeared round the 
corner of the house, and set off, single file, by a path into 
the forest. About half of the crew carried shovels. And 
among them was the Englishman ; and Wayne and Robert 
watched for a nod or smile of recognition. But he went 
on, not even so much as turning his face their way. This 
thing was indeed a shock to them, for Norris was the only 
one of the lot that had shown them the least fellow feel- 
ing. 

But Lafitte Goya came up to the table, a malign look 
in his face, and in a jarring voice laid his injunctions on 
the boys. They were to make no attempt to stroll out of 
Gomez’s keeping; and if they were to disobey — well, it 
would be the worse for them. 

You hear of dat Lafitte? ” he said, dat pirate, La- 
fitte? I s’all tell you, I am descend’ of heem. He wass 
my grace-gran’-fadder. I am one Lafitte.” And he 


% 


ROBERT ESCAPES 


115 

swaggered as he asserted his pirate lineage; and scowled 
menacingly. 

Wayne expressed a wish that they might be allowed a 
bath in the lagoon. 

Goya made no answer, but took Gomez aside for a 
private word, giving him his orders with reference to 
the prisoners, as the boys guessed from the occasional look 
their way. It was now the boys managed to stow bits 
of bread and meat in their pockets, for they had plans of 
their own. 

On the way back to their assigned quarters, Wayne 
took note of something back among the palms, and indi- 
cated to Gomez that he wished to go that way. Gomez, 
with a sinister smile hovering about his thin lips, indi- 
cated assent, and followed the boys to a spot where two 
mounds showed. They were evidently graves. The 
hearts of both Wayne and Robert sank with the same 
thought, and they exchanged looks. Wayne turned to 
Gomez. 

‘'Julian and Loyo?’’ he questioned, pointing to the 
graves. 

A glitter of hate flashed in Gomez's face, and his hand 
twitched with some emotion, as he hesitated to reply. 
Then there came again that sinister smile, and he nodded 
as if to say — “ Yes, it is Julian and Loyo.'’ 

Wayne and Robert gave another look to the two 
graves, and then passed on* toward the house. The 
gloomiest thoughts clouded their faces, as they sat on the 


ii6 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


bed. They did not give voice to what passed in their 
minds, for they were not deceived by Gomez, in the next 
room, doubtless listening, and were very sure that he was 
far from being as ignorant of the English speech as he 
pretended. 

More than once had a certain fear bobbed up in 
Wayne’s mind, always to be vanquished by ever-fending 
hope. So when his eye glimpsed those two mounds 
among the palms, that — hitherto transitory — fear now 
gripped him with a strangle hold; and he was prepared 
for Gomez’s corroboration of the things he dreaded might 
be. 

With Julian and Loyo dead, here were all his dreams 
of a rescue and a happy restitution come to a fearful end. 
And what a piece of news to carry back to old Mr. 
Charles Lamartine, whose only hold on life was the 
thought of again taking into embrace of eye and arm his ‘ 
dear lad Julian, torn from him so many years ago! 
Wayne’s mind had been so filled with his happy projects, 
that he had given little thought to the dangers that seemed 
to surround him. He had no doubt that those who lay 
within those mounds out there had suffered violent 
deaths; and from Gomez’s demeanor at mention of the 
names, he had hardly less doubt that Gomez had had a 
hand in the foul business. 

The door opened and Gomez beckoned the boys out. 
He led them to the west beach, and gave them to under- 
stand that they might go in for a swim. Wondering 


ROBERT ESCAPES 


117 

just a bit over this seeming of graciousness, the boys 
stripped and started water-ward, while Gomez, in pan- 
tomime, mumbling Spanish words, indicated boundaries 
beyond which they must not go. They had some conceit 
of the real purpose, which was, to put them in some 
measure at their ease, so that they might be the more dis- 
posed to talk freely between themselves, or by some free 
action divulge, to the alert ear and eye of the nimble 
Gomez, some clue — of which they were still suspected 
of having knowledge — to the hiding-place of Pedro La- 
martine’s treasure. 

The boys moved out to the limits Gomez had indicated. 
And while Gomez — opposite them on the beach 
— crouched, ear cocked and eye askant, Robert managed 
to give Wayne a view of the brush-clump in which the 
wireless lay hid. Between bits of prattle aloud — for 
Gomez’s ear — they contrived to carry on serious con- 
verse in whispers. Though the whispering did not pass 
unperceived by Gomez — sharp that he was. 

Well,” said Robert, ‘‘ what are we going to do now? ” 

“ I’ve been thinking about that,” said Wayne. 

And he went over a plan he had, which we will leave 
to reveal itself in its execution. 

All day, the boys were permitted to stroll about the im- 
mediate environs, Gomez at their heels.- At noon they 
visited the mound of oyster shells, and came upon some 
large work boats, resembling whaleboats, drawn high on 
the beach, and now drying out from disuse. 


ii8 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


That night the boys were in no hurry to crawl into 
bed. They chatted freely, striving to appear at ease, re- 
counting their adventures on the old Mississippi; and 
they read and discussed a copy of “ Robinson Crusoe,’* 
got out of their chest ; but every moment praying 
secretly for the coming of the opportunity on which 
they had set their hearts; and conscious all the while, 
that Gomez crouched at the peep-hole in the parti- 
tion. 

Gomez was shrewd enough to perceive that they two 
were full of a secret. But he persuaded himself it had 
to do with the whereabouts of the treasure; and he did 
not cease to hope they would at last divulge it in some 
way. 

Now and again one of the two would — as if by chance 
— put himself before that gimlet-hole, shutting off Go- 
mez’s view of the window. And the other would look 
out, eagerly, to where crouched the sentinel, his form and 
posture more or less discernible in the filtered beams of 
the moon. 

At last it came. It was past midnight, and the lantern 
illumined the room again. Wayne got before Gomez’s 
peep-hole, and Robert made a twentieth visit to the win- 
dow. One look, and he turned back, eyes glistening 
with excitement. In pantomime he indicated that the 
sentinel was asleep. 

Say,” then spoke Robert aloud, '' I’m going to bed, 
Wayne.” 


ROBERT ESCAPES 


119 

''All right/’ returned Wayne. "You get into bed. 
ril crawl in, too, in a minute.” 

With that he pulled the chest over, and keeping his back 
close before the peep-hole, he shuffled the receptacle 
noisily, and kept up his talk, while Robert slid back the 
window, crawled out, and pushed it shut again. Wayne 
then, continuing his story, threw off his clothes and 
crawled into bed, where he mumbled away in pretence 
of converse for some time. Then ensued a quiet period, 
which he broke by saying aloud, " Well, Slicky, I hope 
tomorrow will be as fine a day as this was.” And he 
finally ended the farce with adding, " Darned if you 
aren’t asleep ! ” 

Long, Wayne lay pretending to sleep, in mind follow- 
ing Robert, hurrying away through the forest, and pray- 
ing that his comrade might find a safe place of hiding 
before the escape should be discovered. That Gomez had 
been thoroughly befooled, was shown in the perfect quiet 
that continued to reign on the other side of the wall. 
Wayne gave some thought to the storm that was sure to 
break when the fact of Robert’s escape should be discov- 
ered. That he would be made to suffer in some way for 
the thing, he had no doubt. But the thought brought him 
no qualms ; it was worth most any price — the chance to 
communicate with the Mercier. 

When, in the morning, Gomez opened the door to 
signify to the boys that it was time to be about, Wayne 
was slow to respond ; for he wished to give Robert all the 


120 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


time possible to prepare against pursuit. And he gave 
the hungry Gomez occasion twice to look in before he 
made a proper move to get on his clothes. 

Then finally Gomez sensed that something was amiss. 
He took two apprehensive steps into the room and looked 
about. At last he was startled into betraying his knowl- 
edge of the English, for he burst out : 

Whar thee other one?’’ 

Wayne busied himself with his shoes, and made no 
answer. 

Gomez rushed out of the door, and immediately Wayne 
heard a shrill whistle, and after a short space, excited 
voices out front; and Lafitte Goya burst into Wayne’s 
presence. 

** Whar thee other one go? ” demanded Goya. 

Wayne shrugged his shoulders, but kept silent. 

Goya was not of a character to persevere in verbal in- 
quiry. If he did not get his answer at once, he would 
invariably fall back on his own resources, jump at a con- 
clusion, and act on impulse. He called in two of the 
men, had them bind Wayne to a chair, his hands to the 
back; and he posted an armed guard over him. Then, 
in the front room, Gomez and the last night’s sentinel 
came in for a verbal thrashing, in the Spanish. Finally 
came the calling together of the men, and other sounds, 
that Wayne had no doubt were precursors to the pursuit 
of Robert. And all departed except the guard. 


ROBERT ESCAPES 


I2I 


Turning from the window, Robert gave one look over 
his shoulder to the sentinel, asleep by the oak, and sped 
off to the north for near a hundred yards. Then, to con- 
ceal his trail, he ran to the beach, and kept to the water 
till he reached the bit of a stream, up which he waded to 
the brush wherein he had concealed the suit-case holding 
the wireless set. He thrust in his hand, and the valued 
apparatus recovered, he hurried north toward the hills. 

The moon, still big, sent bright beams into the open 
spaces of the forest, and so long as he was not pursued, 
proved for Robert a valuable ally, lighting his way. The 
tree-barren hill-tops stood out, almost bright as day. 
Robert kept to the left of the ridge, alternately trotting 
and walking as he went. 

Here and there a night-bird piped out, and soon the 
many-toned night glee of the bullfrogs told Robert that 
he was nearing the region of marsh that had showed from 
the deck of the Miguel the day they coasted south. He 
soon came upon a branch of the stream that meandered 
through the marsh, and this he followed to the forking, 
within which triangular space grew a heavy thicket. He 
stopped his flight to reconnoiter. This mass of brush 
was so close-grown that even a dog of size could not have 
penetrated. 

‘Hf I could get in there, thought Robert, ‘‘ Pd be all 
right till they got tired hunting.” 

One of the great moss-festooned oaks sent a large limb 
in over the thicket. Robert eyed this; and soon he was 


122 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


creeping out on this branch; and when he had gained a 
position well over the thicket, he peered down. But 
the shadow was too deep. Out came his flash-light, and 
a few moments’ gaze into the place illumined by the little 
circle of light satisfied him. 

' It was with some enthusiasm he hurried back to the 
ground, where he took out of the suit-case two lengths 
of rope. Using one, he slung the* suit-case to his back; 
the other he hung to his belt, and again went into the 
oak. Having reached his former position, he made a 
few knots in his rope, passed it round the limb, and tied 
the ends together. Next, he was careful to pull from off 
the near branches some handsfull of Spanish moss and 
drop it to the ground. And finally he swung himself off 
the limb, and, hanging by the rope, let himself down in 
the midst of the dense thicket. The suit-case unlashed, 
his first care was to wrap his rope ladder about with the 
Spanish moss, pulling^the rope, like a buckled belt, around 
the limb, till the moss effectually concealed the strands 
from any one who should chance to look that way. 

The position was not the most agreeable in the world, 
one’s movements so circumscribed by this great compact- 
ness of growth; but Robert*sighed*with great satisfaction, 
when he settled down into the nest he forced into shape, 
bending the more pliable pieces out of the way. And so 
he sat and dozed, hour after hour, awaiting the passing 
of the expected storm. 


CHAPTER XIV 


SOUNDS OF PURSUIT — THE HOLLOW OAK 

T he moon was still high above the horizon, doing 
her utmost to keep a luster on the sea and the tops 
of trees and hills, when the sun appeared, quickly over- 
whelming the soft night glow, and throwing its reful- 
gency into the nooks and crannies of the forest. Robert 
had finally dropped into a sleep which lasted above two 
hours ; and when his eyes opened to a renewed realization 
of his position, it was broad day. The croaking of the 
frogs in the marsh below, had largely ceased; but the 
birds had begun their twitter, and a mocking-bird eyed 
him from a perch on the oak above his head, and began 
to pipe his varied song. 

Except for the sky, and the higher limbs of trees close 
to his thicket, Robert could see nothing of the region in 
which daybreak found him. And turn about, and to his 
satisfaction, he was invisible to any eyes that should not 
gain a vantage point high up — and the birds would not 
betray him. One bird after the other came to his tree 
and made his cry, or sang his tune, and so kept our fugi- 
tive in entertainment ; till at last there came less cheering 
sounds, to set the birds in flight and Robertas heart to 
thumping. 


123 


124 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Jarring voices of humans sounded from the west and 
south. Some one called out down by the marsh, and 
Robert heard Lafitte Goya’s answer, at a point by the 
small stream that bordered the thicket. Directly, he 
heard several voices jabbering in Spanish right under his 
oak, just by the thicket, and his heart made a great bump- 
ing against his ribs in a sudden fear. What if they 
should see signs of him by the oak ? He thought he heard 
some one climbing into the branches, and he crouched 
low in his nest. But the next moment the voices were 
going eastward around the thicket, presently to grow 
fainter, to the north. 

What a great breath of relief came then! In five min- 
utes all the human sounds died away; his pursuers were 
beating the bush over that last mile of island to the north 
and west. Robert judged that they would finally pass 
around to the east and go back south on the other side of 
the line of hills. Whether they would then give over the 
search for him for the present, he had no guess. At 
least he would play safe, and he determined to make a day 
of it in his present quarters, wherein he was scarcely able 
to stretch his legs, so close set were the w*ithes about 
him. 

With the relief that followed the passing of his pur- 
suers, there came a reminder from his stomach; and he 
brought out of his pockets some of the bits of hard bis- 
cuits and canned meat he and Wayne had smuggled from 
the table. He ate rather sparingly, for there was no 


SOUNDS OF PURSUIT 


125 


telling when there was to be a replenishing of his pantry. 
He had neglected to put water in the canteen, so he tried 
to do with wanting it. But the ever increasing glow of 
the sun, and his noon meal, set a dryness in his throat that 
was more tormenting than hunger. He imagined, too, 
that he heard a purling in the stream not ten yards away. 

As the hours went their snail’s-pace, Robert’s physical 
distresses multiplied ; and the songs of the birds gave him 
no cheer. But when at last the evening shadows began to 
creep over the forest, he decided the time had come. So, 
after a few mouthsfull of food, he knotted the moss- 
wound rope to the suit-case, and began his ascent by his 
swinging ladder, to the oak limb. Then, perched up 
there, he hauled up the suit-case, which he again strapped 
to his back; and recovering his rope, he made his way 
to the ground outside the thicket once more. 

He lay down at the edge of the stream and took a long 
draught of the water. And before setting off, he was 
careful to fill the canteen. Refreshed, he stepped out 
briskly to the north and east, for his purpose was to find 
some hidden, and otherwise suitable, place for setting up 
the wireless apparatus — some place offering a view of 
the sea to the north. He pushed forward with confidence, 
for he had had considerable experience out of doors, and 
had never been long stumped to find some means to his 
purpose, out of the materials furnished by nature. 

After half an hour of cautious progress Robert had 
come to a spot well up on the ridge between two hill-tops, 


126 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


from which the light of the setting sun had not gone. 
Crouched by a bush, he gave one ’reconnoitering look 
round, and then set off again down the other side of the 
hills, to the eastward. There remained to him yet near 
a half hour of fading daylight, and he .meant to make the 
most of it. He hurried up to the north, passing among 
oaks, pines, and palms, and soon stood on the eastern 
slope of a bold hill that overlooked the sea at the north- 
east corner of the island. 

A pair of live-oaks sent their branches wide. If he 
could but make a screened nest high in one of these! 
He climbed into the larger of the two. Well up, at a 
forking, he came upon the opening of a hollow. A few 
minutes with his knife at the rotted edge, and he had 
made the aperture wide enough to crawl in. So great 
a hollow, he thought, must go clear to the ground. Then 
it was to investigate at the bottom, outside. And so he 
went down again. And sure enough, screened by Span- 
ish bayonet (clusters of long dagger-like leaves, keenly 
pointed) he discovered a lower opening; though his ex- 
ploration was not without embarrassment, for this plant, 
having stilettos for leaves, not only thoroughly screened 
the hole, but guarded it against any hasty approach. 
But Robert found that these horny spines were not proof 
against his knife, and he nipped off just enough of the 
lower ones ; so that by flattening out on the ground, and 
progressing turtle-wise, he got himself into the aperture. 
Breaking down encroaching rotted masses, he crawled 


SOUNDS OF PURSUIT 


127 


within the big oak’s trunk, and stood erect, looking up to 
where light showed through that upper port-hole at the 
forking. Two or three boys might crouch comfortably 
within the tree. 

But dusk was on, and Robert had still many things to 
do. Next, it was to wriggle out under the bayonet-plant, 
make fast the suit-case to one end of the rope, climb to 
the fork with the other end, and haul up. Fortunately, 
live-oaks have a way of sending their great limbs out 
horizontally. So Robert, using pieces of rope for stays, 
propped the open suit-case into the shape of a platform. 
Then, though darkness was well on, he went again to the 
ground, and by dint of some hunting, and an economical 
use of his search-light, he got his hands on a good stick of 
hard-wood, which he hauled aloft and wedged across 
within the opening. This gave him a seat just far 
enough into the hollow to allow head and shoulders to 
be outside. 

And now came the final bit of preparation for business 
— the stretching the aerial wires between a pair of the 
higher branches. This was the least of his difficulties; 
and long before the moon rose all was set for a trial. 

Robert took his seat on the perch, head and shouders 
out of the hole, the open suit-case before him, with the 
wires reaching aloft. The batteries seen to, he put on 
the receiver and seized the key. He breathed deeply, and 
his heart thumped as he hung between hope and fear. At 
last he was ready to make the attempt to send forth to, 


128 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


and seize back a word from, his comrades on the schooner 
Mercier. He began moving the slide on the coil. 

*‘RR, RR, RR; RM. RR, RR, RR, RM/’ he sent, 
time after time, and listened at each new position of the 
slide. Hour after hour, now, he kept it up. But he got 
no answer. Once he picked up wireless messages that 
were being exchanged between two vessels at sea. But 
from his friends on the Mercier not a sound. 

All night Robert kept diligently at it. At various times 
the instrument responded to others on land and on sea; 
but from his comrades nothing. When day came he was 
loath to take down his aerial wires ; but there was always 
the chance that Lafitte Goya or some of his men might 
suddenly appear on the scene. He packed all away and 
hung the suit-case within the hollow. 

Before much light of day had come, he gathered hands- 
full of Spanish moss and hung festoons in a way to better 
screen his nest in the oak. His eyes began to wink for 
sleep; so, after a breakfast and a pull at his canteen, he 
put some knots in his rope ; and, one end fast to a limb, 
and the other dangling in the hollow, he let himself down 
within his tree house to the bottom. And there, the door 
guarded by growing Spanish bayonets, he curled up on a 
bed of moss and slept. In spite of his disappointment 
of failure, his sleep was sound. 

Robert’s awakening was sudden; his faculties were all 
alive in a flash. Human voices sounded at the very door 
of his cell. From the sound some one must be close 


SOUNDS OF PURSUIT 


129 


enough to be pricked by the Spanish bayonet plant. Rob- 
ert crouched, motionless, holding his breath, gripped with 
the fear that some mark had betrayed his retreat. Then 
at last the voices moved away, soon out of hearing. 
Anxiously he seized on his rope, and, digging his toes into 
the soft interior walls of his oak, began to ascend. 

Cautiously he put his head out at the upper opening, 
and peering through the interstices, he soon discovered 
Gomez and one other, a hundred feet to the west, and 
climbing toward the brow of the hill. When at last the 
two figures attained the top, they stood some minutes 
looking all about ; and Robert was fully conscious it was 
trace of him they looked for. And he found much satis- 
faction in the thought that they had been so close in their 
pursuit, for they were the less likely to come soon again 
to the same spot. The men hovered on the hill-top but 
a few minutes, and then disappeared down the other side. 

Now, Robert was assailed by the temptation to risk a 
sally from his cover, to make sure the enemy should take 
themselves well out of the region. So down the rope he 
went, and wormed his way out under his Spanish bayonet 
guard. Dashing from bush to bush, he soon made the 
brow of the hill. Lying flat behind a small screen of 
growth, he shot his eyes down into the pine forest, and 
in among the palms mingling on the shore side. Then 
first one figure, then the other, appeared in an open bit. 
As Robert watched, from time to time they would appear, 
to be lost again among the trees; till at last they disap- 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


130 

peared for good behind the main ridge of hills pointing 
to the northwest. 

Robert turned back down the hillside, breathing deeply 
of gratification; for he felt it would be some time, at the 
worst, till he would be disturbed again by the hunters; 
and he was growing eager for another trial at the wireless. 
The sun was already past the zenith, the day over half 
gone. He went for his canteen, and filled it at a spring, 
a hundred yards to the south ; and he gathered a pint of 
blueberries from the hillside, to round off his monotonous 
diet of hard bread and spoiling meat. 


CHAPTER XV 


THE WIRELESS WRECKED THE CAVE 

R OBERT’S next act was to search out material to im- 
prove his seat aloft in the oak. And when he had 
made the climb again by his inner stairway — which he 
had come to prefer to the outer steps, by the branches — 
there was soon wedged in place another stick, beside the 
first, making him an infinitely more comfortable chair. 

After a careful scanning of the region against possible 
unwelcome lookers-on, he hung his aerial wires up be- 
tween branches again, this time winding the more ex- 
posed parts with bits of the abundant Spanish moss. 
And now, seated with head and shoulders out of the hol- 
low, the open suit-case and instrument before him, and 
the receiver to his ear, Robert began to work the key, 
listening in from time to time. And again all he got was 
some fragments of some foreign message, that he did not 
care to hear. 

Near two hours passed thus. 

Then at last came something that set him all atingle. 

RM RM RM, RR,” it came. 

It was the Mercier at last ! 

‘‘You, Ray?'’ Robert sent. 


132 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Yes, Slicky,” came Ray’s answer. 

Julian, Loyo, dead. Wayne prisoner. I escaped.” 
Thus went Robert’s next communication. 

Understand. Where are you?” came back. 

Small island. From Dry Tortugas SW by W 
half—” 

A rope stay gave way, and suit-case, instrument and all 
toppled off the limb, and parts went tumbling to the 
ground; other parts hung swinging by the aerial wires, 
amongst them two binding-posts, pulled out of the cells. 
Frantically Robert hurried down, collected the pieces of 
wreck, and sought to make repair. But it was no use, 
the binding-posts refused to connect. 

Just eight letters more would have done the business, 
and he would have completed all that he had considered 
essential to guide the Mercier to the island. 

Poor Robert again tackled the thing, and worked long 
for a remedy, but had finally to give it up. If only 
Wayne were there! There seemed but the one chance 
— to get Wayne to the wireless. Doubtless, Wayne was 
now being kept under the closest guard, and to try to 
effect his escape would prove as awkward as the making 
a silk purse of a sow’s ear. But there was nothing else 
worth considering. He could at least crawl close to the 
house in the dark — he was sure he could so far evade a 
sentinel — and then he would signal Wayne through the 
wall. There was the chance, of course, of his being re- 
captured ; but even that were better than not to communi- 


THE WIRELESS WRECKED 


133 

cate with Wayne at all; and the situation would hardly 
be much worse. 

And so at last he came to the determination. The wire- 
less was all tucked away, and the suit-case hung within 
the oak. And then began the wait for night. The moon 
was due to rise about ten o’clock ; and not to risk exposure 
in the moonlight, Robert meant to make his attempt dur- 
ing the spell of darkness that just preceded the moon’s 
coming. 

When dusk finally spread among the trees, he set out. 
Crossing the hills by the way he had come, he turned 
south on the western side of the ridge. Within the hour 
he had come to the bit of stream just north of the house, 
and creeping amongst the last scraps of underbrush, he 
strained his eyes in the dark, and cocked his ear. There 
wasn’t a sound but the distant croaking of the bullfrogs. 

He stole forward cautiously. Finally he touched the 
very back wall of the house. He moved to the comer. 
There was no rustle, or cough, or other sign of a sentry. 
He put his ear to the wall, close to which the bed stood 
— not the faintest sound of breathing within. And no 
light shone through the window on the side. He knocked 
gently — no response. Again — no response. And 
Wayne, even in deepest sleep, was sensitive to the slight- 
est signal. Robert slipped around to the front of the 
structure. No sign of occupancy there. Carefully he 
tried the door. It opened, and he went in. For a mo- 
ment he stood and listened. Again no sound. He 


134 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


risked a flash of his lamp, for a suspicion was on him. 
The room was empty. He went into the next chamber. 
A flash showed it also abandoned. Wayne was gone. 
Even the leather chest had been taken away. The whole 
place was deserted. 

They’ve taken Wayne over to the men’s bunk- 
house,” was Robert’s thought. 

There was nothing to do but reconnoiter the bunk- 
house ; and that must be quickly, for the moon was soon 
due; and except for a few palms, there would be no 
shadows to hide one creeping about the men’s domicile. 
Robert hurried eastward through the wood; and when 
he came opposite the long building, he stopped only a 
moment to strain his eyes in the dark for a possible 
sentry, then darted over to the shelter covering the dining- 
tables. 

He heard the harsh sounds of numerous sleepers, but 
nothing to give him any inkling where Wayne could be 
in that building ; for his immediate purpose was to signal 
him through the wall. No light shone in the two win- 
dows on this, the north side, and he made the circuit of 
the whole in the hope that some other window would offer 
him a glimmering as to conditions within. But it was 
all as dark as a mole’s burrow; and so, for the time at 
least, he must give over his hope to communicate with 
Wayne. And now the warning shimmer of the moon 
gave direction to his movements. 

Before making his hurry scurry for the wood, Robert 


THE WIRELESS WRECKED 


•135 


crept into the cook-shanty and secured some bits of food, 
and a draught from the coffee-pot. The moon topped 
the horizon before he got well into the shelter of the trees. 
To find a close-screened nest in the underbrush was no 
difficult task; but there came no sleep to ameliorate the 
tedium of the long wait, till hours past midnight. And 
then he slept, as it were, with one eye open, not to let the 
sun catch him unawares ; for he meant to have a look on 
all that would be going forward so soon as the men 
should be on the stir. 

When the first glimmering showed on the eastern 
watery horizon, Robert was alert again. By the time the 
old Spanish cook set his fire going in the cook-house, 
Rdbert had planted himself within some brush overlook- 
ing the house. When the men sat doiwn to their meal, 
he saw that Wayne was not among them; nor was the 
snaky, skulking Gomez. But Robert made out the Eng- 
lishman, Norris, at the long table; though he seemed 
like a rank outsider amongst that ill-complexioned crew, 
and appeared to hold himself aloof from any part in the 
table tattle. 

The men finally set their pipes going, and Robert could 
see Lafitte Goya, with gesticulation, ordering them on the 
move. They went north toward the hills, eight in all, 
this time unburdened with pick or shovel, though one 
carried a hamper ; and it appeared Goya alone was armed : 
he carried a rifle, and hung to his belt was a pair of pis- 
tols and a sheath-kife. 


136 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


For an hour after the procession disappeared, Robert 
watched for glimpse of some others besides the cook about 
the house. If Gomez was there guarding Wayne, it 
seemed incredible he would fail to show himself some- 
time within the hour. The suspense irked him, and he 
must know how things stood in that bunk-house. So he 
made a detour to the west, scampered along the beach to 
the front of the house, and thus kept out of view of the 
cook, busied at the back. Then, crawling up by the 
shell pile, he hurried to the front door, standing open. 
Cautiously he peered in — no one visible — then slipped 
within. It took but a few moments to satisfy himself 
of the astounding fact that Wayne was not there. 

But as he was creeping among the beds, he heard the 
old mumbling cook at the back door. He had hardly 
time to roll himself into a comer, under a bed, before 
the lumbering step of the man came along, creaking the 
floor. He shuffled about, throwing the beds into semi- 
order, and then went out again. 

Robert crawled forth and got himself back the way 
he had come. And he sat down in a nook of the forest, 
to endeavor to adjust his mind to the new and somewhat 
puzzling state of affairs. Since his discovery that Wayne 
was gone from the little house, he hadn’t entertained a 
doubt but that he was in this latter lodging. And now 
what could have become of him? There must still be 
some other retreat under Goya’s use; and Robert recol- 
lected Gomez’s absence from the company; and the basket 


THE WIRELESS WRECKED 


137 


borne by one of the men. Reasonably, this meant break- 
fast for Gomez and his prisoner. Ah ! then he knew what 
must be the next step forward. And he set about mak- 
ing it. 

Within the wood, Robert found an apparently new- 
made trail going toward the north. With a sharp eye 
and ear forward, he followed its windings among the 
hodge-podge of growths, for nearly half a mile, and came 
to the first hill. The path took him a bit to the left, and 
then came to an abrupt end, between that hill and the 
next; the second hill rising higher, and right here more 
sheer. It seemed as if those using this trail had — for 
some reason or other — habitually made this the point 
of branching out into various directions. Perhaps — so 
reasoned Robert — the purpose was to conceal the place 
to which the path had begun to mark the way; and these 
various routes, of which there were no distinctive traces, 
converged at the place concealed. 

Casting about for some pointer, Robert finally made 
out some irregular signs of passage eastward, between 
the hills ; and eventually they got him well up the eastern 
slope of the bigger hill, among the bushes. 

Robert was scanning the region for other signs, when 
suddenly Gomez appeared, popping, like a Jack in a box, 
out of a clump not thirty yards away. Robert threw 
himself down amongst the grass, and cautiously peering 
forth, his eyes followed the form of the Spaniard, going 
down among the trees toward the shore. It was then he 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


138 

caught, faintly, voices coming from down that way. 

But he must find out what Gomez did in the bushes 
from which he had so suddenly burst forth. It took but 
a minute to reach the spot, and Robert was not a littlJ? 
astounded — to look into a black hole, little broader than 
would accommodate a bear, going right into the hill. 
He felt that at last he was on the way to discovering the 
whereabouts of Wayne. But considering it hardly safe 
as yet to venture inside, since Gomez might at any mo- 
ment be back again, he determined next to see what was 
going on down shoreward. The undergrowth offered 
plenty of concealment, and it was not five minutes till he 
came close enough for a view of the field. 

In the grove of hard- woods, interspersed with cocoa- 
nut and other palms, the men were delving with shovels ; 
and scattered about were a number of prospect holes, ap- 
parently abandoned. Some of the tree-trunks about 
showed marks of old blazings. ‘‘ Hunting for the treas- 
ure,” said Robert to himself. And it seemed to him the 
diggers’ enthusiasm had pretty much run out, for they 
worked very much like men making ditch on small wages. 
Lafitte Goya, however, appeared to be urging them on, 
himself not disdaining to wield a shovel, by way of ex- 
ample. 

Robert hung on and off the prlace till evening, when 
the men struck off work. And he watched Gomez to 
that hole in the hill, where he went boldly in, to come out 
in ten minutes, bearing the basket. Gomez joined the 


THE WIRELESS WRECKED 139 

others as they marched south, toward their night quar- 
ters. 

For two hours after night-fall, Robert crouched in 
the bushes, close to that hole; for he must make sure 
Gomez would not return. Then he crawled into the 
den, from outer obscurity to inner blackness. He had 
not far to go till he found the passage begin to widen and 
grow higher, allowing him to stand. Warily he crept 
forward, flashing his electric lamp, when he thought need- 
ful, on the stalactites and stalagmites, and masses that ap- 
peared like snowdrifts. He came to a meeting with a 
lesser gallery from the right; but he held on to the left, 
ever moving at a snail’s pace, in the widening passage. 
Then at last he turned a corner, and a dim light partially 
illumined the^blfils ahead. He crouched behind an ir- 
regularity and scrutinized the space. 

The light came from a lantern on a box. Pallets 
showed on the floor, one against either wall. Sounds of 
sleepers, came from that on the right. On the left a 
figure moved restlessly, and in a few minutes arose to 
a sitting posture; and there came the rattle of a chain. 
Then Robert saw that it was Wayne, and he hurried for- 
ward. Wayne recognized him, and put a warning finger 
to his lips. That moment there came the sound of 
some one moving up the passage, and Wayne had barely 
time to tuck Robert out of sight under a blanket, when 
the sentry appeared. 


CHAPTER XVI 


DOINGS ON THE MERCIER 

R ay REID and Captain Jean Marat clung to the 
south beach of that little island of the Florida coast 
for some hours following the sailing away of the Miguel, 
bearing Wayne and Robert. They kindled a fire, for 
cheer. And as the light of day crept over the sea, they 
watched the schooner as it moved southward, to note any 
change of its course; till finally it disappeared below the 
rim of the horizon. 

‘‘ She go direc’ to the south,” said Marat at last. Ah, 
thad Goya he theenk we wadch; and w’en we cannod 
wadch more, he change thee course maybe.” 

“ He looked like a sly gink,” observed Ray. 

When Marat and Ray again got aboard the Mercier, 
breakfast waited. The meal was not a gay affair, fol- 
lowing so closely on the departure of two of the com- 
pany on so uncertain a venture. Even Ray’s spirit melted 
into the general gloom. 

Finally came some discussion relative to the ultimate 
and mysterious goal of the Miguel. That the schooner 
would go round the end of Florida to the east was set 
down as beyond probability, for Jean Marat held that in 

140 


DOINGS ON THE MERCIER 


141 

that direction Pedro Lamartine could not long have held 
secret his pearling grounds; that way every region was 
much travelled. 

Well/^ blurted Phil, why couldn’t we have ta4cen a 
chance and followed in sight of the Miguel? 

‘‘Well, say!” and Ray’s eyes went wide in astonish- 
ment. “ Phil, you’re sure bit by the sleeping-bug. So 
long as we’re in sight of the Miguel, that Lafitte Goya 
pirate isn’t going to keep on the right course and show 
us the way. He’d dodge around till he shook us. And 
where would Wayne and Slicky be then, trying to keep 
track of the way they go? Here, have some coffee, and 
spit the sand out of your eyes.” 

When Rufe had finally cleared the table of dishes, the 
chart was got out, and studied for places out of the 
beaten track, which might be likely pearling grounds. 
For everything known of old Pedro Lamartine pointed 
to the reasonable certainty that his seat had proven a rich 
gem mine, and that for a considerably number of years. 

“ Well,” said Joe Hunt, “ where are the known pearl 
fisheries ? ” 

“ It is said,” began Jean Marat, “ some of the bes’ 
place’ is in Bay of Panama.” 

“ But that’s over on the Pacific side of Central Amer- 
ica,” offered Charlie Manners. 

“ I hear it many time’ said,” went on Marat, “ they fin’ 
ver’ much pearl by some of these island’, here,” (pointing 
on the chart) “ down by South America.” 


142 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


** Do you think Pedro Lamartine’s place is that far? ” 
asked Leslie. 

*^Non” asserted Marat, “eet can nod be so far as 
thad.” 

'' It might be any old place this side,” suggested Ray. 

“Yes,” assented Captain Marat. “Yes, and it ver’ 
sure some place new, w’at other people have not find.” 

“ Maybe it’s down here,” suggested Bert Hill, “ among 
these islands close to the south end of Florida.” 

“ It ees possib’,” agreed Marat, “ but I theenk it more 
far as thad.” 

“ It looks like,” observed Ray, “ from all these dots 
of islands, it must be a great place to play hide and seek.” 

“ Yes,” said Marat, “ it ees plenty place to hide there. 
Bud I never hear they fin’ ver’ many pearl in such place. 
Anyway we can nod be so sure.” 

The discussion finally ended with the decision to cruise 
among the keys off Florida, until such time as they could 
hope for some wireless communication from Wayne and 
Robert. So at about eleven o’clock, it was up anchor 
and make sail. 

At dusk the Mercier passed Cape Sable; and when it 
fell quite dark, the anchor was let go some miles to the 
southeast of the cape. 

Early the following day the Mercier found herself 
among the keys, beating about with much shifting of 
canvas, and zigzagging to avoid the shoals. It was the 
beginning of a period of vagabondry. There was fish- 


DOINGS ON THE MERCIER 


143 

ing, and crabbing on the beaches, with turtle-turning at 
night. Oysters were plentiful, and the oyster knives 
were brought to play, and many eyes were set keen for 
pearls. But not one did they find. They came upon 
several parties in sloops, whom they questioned for news 
of the Miguel. None had seen the schooner. 

On the third day, convinced that the region knew noth- 
ing of the Miguel, our sailors set the course to the west. 
Ray put up his aerial wires, and thereafter, night and day, 
there was some one at the wireless during the half of 
every hour. For several days, thus, the wireless was 
watched for sparks of news from Wayne and Robert. 
The Mercier passed to the north of the Marquesas Keys, 
and continued to dawdle along, praying for a word that 
should point a definite course. 

Then came that night in which Robert, in his oak on 
the Pearl Isle, labored at his key — reaching out for the 
Mercier. Bert was at the wireless till midnight, when 
he was relieved by Phil. But Phil wanted patience in a 
pursuit of so much uncertainty; and it was doubtless be- 
cause of his half-hearted attention to the instrument, that 
the Mercier failed to pick up Robert’s call. 

Joe Hunt was having his turn in the clutches of the 
receiver — the wireless installed on a box at the foot of 
the mainmast — when Rufe called to him from the gal- 
ley : 

Dey ain’ no news yit, Joe? ” 

Not a thing, Rufe,” said Joe. 


144 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


The others (except Leslie at the wheel, and Charlie 
up forward) were at breakfast; a somber crew, and 
silent, till Rufe’s query stirred the thing that was the 
load on their spirits. 

Something’s sure happened to them,” said Phil. 
** That Goya’s discovered the wireless, or something.” 

Don’t croak, Phil ! ” scolded Ray, resenting in an- 
other the voicing of the very fear that was seeking to get 
the better of himself. We’re going to hear from them 
yet. It might not be so easy for them to find a chance; 
but you bet ! Wayne and Slicky’ll find it.” 

It was so he put a bolster to his own hope. 

**Ray!” hailed Joe. Here’s something! Come, 
quick ! ” 

Ray knocked over his stool, and in another moment 
was jamming on the receiver, crouching at the instrument. 
The others flocked about, eagerly attentive. 

** It’s Slicky I ” said Ray, eyes staring as he listened. 
Grasping the key, he sent : “ RM, RM, RM : RR.” 

Then he spoke out Robert’s words — “You, Ray?” 
And after his answer back, he again interpreted aloud — 
“ Julian, Loyo, dead. Wayne prisoner. I escaped.” 

The astounded crew shook under the news, but held 
their breaths as Ray sent : 

“ Understand. Where are you ? ” And once again 
he spoke out the reply: “Small island. From Dry 
Tortugas SW by W half — ” And there he stopped. 


DOINGS ON THE MERCIER 


H5 

Something went wrong/' said Ray. He didn't 
finish." 

But he continued to listen for a resumption of the mes- 
sage. Nothing came. For a long time he clung to the 
instrument, finally relinquishing the receiver to Joe. 

In the meantime, the others moved aft to discuss the 
news. Jean Marat dropped into a chair by the table. 

Ver’ bad news," said he. “ Ver’ bad." 

Does you say mah li’le Julian am daid? " came from 
black Rufus, and tears were in his voice. Ah cain’t be- 
liebe dat. — No sah. — Dat sho is some mistake. Ah 
be’n a-seein’ him in mah sleep — jes’ as plain! Dat sho 
is some mistake." 

'' Well, Rufe," said Charlie, “ we're going to go and 
find out. We’ve something to go on now. Haven’t we, 
Captain Marat? " 

Yes," said Marat. Thad message w’at we get tell 
ver' much. We can not go wrong more than by one 
point of the compass." 

Captain Marat produced the chart, which he spread on 
the table. 

Ver' well," he began. The message — so much 
w’at we get — say, ^ From Dry Tortugas southwest by 
west half — .’ If the message be complete it would say, 
* southwest by west half west’ ; or it would say, ‘ south- 
west by west half south.’ ” 

Then producing his pencil, he drew a compass, and 


146 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


taking the Dry Tortugas Islands as the common starting 
point, he extended two lines on the chart, corresponding 
to the two possible directions, which lines ended some way 
apart, on the coast of Central America. 

“ Now,’' he said, “ one of them line’ go by thad ‘ small 
island ’ we like to fin’.” 

“ Then,” broke in Ray, all we have to do is to follow 
those lines — first one, then t’other — till we come to it.” 

Yes,” said Jean Marat. 

Hooray ! ” shouted Phil. 

'' But,” said Ray, '' the chart doesn’t show any islands 
on either line.” 

” No,” agreed Captain Marat, ‘‘ but here is ver’ many 
coral reef’ show on thee more south line — the island 
maybe ver’ small.” 

Then shall we try the south line first? ” said Ray. 

” I theenk,” concluded Marat. 

So Captain Marat relieved Leslie of the wheel, and set 
the Mercier on a course calculated to bring her to the Dry 
Tortugas Islands. In the meantime the boys collected 
forward to discuss Robert’s laconic message more at 
length, especially that which lay between the words of it. 

“ Well,” said Leslie, it proves that that Goya wasn’t 
as friendly as he pretended to be.” 

“ Yes,” said Ray. All he wants is that treasure 
Pedro Lamartine hid. And he hasn’t found it, for he’d 
hike out in a minute to get where he could spend it.” 

And it looks like he has a poor chance to find it, with 


DOINGS ON THE MERCIER 


147 


Loyo dead/’ offered Joe ; for, according to old Pedro’s 
writing, Loyo was the only one who knew how to find 
it.” 

** I wonder how Julian and Loyo died? ” queried Bert. 

Well,” said Ray, “ maybe Loyo was sick, like Goya 
said; and then it wouldn’t be strange that he should die. 
But Julian too — it looks kind of queer.” 

You don’t suppose Goya made away with them ? ” 
ventured Charlie. 

“ I don’t see what he would gain by that, before find- 
ing the treasure,” said Joe, seeing that Loyo was the 
only one with any information as to how to locate it.” 

** Well,” said Ray, there’s no use guessing about it. 
But I wonder just what they want to hold Wayne and 
Slicky prisoners for.” 

Maybe this Goya found out they were up to some- 
thing,” said Joe. 

‘‘ Of course,” assented Ray. “ But I wish Slicky 
would get the wireless going again.” 

‘‘ Maybe he got caught while he was sending,” sug- 
gested Bert. 

This surmise sickened the boys of the discussion, and 
incontinently, each turned to other employment. 

The middle of the afternoon brought the Mercier in 
view of Bird Key and Loggerhead Key, of the Dry Tor- 
tugfas. Then Captain Marat laid the course SW by 
W 1/2 S. 

And now followed a new period, made of fair winds 


148 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


and weather, and much of what the boys in their impa- 
tience considered unfair winds and weather; till one night 
at about ten o’clock, Joe, on the watch in the bows, lifted 
his voice to Ray, at the wheel. 

“ A light on the port bow! ” he called. 

A light on the port bow I ” Ray repeated in high 
tones. 

The sleepers were instantly up from their pallets. 

Captain Marat climbed to the fore cross-trees. Set 
her one point to thee south I ” he called down to Ray. 

Now — so I Leslie, take thee wheel ! ” he called again. 

Ray, come aloft weeth one lantern.” 

Ray was soon clinging to the mast-head beside Marat, 
and swinging a lantern. The light discovered by Joe 
shone about four miles to the southward; and presently 
Ray and Marat saw it go out and gleam forth again a 
number of times in succession. Ray covered and un- 
covered his lantern repeatedly, in like manner of signal- 
ing. 

It’s their beacon ! ” he called down to the anxious 
boys on the deck. “ It’s the boys at lastl ” 


CHAPTER XVII 


JULIAN AND LOYO 

I T will be remembered, that on the morning when Rob- 
ert’s flight was discovered, Goya, to make sure of his 
remaining prisoner, had the lad bound to a chair, and 
set a guard over him, while the rest went off in pursuit of 
Robert. 

All day Wayne sat thus trussed up. And it was not 
till midday that his guard saw fit to offer him a bit of 
food and drink, brought over by the old cook, out of 
whose hands he must pick his sustenance, like a bird. 

When the men returned at night, Wayne found com- 
fort in the signs of defeat; and he knew that the hunt for 
Robert had failed. It showed particularly in Lafitte 
Goya’s demeanor. And it was with a vicious jerk he 
tested the bonds on the boy’s wrists, before ordering him 
to be led forward on the way to the men’s quarters. But 
he was again given food, his hands released ; and the end 
of a light boat-chain was secured to his ankle, the link 
pounded fast with a hammer; the thing done under the 
eye and sinister grin of Lafitte Goya. 

Soon Wayne was in the middle of a little procession, 
making through the woods toward the hills. Lafitte 
149 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


150 

Goya — much armed — went beforehand Gomez came 
after, holding to the chain, which clanked at every step 
the boy took. The first hill passed, the little caravan ap- 
proached the sheer wall of the next; and directly, Wayne 
was a good deal astounded, on coming out of a bit of 
brush, to be thrust into the mouth of a cave. 

At a call from Goya a lantern appeared, in the hand of 
a sentinel, who illumined the way to a narrow point of 
the passage, where he took station, while the others went 
round a corner and into a space of greater extent, like a 
room. Goya took the free end of the chain and passed 
it round a tall stalagmite; and a hammer came into play 
again, closing the final link into the bight. After a word 
to Gomez, Lafitte Goya disappeared. 

There is something peculiarly dispiriting in the damp 
atmosphere of a dungeon. From the moment that black 
hole in the hill gaped to receive Wayne, and for the short 
space when the one dominant sound was the clanking of 
the chain on his leg, racking thoughts teemed within him. 
It seemed as if the sunshine and the fair face of the 
earth was forever set behind him, was never again to 
gladden his heart. There arose in his mind a picture of 
the two graves of Julian and Loyo, and he set beside them 
a third — freshly made, a mound of newly turned sand. 
And then his thoughts went far away, and he saw his 
mother and father, and he sorrowed for them. For he 
knew how fondly they looked forward to the coming of 
him whom they were never to see again. In all his heart- 


JULIAN AND LOYO 


151 

ache for those others, there was little room for sorrowing 
for himself, and he forgot his personal dread of that 
third grave, which might be even now in the digging. 
And so, in the grip of such bitter musings, Wayne was ill- 
prepared for the revelation making ready to burst upon 
him. 

Gomez had just finished taking away some movables 
from next to the wall, and had set the lantern on a box 
near the middle of the grotto, so that it lent of its feeble 
beams to all parts; and he too went back down the pas- 
sage. It was then Wayne, out of the tail of his eye, 
sensed a living something over against the opposite wall. 
Quickly he turned, and found himself gazing on the face 
of a lad some years older than himself, and who was 
returning his look with a wonder in the eyes matching 
his own marvelling. The lad sat among blankets thrown 
on the floor. And Wayne, with more difficulty, dis- 
cerned a black face, resting on an improvised pillow. 

It came all over Wayne in a warm glow of realization. 
It was Julian Lamartine, and Loyo ! They were not, 
then, moldering in those two graves, as Gomez had nursed 
him into believing. But they were alive, and confined 
now in this black hole with himself. 

A great warmth surged within him. Capacity for 
happiness is not a fixed thing, conditioned as it is on at- 
tendant circumstances. Sad indeed as was Wayne’s 
situation — chained to a rock pillar in a dungeon, and the 
outcome uncertain — this new state of mind, coming on 


152 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


this wonderful revelation, was as Paradise compared to 
the rack upon which his affections had just now been 
stretched. 

Wayne moved as close to the others as his chain per- 
mitted. 

“ Are you Julian? ” he murmured. 

“ Yes,” said the other lad, simply, his eyes still looking 
their wonder. 

Thus began the low-toned converse, with explanations 
and mutual confidences, that lasted away into the night — 
as time went, for anything but night never penetrated 
this place. There was but one interruption — when one 
of the Spaniards came bearing the leathern chest, so that 
Wayne might have out his blankets, to make his own bed. 
There was apparently no purpose to prevent communica- 
tion between the prisoners, since doubtless it was con- 
sidered they were in no condition to embarrass Goya’s 
activities ; and it may also have been in Goya’s mind that 
the lads might chance to let slip some word that would 
reveal some clue to the location of the treasure that was 
his one sole aim and worship. 

Julian Lamartine found much joy in the tidings that 
his grandfather was alive and waiting for him, and was 
greatly impressed by Wayne’s account of the contents of 
the letter addressed to him by old Pedro; and expressed 
much gratitude over the enterprise undertaken by the 
boys, with the purpose to seek him out and help him 
back into his own. 


JULIAN AND LOYO 


153 


Julian Lamartine’s story of all those years of virtual 
imprisonment has already been outlined. He recounted 
that night — he a wee fellow — when his grandfather 
had permitted him to remain at the home of Henri La- 
martine: how in the night he had been awakened by a 
noise, and he had slipped out of bed and run to the foot 
of the stairs, to find Pedro Lamartine stooping over the 
body of Henri in the candle-light; how Pedro had seized 
on him, and took up a tin box, and fled out of the house; 
how Pedro had rowed across the river and taken him 
to a room, and locked him in; and later, how he found 
himself on the sea in a ship, in time carried ashore on this 
island. He told how he had always held the belief that 
Pedro had stricken down Henri Lamartine, but that Pedro 
had forbidden any reference to the past, and had himself 
made just one reference to his grandfather, and that was 
to put an end to the matter with a veiled hint that he 
was dead and gone. And Pedro, especially of late, had 
intimated that if Julian was good and patient, he was 
to become very wealthy. He had shown a growing re- 
gard for Julian. From his voyages away he had brought 
him toys, and school books, from which he and Loyo 
had taught him to read. Julian’s years of life on the 
island had not been quite void of pleasures; and he had 
taken interest in the pearl fishing; and he had been per- 
mitted to help Pedro and Loyo to extract the gems — 
none of the others was allowed to have a hand in this 
work. 


154 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


But troubles finally came. Loyo, who was a big black 
giant of a fellow, finally discovered Gomez and another 
in the act of secretly taking out pearls; and he took up 
the two in his hands and cracked their heads together. 
And when Pedro sailed away to a Central American port 
in search of some Japanese divers, to take the places of 
two who were to return to their homes across the Pa- 
cific, Gomez deserted from the schooner. And when 
Pedro had again sailed to market vs^ith some pearls and 
a load of shell, there appeared from the west an open 
sailboat, bearing Gomez and four strangers : Lafitte 
Goya, two other Spaniards, and an English-speaking man 
• — Norris. 

Loyo had latterly suffered yearly attacks of rheuma- 
tism ; and now, when these strangers came, he was hardly 
able to hobble about — much less deal with them. Some- 
what over a week before it came time for Loyo to sail 
with a load of shell, to meet Pedro Lamartine at the 
rendezvous, Loyo became so helpless as to be unable to 
leave his bed. Julian had the poor darky carried from 
his bunk in the men’s quarters to the smaller building, 
where he could nurse him. 

And then immediately it became evident that this La- 
fitte Goya had gained influence over the men, excepting 
the two Jap divers, who remained loyal to their employer, 
and who brought to Julian and Loyo news of Goya’s do- 
ings. It developed that Gomez had some kind of knowl- 
edge of a weight of treasure hidden on the island by 


JULIAN AND LOYO 


155 


Pedro Lamartine, and Lafitte Goya promised the men a 
liberal share when the hoard should be discovered. Very 
soon the two friendly Japs ceased to appear, and Julian 
made sure that they had been done away with. And at 
last matters came to a climax. Lafitte Goya appeared, 
Gomez slinking behind him, and demanded of Loyo di- 
rections for locating the treasure. And Loyo had come 
back with the answer that if he knew he should refuse 
to tell. 

Loyo glared at the man,” said Julian, and gritted 
his teeth ; and if he had not been bound down by his sick- 
ness, I know he would have taken that Goya and Gomez 
in his two fists and cracked their heads together as he had 
done for Gomez before.” 

Here Julian reached over and stroked Loyo^s bony 
black face with his hand. 

When they had gone, poor Loyo lay silent for some 
time ; and finally he called me to him, saying he had some- 
thing to tell me. He then told how Pedro had confided 
to him that he had been laying away money and the choic- 
est of the pearls, intended for me at his death. And he 
told me of a secret drawer set into the wall back of 
Pedro’s bunk in the cabin of the Mercier, and the same in 
the Miguel, in either of which — depending on which 
schooner Pedro should be when he died — there would 
be a letter to Loyo, telling how the hiding-place of the 
treasure was to be found. Then Loyo became thought- 
ful again. It seemed like he was trying to think out 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


156 

how he was to tell me what more he had to say. And 
during that quiet time I heard a sound of something 
rubbing against the wall by the window. I hurried over 
and stuck out my head just in time to see Gomez slink 
found the corner of the house. 

I didn’t tell Loyo about it. And then he asked me 
to leave him alone for a little while. So I took up the 
pail and went back to the spring for some fresh water. 
I looked about for a sight of Gomez, but saw nothing of 
him. 

But when I was coming back, I saw that sneaking 
form hurrying from the house toward the thick woods. 
His actions alarmed me, and I hurried in to Loyo. I 
found Loyo unconscious, and I saw blood on the pillow, 
and found where he had been struck on the side of the 
head; and there was a place broken in. Loyo was still 
breathing. I put on a bandage; it was the only thing I 
knew to do. I watched all night and the next day, no 
one to turn to for help. The cook came with food, and 
set it in the next room. But I couldn’t eat. That next 
night Loyo opened his eyes ; but he appeared to have lost 
his mind. I talked to him; but he didn’t seem to hear 
what I said. I finally wrote words on paper, which he 
looked at; but he didn’t seem to make them out. I saw 
that he knew me, but otherwise his mind was all blank. 
And he is still the same, though he is quickly growing 
stronger, and often puts his hands up to his head, as if 
it pained.” 


JULIAN AND LOYO 


157 


Did Goya come in again ? ” asked Wayne. 

'' Yes,” said Julian, ‘‘ he came and looked at Loyo, 
and tried to talk with him. And he laughed when he saw 
his condition. The next time I looked out on the lagoon, 
the Miguel was gone, and I saw only two of the men. In 
about a week, the Miguel came back, and Goya unloaded 
the shells. They searched about the place for some days, 
in some spots, and then sailed away in the Miguel 

again. 

“ When the Miguel came back this last time, Goya 
came ashore and immediately had us taken to this cave.” 

And so ended Julian Lamartine’s story. Much as 
Wayne yearned to give Julian the bit of cheer that would 
come of the telling him of the existence of the wireless, 
and Robert’s probable doings, he was careful not so much 
as to whisper anything that was not already known to 
Lafitte Goya. For he could not know that Gomez was 
not skulking somewhere within earshot, in the hope that 
he might hear something that should help in the hunt that 
was going forward with such ill success. 

For two days Wayne continued to languish in that 
subterranean hole with his fellow prisoners. Julian, at 
times, would give voice to the wish that Goya might 
find the treasure ; for then he hoped that this confinement 
might end, and they should be set ashore somewhere on 
the mainland, whence they might pick their way to their 
friends. But Wayne would shake his head, thus only 
showing that he had hope of a better outcome than that. 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


158 

Then came the night when Robert suddenly appeared, 
creeping in on the scene, and was thrust out of view un- 
der Wayne’s blanket, as the sentry came forward on his 
round. 


CHAPTER XVIII 


THE MERCIER COMES 

^ I ^ HE sentinel, trailing a rifle by its strap, came for- 
A ward, sent his eyes about in the dimness, and ex- 
amined the fetter on Wayne’s ankle. Then — Go 
sleep,” he said. Doubtless, he reasoned a sleeping pris- 
oner betokened a nap for the guard. 

Wayne made as if to comply. And the Spaniard went 
lumbering back round the corner to the narrows of the 
passage, where he lay himself across the way, evidently 
meaning to lose as little rest as may be. 

Wayne lost no time in getting himself under the blanket 
with Robert, head and all. And then there began a coun- 
cil in whispers. Because of the chance of further inter- 
ruption, Robert wasted no words in recounting the prog- 
ress he had made in communication with the Mercier, and 
how the accident with the wireless had come just as he 
was about to flash to their comrades the few final words 
of the message that was to direct them to the islands. 

Well,” said Wayne, what you sent them is only 
half a point off ; and you got in the word ‘ half,’ so they’ll 
know it’s just a half point either one way or the other. 
And then we may have missed it that much anyway. The 
159 


i6o THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 

distance is the only ching really left out, and it couldn’t 
be any farther than to the coast somewhere.” 

But,” argued Robert, “ it would be a good thing if 
you could get the wireless going again.” 

“ My ankle is chained,” said Wayne. '' But the link 
could be bent open if we had something to do it v/ith.” 

We’ll try my pocket knife,” said Robert. 

‘‘ But then,” reasoned Wayne, '' when they find out 
I’m gone, they’ll drop everything and hunt for us till they 
find us.” 

Well, I’ll stay here,” said Robert. There isn’t 
enough light for them to see the difference.” 

And finally Robert had his way of it ; and the boys be- 
gan preparing for the swap in situations. Robert crawled 
to the bend in the passage, and listening, heard the heavy 
breathing of the sleeping watch. Then back to Wayne, 
and feeling out the end link, he set his knife blade in 
and pried. But it refused to give. He then began to 
search in the space for some other tool, finally risking 
a trip down close to the sleeping guard ; and by a careful 
use of his flash lamp he finally got his eye on the hammer 
that had been used in setting the link together. It was 
a claw-hammer, and with pushing both knife-blade and 
a claw of the hammer into the link, it was at last opened 
sufficiently to allow disconnection; and Wayne’s ankle 
was freed. 

The chain then was set around Robert’s ankle, and 
the link got together as much as might be without noise 


THE MERCIER COMES 


i6i 


of pounding. Wayne then gathered into his pocket some 
remains of supper; and the two got their heads under 
the blanket for a last word. 

'' Keep to the right,” said Robert ; it isn’t far to the 
opening. You’ll find the oak easy; it’s on the east side 
of the hill, and a Spanish Bayonet bush just in front of 
the hollow.” 

“ I’ll find it,” said Wayne. ‘‘ And now, Slicky, I’m 
sure they’ll find the way here ; and we’ll manage someway 
to get you and Julian and Loyo out of here soon after 
they come.” 

I know,” returned Robert. Just you try and get 
the wireless going. It was my carelessness that caused 
the tumble.” 

Not a bit,” declared Wayne. Well, I’m going.” 

And so Wayne went groping up the dark passage, a 
hand on the wall, till he got round a bend, where he could 
risk an occasional flash of Robert’s lamp. And soon he 
found himself out under the stars and the now rising 
moon. He went north, keeping within the edge of the 
forest, the beach on his right; and before midnight, he 
was at the foot of the last hill, showing under the soft 
moonlight ; and he made out those two oaks of Robert’s, 
just ahead. 

It required but little labor and as little time to find the 
Spanish Bayonet plant, and a minute to squirm his way 
in to the hollow behind. Directly, the rope ladder was 
in his hand, and he began to climb. And next, he was 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


162 

seated on the improvised perch within the top of the 
hollow, and got his hand on the suit-case, where it hung 
within. To get the canteen filled with fresh water, was 
his next care. And when he got back, he began to set 
the suit-case on the limb in the way Robert had described. 

The climbing moon gave Wayne more and more light. 
He struggled with the binding-posts till he thought they 
should hold in place and work for a time, only to find 
that two cells had run out by an accidental short-circuiting, 
and could be mended only with new ones. But all this 
gave him no very great hurt ; for, as he had told Robert, 
Robert’s message had, after all, given the Mercier's crew 
sufficient to direct their course right enough. 

So now all there was left to do was to watch for a ves- 
sel’s light at sea, by night; by day, for a sail. Wayne 
put away the wireless ; and hour after hour, he sat there, 
scanning the sea at intervals. Towards morning, he 
went down by the rope to the bottom of the hollow, where 
he gave himself up to a couple of hours’ sleep. 

The whole of the next day passed with not a sail in 
sight. The region was but little travelled, because of 
the dangerous reefs that pock-marked the sea for many 
miles around. 

Night came again, and Wayne clung to his perch, try- 
ing to buoy his hope as he watched for a gleam on the 
sea. He talked to himself, in a way of soothing a child, 
promising that the Mercier would be sure to come to- 
night; and then, in a second thought, and by way of pro- 


THE MERCIER COMES 


163 


viding against disappointment — Well, shell show up 
by tomorrow anyway/’ And so it went for a couple of 
hours of the night, which was very warm, and growing 
in sultriness, where he sat in the oak, protected by the 
hill from a dwindling westerly breeze. 

He set his eyes for another look seaward. Then his 
heart made a great leap, and went jumping at a pace. A 
red light showed to the north of him. Ever so faint it 
was, and it went out. But it came again. 

“ It’s the Mercier! ” he said aloud. And he stood up 
on the perch. 

The next moment, Wayne fairly tumbled down the 
hollow of the oak, and got a penal pricking of the Span- 
ish bayonet plant, as with too great haste he made his 
way out. He went at the gathering of dried twigs and 
branches to a spot near the brow of the hill ; and there he 
set a fire going. Armful after armful he piled beside 
his beacon. In ten minutes he saw a green light flash 
into view. “ They are turning this way ! ” he cried. 
And then directly, he noted a white light going up higher 
than the green and red. 

He tore off his jacket and held it before the fire. Then 
swung it off and on, letting out flashes of light. He was 
answered on the vessel. There was no mistake, it was 
the Mercier. Then he stood, entranced with joy, as he 
watched the lights steadily growing in distinctness. He 
piled on the wood, and the schooner came straight on. 
He strained his eyes as she came close, and forgot to flash 


164 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


warning of the reefs, till suddenly a squall broke out of 
the east, and the schooner came with a rush, straight for 
the line of breakers. 

Wayne rushed down to the shore, and he signalled with 
his flashlight. But in the confusion on board, of taking 
in sail, his tardy warning was not read in time; and the 
Mercier struck hard aground, a quarter mile from the 
beach. 

Fortunately, the squall quickly passed, and was fol- 
lowed by a light, steady breeze. And soon a boat, bear- 
ing Ray, Joe, and Captain Marat, came over the lagoon, 
making direct towards Wayne. 

He waded into the water as the boat came up, and 
seized hold of the bow. And at once, he felt himself in 
the grip of the three of his comrades, on the beach. 

We were mighty glad to see your light,” and “Ah! 
Thees is great pleasure!” and “Where’s Slicky?” All 
spoke at once. Then questions about the accident to the 
wireless, and regarding the manner of the deaths of 
Julian and Loyo, came in a second outburst, before 
Wayne could find a word. All climbed into the boat ; and 
on the way back to the Mercier, Wayne began some dis- 
jointed explanations to the three, finally begging them to 
wait till they got aboard, and he would start at the be- 
ginning. 

“ Yes,” said Jean Marat, “ thee other boys also want 
to hear.” 

When Wayne had been boosted to the deck, he was 


THE MERCIER COMES 


165 

again seized on, by numerous eager hands, and greeted 
with more excited questionings. Rufe already had things 
heating in the galley. Wayne stepped in to the darky 
and took him by his two arms. 

Rufe,” he said, Eve got good news for you.” The 
whites of Rufe’s eyes showed in the lantern-light. 
'' Julian’s alive.” 

A cheer went up from the boys. And Rufe, pulling 
Wayne down with him, squatted on the deck. 

“ Say dat ’ar agin,” he begged Wayne. 

Julian is alive and well.” 

“You see ’im?” said Rufe, eager for utmost verifi- 
cation. 

“ I was with him and talked with him last night,” said 
Wayne. 

Rufe jumped to his feet, rushed out of the galley, took 
a few strides forward and back on the deck; then he be- 
gan to hum a lively tune, and patting his thighs to the 
time, he danced — “ Slappity bang — swish — swish — 
swish, slappity bang slappity bang — swish — swish — 
swish, slappity bang ” went his feet. And directly, all 
the boys were clapping time. Till finally Rufe ended with 
a final bang of his foot and a high-toned “ Wow ! ” 

“Ah jes’ knowed dat li’le Julian was ’live! — Ah jes’ 
knowed it ! ” He was the happiest soul on board, and 
that’s not discounting the feelings of the others. 

Then, as Wayne refreshed himself with the substantial 
things the others were pushing to him on the table, he 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


1 66 

told the whole story of the adventures of himself and 
Robert since leaving the Mercier. 

Well, it’s plain enough,” declared Ray, that Goya 
had a hunch you fellows would try to signal some ship or 
other.” 

It’s a wonder,” said Phil, he didn’t chain up Julian 
Lamartine.” 

‘‘ He knew very well Julian wouldn’t leave Loyo,” re- 
turned Wayne. 

It’s a wonder they don’t hunt for the treasure in that 
cave,” observed Joe. 

They probably have hunted all through it,” said 
Wayne. ** Pedro would hardly hide it there, for Julian 
says all the others knew about the cave. Some of them 
must have discovered the blazes on the trees where Slicky 
saw them digging, and now they think it might have been 
buried around about there.” 

Jean Marat had been down in the hold of the Mercier, 
and satisfied himself that the schooner was none the worse 
for her bump. He had also sounded the reef, and found 
that the M ercier was lying on the smooth sand, more than 
half her length hanging over within the lagoon. The tide 
was on the flow, and he calculated that the height would 
not be reached for three or four hours. 

I theenk,” he said, “ w’en the tide ees high, we can 
ged her inside. So now we mus’ make ready.” 

The boys jumped at his call. A hawser was made fast 


THE MERCIER COMES 167 

to the anchor, which was taken in one of the boats to a 
position a hundred feet inshore and cast overboard. 
Then it was but to wait till the tide had eased the schooner 
enough to allow of wearing her the balance of the way 
over the reef. 

It was then Wayne became thoughtful of the general 
situation, and came forward with the proposal to attempt 
the rescue of Robert, Julian, and Loyo at once. 

When Goya finds out the Mercier is nere,” he said, 

he’ll be sure to set a stronger watch.” 

Yes,” said Captain Marat, “ thad is true. We have 
to do queeck w’at we do. Two can stay weeth Rufe, an’ 
try ged thee schooner over w’en the tide ees sufficien’ 
high.” 

Wayne told in detail the situation in the cave. And 
then it was arranged that all were to crawl into the cave 
by the small inlet on the hillside; and Jean Marat, if need 
be, would hold the sentinel at the point of his rifle, while 
Wayne, with tools, would free Robert of the chain, and 
the others bear out the helpless Loyo. 

No time was lost, and soon all but Bert, Joe and Rufe 
were in one of the boats, moving to shore. The boat was 
pulled high on the beach, and the cavalcade set off south- 
ward, led by Wayne. 

It was past midnight, and moonlight, when they neared 
the place; and Wayne crept forward in the brush alone, 
to reconnoiter. He had got to the very bush that hid that 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


1 68 

hole in the hillside, when suddenly a voice sounded close 
by, and another struck up in reply. He turned and scur- 
ried back to his comrades. 

Something’s up,” he said. They’ve set two guards 
at the hole. I guess they’ve already discovered Slicky in 
my place.” 

So there was nothing to do but give up the attempt for 
the time, and return to the Mercier. They arrived on 
board, all a little dashed in spirit over this check to their 
hopes. But Rufe cheered them up a bit. 

Aw, dey’s gwine be some more chaince,” he said. 
“ You-all who kin work de telegraph widout no telegraph 
poles, ain’t gwine ter be beat by no sech white trash as 
dem ’ar Dagoes, I knows.” 


CHAPTER XIX 


A RECRUIT 

I T was two o’clock; the moon lighted the deck; and 
four pairs of hands at the windlass set a strain on the 
hawser attached to the Mercier^s anchor. Ray sang out: 

Ho ! — Heave ! — Ho ! ” At each tug the schooner 
gave a little ; and even before the tide had attained its full, 
the Mercier floated within the lagoon. 

When the anchor had been made fast to its cable again, 
all but Joe, who took the watch, lay down for a few hours’ 
rest. Wayne found it impossible to compose his mind, 
for he felt it devolved on him to concoct some plan for 
the rescue of those in the cave; since he only was familiar 
with the lay of the land. Finally, he gave up all hope of 
sleep, and he induced Joe to turn in and allow him to keep 
the watch. 

Wayne paced the forward deck impatiently, for the 
harder he tried to think, the more confused his mind be- 
came. His thoughts persisted in flying off to the distress- 
ing details of the present situation of all those of the is- 
land, balking all his efforts to drive them forward to con- 
sideration of future effort to better the condition of his 
friends. The fact was that he was tired in mind and 
body. At last his thoughts took a turn towards home, 
169 


170 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


and there arose pictures of some of the doings of himself 
and his comrades in the old familiar region of the upper 
Mississippi; and he smiled over certain of the ludicrous 
things Ray had said and done. And so he forgot his 
immediate surroundings for a little spell; even forgot 
that he stood on the deck of the Mercier; and his eyes 
looked into space; his impatient pacing came to an end. 
Thus for a time his mind found rest in different — peace- 
ful — activity. 

When he awoke to his surroundings again, he felt re- 
freshed, and almost unbidden, a plan took form in his 
mind, and the details unfolded quietly and clearly, and 
without any of the pain of effort. 

Day came,* and the sun was sending hot rays to the 
Mercier' s decks, when the pallets were abandoned. The 
westerly breeze was little felt on the schooner, lying as she 
did in the lee of the hills of the island. 

At breakfast, Wayne began to unfold his project to his 
comrades, one that got the boys’ enthusiasm. 

Say, Captain,” spoke Ray, he makes my head feel 
as full of things as a bass drum. Believe me, he’d find a 
way to dance all round a sleeping weasel.” 

Jean Marat was suggesting certain details of prepara- 
tion for getting Wayne’s project into action, when Rufe 
called out : Dey’s a cornin’, boys 1 Dar dey is ! — in 

dem pa’ms yondah.” 

All hurried to the rail, and binoculars were got out and 
leveled toward the shore. 


A RECRUIT 


171 

Looks like pretty near an army of them,” said Phil. 

And half of them have got guns,” added Bert, “ and 
they’re coming right this way.” 

“ I’d like to know who invited them,” said Ray. ‘‘ I 
hope they aren’t going to swim out here — I’d hate aw- 
fully to spoil a frying-pan on one of their heads.” 

The crew on shore came to a stand under a group of 
palms at the edge of the wood. Wayne easily made out 
Lafitte Goya, gesticulating in talk with one of the men. 

There’s one of them coming down to the beach with 
a white flag,” scaid Ray. Going to wig-wag us, I 
guess.” 

‘‘ That’s Norris, the Englishman,” said Wayne. 

The Englishman reached the edge of the lagoon. 

“ Boat, ahoy ! ” he called. 

'' All righ’,” called back Captain Marat. '' W’at you 
want? ” 

The man put his hands to his mouth and shouted his 
message. 

Captain Goya says — he will give you the prisoners, 
if you will give him directions for the treasure.” 

Wayne, Ray, and Marat conferred as to what sort of 
answer they should make. 

If,” said Wayne, '' we tell them we have no directions, 
except what they’ve already got in the letters they took 
from us, or give them any other definite answer, they 
might decide to do something very unpleasant.” 

Jus’ so,” agreed Marat, “ thad w’at I theenk. You, 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


172 

Ray, you tell heem we theenk aboud eet, an’ led heem 
know.” 

Invite Norris to join us,” added Wayne. 

“ Ahoy! ” called Ray to Norris, on the beach. Tell 
Goya that we’ll think about it, and let him know later.” 
Then — ‘'Norris I” he added. “We want you to join 
us!” 

A moment’s hesitation, and the Englishman nodded, 
and otherwise gave as friendly a response in pantomime, 
as he dared, under the eyes behind him ; and he turned and 
strode back to the others among the trees. 

“ He’ll come,” declared Wayne. “ He’ll just wait for 
a good chance.” 

“ Yes,” said Ray. “ He might hurt the feelings of 
those deah chaps, if he was to ditch them right now.” 

“ Yaw, I guess,” observed Phil, “ they might hurt his 
feelings some, if they was to turn loose on him with their 
guns.” 

It could be seen that Lafitte Goya heard Norris’s re- 
port ; and then, with one look toward the Mercier, he mo- 
tioned all forward, and the Spaniards set off southward 
again. 

“And now,” observed Ray, “Wayne’ll be saying — 
while they suppose we’re ‘ thinking about it,’ it’s time to 
get busy.” 

Under Captain Marat’s direction, Joe, Phil, and Char- 
lie set to work on a sailing-rig for one of the boats; Ray, 
Leslie, and Bert he put to work on a hat-full of shot-gun 


A RECRUIT 


173 


shells, punching out the caps, and loading them with 
powder. Marat, himself, got busy with rope-strands, 
oil, and the like, improvising fuses, as if for mining opera- 
tions. Wayne stretched himself in the shade of the 
house, for the sleep he so much needed. 

With all the activity on board, the day slipped by 
quickly; and dusk was just beginning to fall, when the 
boys were startled by the cracking of gun-shots, a mile 
down the shore. Marat dove into the cabin for his rifle, 
and in a few minutes, the Mercier's crew made out a form, 
running and dodging among the shore palms. Then they 
saw a man burst from cover opposite the schooner, mak- 
ing toward the water. Now some shots rang out from 
the woods, and as the figure swam toward the schooner, 
more bullets pattered the water of the lagoon. 

Then Marat set his rifle to his shoulder, and two shots, 
for some reason or other, silenced the shore battery. 

Wayne and Ray climbed over the rail into one of the 
boats, and, as that head came close, they reached over to 
help the man in. 

"‘Are you hurt, Norris?” said Wayne. The man 
rolled in over the edge. 

“ Not a scratch,” returned the puffing Norris. 
“ Goya’s the only crack shot in the bunch, and I got his 
rifle. It’s in the lagoon.” 

“ You are ver’ welcome, Meestaire Norris,” said Jean 
Marat, when the dripping Englishman set his foot on 
deck. 


1/4 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


'' Thank you, Captain,’’ returned Norris. I’m 
mighty glad to get quit of that crew. I was a fool ever 
to believe that Goya cuss.” 

“ How did you make your get-away ? ” said Ray. 

Well, you see,” returned Norris, “ Goya kept a sharp 
eye on me all day. I guess he smelt a rat when you called 
out your invite. And this evening he ordered me ahead 
of him, and we marched up to the mouth of the cave. 
And there he stopped to talk with the two Dagoes he had 
there for guards. I squatted on the ground, and I’d just 
been saying to myself — ‘ Here now. Grant Norris, that 
pirate’s got something cooking for you — now or never.’ 
I quietly slashed the strings to my shoes, and slipped them 
off without his noticing. And — he stood with the butt 
of his fancy rifle on the ground, and his hand on the 
muzzle — I took a deep breath, reached over and hooked 
on to the gun, and cut for it. 

I paddled round the hill, and they after me, yelling. 
I dodged among the trees, they peppering away now and 
then. I guess Goya had grabbed one of the guards’ rifles. 
But, though he’s a crack with his own gun, he isn’t used 
to those Mausers the men have. I dropped his rifle in 
the water close to the shore — it’s just opposite that 
bunch of palms, and I’m going after it.” 

And with that he rose from his chair. 

The boys advised against the risk ; but he laughed. 

Oh, I’ve been under fire before,” he said, ‘‘ and I 


A RECRUIT 


175 

guess they won^t waste any more ammunition. Besides, 
salt water’s not good for fine iron like that.” 

He insisted On going alone in the boat. Marat held his 
rifle ready in case of a shot from shore. But the hunters 
had evidently gone, for there was nothing heard of them. 

It had grown quite dark when Norris came back; and 
he exhibited a handsome arm, taking the same ammuni- 
tion as Marat’s rifle. 

“ Say,” said Norris, gloating over the rifle, ‘‘ that 
Dago’s burning the air with the things he’s promising to 
do to me when he gets the windward of me again.” 

Grant Norris proved a hearty fellow, and it was won- 
defful with what ease he made himself at home amongst 
the Mercier's crew. Wayne’s plan for attempting the 
rescue of those in the cave was recounted to him, and he 
gave it strong approval. 

And now, Captain,” he said, saluting, consider me, 
if you will, signed on your ship — under your orders. 
But if you’ll allow the suggestion, send me in the boat on 
that trip around. I pull a strong oar — if the wind fails, 
and I don’t know the inside of the cave; and there will 
likely be more to do down there when the thing goes off.” 

And he had his way. And when, at ten o’clock, the 
sail was put into the boat, with a pair of gunny-sacks, 
holding quilts (Norris’s suggestion), and the fuse and 
shot shells, he pushed off in the company of Ray and 
Leslie. 


CHAPTER XX 


BATTLES, SHAM AND REAL 

N orris and Ray took the oars, and sent the boat 
skimming northward over the dark lagoon, till they 
turned the point and set her nose into the teeth of the 
westerly breeze. Now came two miles of a hard pull, 
and they rounded the northeast corner of the island and 
pointed southwest, down the windward shore. Here they 
set up their sail, and directly were moving down within 
the line of coral reefs under a steady breeze. Norris held 
the steering-oar. 

This beats rowing. Eh, boys ? ’’ said he. 

“ You bet,’’ agreed Ray. “ Rowing’s a lot of sport till 
you know there’s a sail in the boat. Then it’s punky- 
punk-punk. Every stroke I took with that sail rubbing 
against me hurt like a toothache — a new tooth joining 
the procession each time.” 

** Well, this is the cure,” laughed Norris. 

“Yes — for toothache,” said Ray. “But what kind 
of a picnic is this going to turn out that Wayne’s sent 
us on? ” 

“ Oh, I’m thinking it’ll be some sport — But I’d give 
something to see those Dago friends of mine humping 
176 


BATTLES, SHAM AND REAL 


177 

around to see what the celebration is. I almost wish I 
was going to be still amongst ’em when this thing goes 
off.” 

I suppose we’ll have them sniping at us with their 
Mausers,” suggested Leslie. 

Maybe,” said Norris. But I’m thinking it’ll be at 
the most of 500 hundred yards by that time. I’ve got 
my sights set for that anyway. I’d just like to plunk 
Goya one with his own rifle — mine now. He’s been 
pretty nasty to me lately — kind of suspicious since your 
two friends came. And I reckon he’s had good reason; 
I’ve wanted to cut that company ever since I came to this 
island and saw just how things stood.” 

“ That Goya must be a smooth kind of fellow,” ob- 
served Ray. 

“ Yes, he is,” returned Norris. He can play the 
goody-goody when he wants to. But I can’t get over the 
way he fooled me, and that any one would size me up for 
the kind of chap he took me for.” 

He picked you for an easy mark,” said Ray. 

'' Yes,” said Norris. He figured that once he got 
me with him I’d stand for anything he did.” 

Looks like the moon’s shining on the top of those 
hills,” said Leslie. 

'' Yes, the moon’s up,” said Norris. And here, I 
guess is where we make a landing and wait for the time 
to begin our part of the programme.” 

Norris set the bow of the boat into the mouth of a 


178 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


small stream ; down came the sail, and soon the three were 
dragging the boat up on shore, close to the spot where 
Robert had put the wireless in hiding just six nights ago. 

“ Well,” said Norris, as he squatted on the ground, 

what does your watch say now ? ” 

Give me a light, Leslie,” said Ray. A flash, and he 
reported the time twenty-five after twelve. 

We’ve an hour and a half,” said Norris. ** Well, 
nothing like being ahead with your appointments.” 

How close are we? ” asked Leslie. 

''We’re within half a mile of the schooner — around 
the point. But it isn’t so far across to the houses.” 

For a spell, the three adventurers sat in their sheltered 
nook, Norris, for entertainment, giving Ray and Leslie 
short accounts of some of his adventures in the Spanish- 
American countries. And it quickly became evident to 
the boys that their new comrade was at heart, as in his 
experiences, a soldier of fortune; and action and danger 
were the things that kept him going. 

When Ray’s watch told that one o’clock had passed, 
Norris got on his feet. 

" Now, boys,” he said, " I’ll just slip over and see how 
the land lies. I’ll be back in fifteen minutes.” 

" Well, don’t pick a scrap with your friends,” cautioned 
Ray. " Remember you’ve got two little jay-birds under 
your wing.” 

" Never fear,” laughed Norris. " And I’ll leave 
Goya’s pop-gun with you for company.” 


BATTLES, SHAM AND REAL 


179 


And he was off through the brush. 

Lm glad we’ve got that fellow with us,” said Leslie. 

He almost makes me feel brave.” 

Well, and I wouldn’t like to have him against us,” 
returned Ray. 

” From what he said, he’d never have been with those 
others if he’d known what they are,” said Leslie. 

“ He must have had a tough time while he was with 
them finding out,” said Ray; ‘^though he don’t squeal 
much about it.” 

Soon the boys heard Norris breaking through the 
bushes on his return. 

‘‘ Well,” said he, “ it’s as dead as a mummy over there. 
And we may as well move down to the point.” 

So the boat was pushed off, and in fifteen minutes more 
the point was made. 

We’d better get right over in the shadow of the 
schooner,” said Norris. “ It can’t be more than fifteen 
minutes more to wait.” 

The point was turned, and the schooner Miguel opened 
to view, riding quietly at her anchor, in the moonlight, 
200 yards away. It required but a few minutes to gain 
her port side and make the boat’s painter fast to the 
shrouds. 

Now,” began Norris, this setting the fireworks is 
your stunt, and I’ll slip over to the starboard and keep an 
eye out.” 

He crawled aboard the Miguel and got himself to his 


i8o 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


station. Then Ray went over the rail, and Leslie handed 
up the bag of shot shells, and a bomb Jean Marat had im- 
provised of a brass lamp-bowl. Leslie followed. Work- 
ing in the increasing moonlight, Ray laid out the shot 
shells — two dozen — already strung on the fuse, and 
the bomb; and with small nails and a hammer, with the 
least noise, he tacked them to the deck. The shells were 
set on the fuse in irregular groups, the bomb led the pro- 
cession. 

Finally, Ray got out his watch. Some minutes passed. 
Then, in a whisper, All’s ready,” said he. “If you 
fellows will get in and hold the boat by, I’ll touch her 
off.” 

Leslie and Norris scrambled down, unloosed the 
painter; and, each at a pair of oars, they set the stern 
against the Miguel, and waited for Ray. 

Rav struck his match and put it to the tail of fuse; 
and waiting only to see that it was well alight, he hurried 
over the side to the boat’s stern thwart. And in went the 
four oars, and the boat sped toward the smaller isle to the 
south. 

“ Captain Marat,” spoke Ray, “ said he thought the 
fuse would take ten or fifteen minutes, but wasn’t sure.” 

“ Well, we’ll play it’ll only take two,” said Norris, put- 
ting muscle into his strokes. “ When we get over close 
to the little island, we’ll have the wind a little, and we can 
stick up the sail.” 

Though the moor .vas in its last quarter, it lay a sheen 


BATTLES, SHAM AND REAL 


i8i 


over the sound, the white beach, the hills, and tree tops. 
The graceful palms seemed sentient beings, drowsily mov- 
ing their fans under the night breeze. There was no 
other moving thing on the land. The houses seemed de- 
serted, and the schooner a thing abandoned — a queer, un- 
earthly sputtering of sparks travelling slowly along its 
deck. 

The boat continued its hurried course across the sound, 
its occupants tense with suspense. Ray was on the point 
of giving voice to his fear lest the fuse had gone out, 
when — BOOM ! ’’ The boat shook. The blast woke 
the island — Birds flew aloft, screaming. Then, in a few 
moments — “ Bang ! Bang ! — Bang ! Bang ! Bang ! — 
Bang ! — Bang ! Bang ! — Bang ! Bang ! Bang ! Bang ! ” 
Then came a two minute interval, and again — “Bang! 
Bang! Bang! — Bang! — Bang! Bang! Bang! — Bang! 
Bang ! Bang ! Bang ! ” 

The rowers sat rigid — spell-bound. 

“Glorious!” said Norris, when the end came. 
“ That’ll fetch them — every one of the bunch.” 

Then they were able to make out figures in the moon- 
light, scurrying among the palms on the shore. 

“ Let’s put ginger into the oars,” said Norris, setting 
the example. 

Ray took the oars from Leslie now, and they pointed 
the bqw to the east. 

The moon sent down slanting beams through the palms 
on the excited, outcrying mob, taking increment, from 


i 82 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


moment to moment, of figures hurrying down from the 
hills. A startled word from one, at the last, directed all 
eyes across the sound. Then, with renewed shouting, 
they went scampering back toward the bunk-house. 

Soon Norris declared for the sail. Not much wind 
in here,” he said, but it’ll beat rowing anyway.” 

The sail had been pulling but a few minutes, when a 
rifle-shot rang out over the sound. 

‘‘ Well, they’ve sighted us,” said Norris. 

He threw one of the quilt-stuffed bags to the stern, the 
other to the middle of the boat. ‘‘ Get behind them,” he 
told the boys. Now, Ray, you hold the steering oar, 
and keep your head down — I’ll direct you. And, Leslie, 
you hang on to the sheet.” 

Several shots rang out from the shore. Then Norris 
took up the rifle in the bow. He didn’t see fit as yet to 
reply, but watched the shore sharply. In a little, they 
were opposite the long house. 

‘‘ Just what I suspected,” said Norris. “ They’re put- 
ting out a boat.” And his manner of speech betrayed his 
relish in the prospect. 

Keep down, boys. And ease a little on your helm, 
Ray. Trim your sheet a little, Leslie.” 

The Spaniards’ boat was now coming rapidly forward, 
and very soon a couple of shots burst over the water. 
Now Norris took aim and fired. 

See how you like your own lead,” said he, and 
cracked two more balls at the enemy. 


BATTLES, SHAM AND REAL 183 

** Ah, theyVe quit rowing,” said Norris. Don’t feel 
quite so sure of their game, I guess.” 

Two more shots came from the Spaniards. And Nor- 
ris sent back three. 

Then — ‘‘ They’ve turned tail ! ” broke out Norris. 
“ And they’re getting back a little faster than they came.” 
He sent them a parting ball. That pill’s for a tonic,” 
he added. 

The ardent boys were already up from their cover; 
and in ten minutes, during which the enemy had made 
shore and taken to cover, the boat made through the 
breakers on the reef, and turned up the east side of the 
island, heading toward the Mercier. 

** Golly ! ” said Ray. I hope the other fellows have 
the same luck.” 


CHAPTER XXI 


THE RESCUE 

W HEN, that night in the dimness of the cave, 
Robert saw the last of Wayne, going round the 
turn of the passage, it was more of comfort than regret 
he felt ; his comrade was to get a taste of fresh air, and a 
chance to stretch his limbs. And then, with his un- 
bounded faith in Wayne’s capabilities, he had a hope he 
would succeed in getting the wireless to working again; 
and so make more certain the leading the Mercier to the 
islands. 

He waited till he was sure Wayne was safely out of 
the cave; and then he turned with some curiosity to the 
indistinctly shown figures opposite, all undisturbed in their 
sleep. And here he found fresh leaven for satisfaction : 
Julian and Loyo, after all living — the enterprise was 
yet destined to succeed. For he hadn’t the least doubt — 
such is the way of youth — that Julian would be rescued, 
and his treasure finally recovered. And there was 
Wayne to find ways; for hadn’t he memories of former 
occasions, when Wayne had shown his superiority to 
great embarrassments ? 

Finally, giving in to fatigue, he crawled into the 
blankets, out of the underground chill, and was soon 
asleep. 


184 


THE RESCUE 


185 

When Robert awoke, and looked about him in the ob- 
scurity of the cavern, his eyes met those of a lad, seated 
on the pallet opposite, as if waiting for him. He knew 
him for Julian, of course. And Julian addressed Robert 
as Wayne, and informed him that breakfast had been 
brought, a little while ago. 

But,” said Julian, “ I didn’t want to wake you, be- 
cause I know how poor a sleeper you are, and now you 
seemed to be sleeping so soundly.” 

Robert then got himself a little more in the lantern- 
light, but put his finger on his mouth to check the startled 
word that was on Julian’s lips. And so, without a word 
spoken, and Julian continuing to regard his exchanged 
companion with curious eyes, they ate of the breakfast. 
Loyo took what Julian gave him, sitting propped up a 
bit, but otherwise showed no interest in what was going 
on about him. 

Julian, realizing that Robert wished to conceal from 
the Spaniards the fact of the substitution, and readily 
perceiving that Robert’s voice if heard by the Spaniards 
was likely to betray him, did not press conversation, 
though he would have liked an explanation. 

When, after a time, a step was heard in the passage, 
Robert fell back as far as possible into the obscurity 
of his nook. Gomez appeared, and after pushing on to a 
shelf in the box such food as remained, he took up the 
basket and went away again. 

Then, reasonably secure that Gomez would be out of 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


1 86 

earshot for some time, Robert moved closer to Julian, 
who in turn edged up ; and in guarded words, there came 
some explanation. And Robert managed to convey hope 
of an early bettering of the situation. 

It is awfully good of you all,” said Julian. 

‘‘ Nothing like that,” returned Robert. Life wasn’t 
half so much fun till we got to doing a little to help 
other folks. Wayne told me about Loyo; I hope be gets 
well soon.” 

It’s his head, poor Loyo,” said Julian. Gomez hit 
him and made a break in his skull. And now he don’t 
seem to remember things.” 

And so the day passed, the time marked for the prison- 
ers only by the arrival of the food-hamper, which was 
brought by Gomez — chief jailer. And it was not till 
the second morning that the substitution was discovered. 
Gomez saw fit to examine the fetter on Robert’s ankle, 
and noted the half open condition of the end link. He 
seized up the lantern and brought it to Robert’s face. 
He was much taken aback at his discoveries ; and he called 
the sentinel, and with excited words sent him off scamper- 
ing. Soon Lafitte Goya appeared on the scene. Goya 
jerked Robert round to view. 

''Where the other one?” he demanded. 

For answer, Robert waved his hand — by intent down 
the passage. 

Goya called the sentinel and gave him a berating, in 
words that ’Robert could not understand. Goya then put 


THE RESCUE 


187 

hammer to the partly open link; and a half hour later, 
one of the men appeared with a second and heavier chain, 
which was wrought securely to Robert’s other ankle. 

Lafitte Goya was properly upset, and he raged. To be 
so bested by a pair of mere boys! He glared into 
Robert’s face, and made threats in the Spanish. 

When the Spaniards were at last all gone, and it be- 
came quiet in the cave again, Julian expressed great sor- 
row over this fresh setback for Robert. 

Oh, pshaw 1 ” said Robert. “ They had to find out 
some time; and they can’t get Wayne now; and when the 
— something — comes, he’ll figure out some way. I’m 
not fearing.” 

Robert’s assurance greatly cheered Julian. And then, 
later in the day, it became evident to the two that some- 
thing unusual was toward. For it showed in the de- 
meanor of Gomez, who once came in, and the excited 
talk between two of the men, who now stood guard. 
Julian strained his ears for an intelligent word. 

'' I tell you what,” said Robert. “I’ll bet what I ex- 
pected has come ! ” 

“ I could not understand all they said,” offered Julian, 
“ but they talked about a schooner coming in over the 
reef, and about some one they called to, who said — * will 
think about it.’ One said — ‘ Yes, they sure know how to 
find it ; and we must keep the prisoners safe till they tell.’ ” 

“ That’s it ! ” declared Robert. “ I’ll bet it’s our fel- 
lows. It can’t be any one else.” 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


■I 88 

This fresh hope greatly buoyed the two. And Robert 
held vigil, on edge with expectation, long after Julian had 
fallen into sleep. Finally Robert, too, dropped off. 

If in his sleep he had been endowed with a clairvoyance, 
claimed by some, he might have seen Ray and Leslie, with 
their new comrade, Norris, making around the island to- 
ward the Miguel, lying tranquilly at anchor in the sound. 
And he might have seen a procession moving down the 
eastern shore of the island ; first Wayne, then Jean Marat, 
Joe, Phil, Charlie, Bert; Marat carrying his rifle; Joe and 
Phil, each a staff. He might have seen them all crouch- 
ing, waiting in the brush, a little way from the small hole 
of the cave, and Wayne crawling forward, near to where 
the two sentinels sat in talk. 

But Robert would not have seen more, nor heard the 
boom, and the rattle of shots, as of a battle, coming from 
near a mile to the south; which sounds so startled the 
guards at either exit of the cave, and sent them scurrying 
thitherward. For both he and Julian were suddenly 
awakened by voices of Spaniards calling, down the pas- 
sage, and quickly gone. And then, after a short inter- 
val, there burst in upon them from the other way their 
friends from the Mercier. 

“Hello! Robert — Julian,’^ said Wayne. “We’re 
after you.” 

Marat hurried down the passage a way, his rifle at 
ready. Joe, Phil, and Charlie seized up a blanket, and 
with the two staffs made a litter, on to which they lifted 


THE RESCUE 189 

Loyo, and nurried away, followed by Julian. Wayne 
produced a file and began on Robert’s shackles. 

Joe and Phil, with the help of Charlie and Julian, got 
Loyo out by the hole, where Bert stood watch. And so, 
change about, they bore the big darkey to the north with 
all the speed of which they were capable. 

But the others, in the cave, fared not so well. Wayne 
was making slow headway with the file ; and Marat sud- 
denly appeared from down the passage. 

They come ! ” he said. They are almos’ here.” 
Give me the file, Wayne,” said Robert, and git! ” 
All right,” said Wayne. I’ll come back in a little 
if I can. When they see Julian gone, they may all take 
after them.” 

And so Wayne and Jean Marat hurried up the passage, 
and Wayne spoke as they went. 

“ Captain Marat,” he said. I’m going to slip in a 
side passage, and when they’ve gone by and out. I’ll go 
back and help Slicky. If you’ll hide outside — just north 
of the hole. I’ll throw a rock or something toward you 
when Slicky and I get to the opening. Then if you’ll 
fool the guards away from the hole, in case they get 
back there, we can slip out.” 

“ Ver’ good,” returned Marat. 

And he hurried out, as Wayne, flashing his lamp, found 
his way into the unused passage leading north. 

Robert shoved the file under his blankets, and in a 
pair of moments a half dozen of the Spaniards, armed 


190 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


with rifles, hurried in. They took a look round, missed 
Julian and Loyo, and set up an excited jabbering in the 
Spanish. Then came a hasty examination of Robert’s 
fetters ; and one hastened back down the passage — doubt- 
less to inform Goya — while the five rushed up the way 
Wayne and the others had gone. 

Wayne heard them go by him. Another moment, and 
he turned back toward Robert, whom he found already fil- 
ing away at a chain, which soon parted. Wayne then 
took the file, and in another minute the other chain fell 
away. 

Arrived at the opening, Wayne picked up a missile bit, 
and reaching out, pitched it to the north. Then the boys 
heard a thrown object go crashing through the brush, 
down the hill, sent by Jean Marat. Two forms of guards 
jumped up, just below, and darted off; either to investi- 
gate, or through fear of an attack. 

The boys then scrambled out, and joined Marat, and 
the three ran northward. 

This way,” said Wayne. And he led them over the 
ridge, between the hill-tops, and down the west side. 

They hastened on without a word, for a mile. Then 
came a stop for rest. 

‘'Ah, eet went ver’ fine!” said Jean Marat. “You 
fool them ver’ complete.” 

“ And those shells went off great,” said Wayne. 
“ Sounded like a regular battle. I told them,” added he, 
by way of explanation to Robert, “ that if we got sepa- 


THE RESCUE 


191 

rated, they were to take Julian and Loyo on board, and 
then wait for signals from the oak.” 

'‘The hollow, sure!” said Robert. "Those fellows 
could never find us in there.” 

The three took up the march again to the north, soon 
went back over the ridge, and passed round the northeast 
spur of hills, and arrived at the hollow tree. One after 
the other, they crawled under the Spanish bayonet plant, 
Robert, Marat, and Wayne ; and ascended, within, by the 
rope ladder. 

" Thad is ver’ ingeni/^ pronounced Marat, admiring 
the retreat, as he settled himself on a limb. 

Through the branches the three could see the Mercier, 
lying at anchor in the lagoon. A light shone on board. 
Wayne opened the suit-case, which was found still hang- 
ing within the oak, and got out a pair of binoculars. 
These he leveled on the schooner. 

" There’s more than Rufe there,” he said. " They got 
on board all right.” 

" I wonder,” queried Marat, " eef the other ones have 
come back ? ” 

" Ray, Leslie, and Norris,” said Wayne, still using the 
glasses. " I can’t make out if they’re there.” 

"Norris?” questioned Robert. 

" Yes, Slicky,” said Wayne, " Norris is with us.” 

And so Robert, who had not as yet got the story of the 
night’s enterprise, now listened to Wayne’s account of 
what had taken place since they two parted. 


192 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


The narrative was not without interruption. For soon, 
voices broke from down in the woods, to the south, and 
several figures of Spaniards came into a patch of moon- 
light, moving directly toward the oak. Our three scram- 
bled into the hole, like squirrels, Wayne’s head out and 
peeking through the screen of Spanish moss. Then the 
men, all armed, as Wayne could see, passed the tree and 
went round the northeast spur of the ridge. 

‘‘ They’ve gone round the hill,” said Wayne, speaking 
down to his companions in the hollow. I guess they’ve 
found out you’re gone, Slicky, and are after us.” 

“ They’ll have a sweet time finding us,” said Robert. 

Ah, they never can suspec’ thees place,” observed 
Marat. 

Here they come back;” reported Wayne. And he 
watched the men as they came straggling by in the moon- 
lit space, and disappear into the shadows of the forest 
to the south. Well, they’ve gone,” he added then. 

I guess they theenk we have gone on board the Mer- 
cier” observed Marat; and he followed Robert out into 
the branches of the great oak again. 

Wayne resumed his explanations to Robert, as he en- 
deavored, by frequent flashes of his electric lamp, to at- 
tract those on the Mercier. After a time there came 
from the schooner an answering signal. 

They’ve seen us! ” said Wayne. 

And then, in the code, he flashed the following : 


THE RESCUE 


193 

Enemy gone south. Take boat around N E point, but 
hold off till you see our light on shore. W. 

‘‘ O K,’’ came back the answer from the Mercier. 

Very soon the three in the branches saw a boat put off 
from the schooner and make northward. 

Too bad it ees moonlight,'’ said Marat. 

‘‘ Yes,” added Robert. I hope those Spaniards don’t 
see them.” 

But the Spaniards evidently had seen them, for again 
six armed men appeared, slipping along by, in the shelter 
of the shore palms, below, as if they meant to intercept the 
boat when it should touch shore. 

They saw the Mercier signalling,” said Wayne. ‘‘ I 
didn’t wait long enough.” 

“ What’ll we do now ? ” said Robert. 

We’ll have to swim for it, as Norris did,” said 
Wayne. 

‘‘And what about the boat?” said Robert. “We 
can’t warn them, for those men’ll see our light.” 

“ The boat will hold off till they see our light on shore,” 
said Wayne. 

“ Ver’ good foresight!” observed Marat. “ Ver’ ex- 
cellen’ I ” 

The three were directly at the bottom of the oak’s 
hollow, stripping off their clothing. 

“ But I can not leave my rifle! ” said Marat, suddenly 
come to a stop. “ Ah! ” he quickly added, “ I see how 
I weel do.” 


194 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


He buckled his cartridge belt about his bare waist ; and, 
as the three crawled out beneath the bayonet-plant, leav- 
ing their clothing behind, he held in his grasp the rifle and 
his shirt. When they had darted across an open space 
into the shelter of the trees, Marat cast about till he found 
a dry branch of convenient size, and to this he bound the 
rifle, using the shirt’s arms for rope. 

They slipped into the quiet waters of the lagoon, only 
the three heads and the stick bearing the rifle, showing. 
All were good swimmers, and in a quarter hour they had 
made round the stern, and to the outer side of the Mer- 
cier, and crawling quietly into the small boat, in another 
pair of minutes they were on the deck of the schooner, 
and looking toward a chatting group, bunched at the bow, 
intent on the boat gone north. 

Call the boat back,” spoke out Wayne. 

“ Well, say! ” broke out Phil, as all turned to gape, as 
on an apparition. 

Call the boat back,” repeated Wayne. We swam 
for it. Goya’s crowd came back when the boat started, 
and went up to the point to cut it off.” 

‘‘ It’s a mighty good thing,” said Joe, that you sig- 
nalled to hold off; they wondered why they couldn’t go 
right in.” 

And he forthwith began to flash signals to the boat. 

In the meantime, the others pounced on Robert, and 
slapped his bare back. And it was — “ Hello ! Slicky. 


THE RESCUE 


195 


How do you like being in the chain-gang ? and “ We be- 
gan to think you’d quit us and joined that pirate,” and 

Well, we’re bully glad to see you again.” 

“ It seems like a good many years since I was on this 
deck,” said Robert. “ Give me something to wear, some- 
body.” 

The boat was soon back. Ray, Charlie, and Norris 
climbed aboard. 

Say, Wayne,” began Ray, when the situation had 
been explained, that was a mean trick — to fool us up 
there with the boat, and then come sneaking in the back 
door like that. But we’ll forgive you; for you gave us 
a bunch of sport with that scheme of yours — Boom! 
bangety-bang ! — beat any Fourth I ever had.” 

“ The bes’ of all,” said Jean Marat, “ eet work-ed 
perfec’ I ” 

That it did,” echoed Norris. 

Then, as day dawned, the happy Rufe sent up much 
black smoke out of the galley stack, sang, and made many 
festive sounds. There was much chatter: comparing 
notes, and dovetailing the various adventures of the vari- 
ous parties. And it might have been interesting, as Ray 
conjectured, to have had pirate Lafitte Goya’s story of 
his side of the doin’s.” 

And Ray had to tell Wayne about Rufe and his joy 
when Julian came aboard. 

‘‘ I never saw anybody so worked up,” said Ray. 


196 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


‘ Dar’s my li’le Julian ! — Dar’s my li’le Julian dat we- 
all be’n a-waitin’ fo’. Hallelujah! You ’members yo’ 
ole Rule? ’ and he took him up on his knee, the tears run- 
ning out his eyes; and he sang him an old darky song. 
Listen — he’s singing it now.” 


CHAPTER XXII 


HOW GRANT NORRIS JOINED THE PIRATE 

I T was near noon when the July sun drove the first of 
the sleepers from his pallet. It was not long till the 
last of the boys arose to cool his sweat-dripping face in a 
basin of water. Rufe’s noon breakfast had no sooner 
been disposed of than each began to cast fugitive glances 
on the others, as if he would say — Well, what’s n ';xt? ” 
It was come time to take stock of the situation again. 
And there was yet some unexpressed curiosity bearing on 
Grant Norris’s past relations with Lafitte Goya and his 
crew. Norris himself was the one to break the ice on 
this point. 

“ If you fellows don’t mind,” he said, I’d like to ex- 
plain my connection with that crew down there,” nod- 
ding, as he spoke, in the direction of that hornets’ nest. 

He was encouraged to tell his story from the beginning. 
And directly, the boys were centering their eyes on the 
man with keen interest. 

With the inclination to thinning of his foretop, and 
some silver bristles in his two weeks’ growth of beard, 
he had the appearance of a man well up in the forties. 
But his nimbleness of action, and expression of face, and 
197 


198 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


his enthusiasms, were rather those of a youth. He was 
broad of shoulder, small of waist, and had the muscles of 
a smith. 

Even as a boy — his story made it plain — he had been 
always venturesome; and like many a British lad, his 
great dream was to be a sailor and have adventures. A 
grandfather, an old salt, had secretly encouraged his am- 
bition, which, as usual, was frowned on by his parents. 
Since his elder brother was to be prepared to enter his 
father’s business, Grant Norris was to be educated for one 
of the professions — medicine was his father’s final selec- 
tion. So Grant was put through his preliminary educa- 
tion ; and he even put up with near two years of medical 
study. 

But when it came round time for examinations,” said 
Norris, ‘‘ I made up my mind that feeling people’s wrists 
and looking at their tongues, would not do for me ; so I 
took French leave, and got a berth on a ship going round 
the Horn. Now, if my father had shown good sense, he 
would have let me have a taste of the sea, and get my 
belly-full; and then I would have been more willing to 
settle down to something at home. For I did get my 
belly full in a year. But then I was, I guess, too proud 
to go home and say so. I wrote home to my mother, and 
sister (who was two years older than myself), but I 
didn’t admit it even to them that I was satiated of the 
thing. 

Well, I finally got to knocking round in South Amer- 


HOW NORRIS JOINED THE PIRATE 199 

ica, and got mixed up, sometimes, in rather shady doings. 
But that was because I was deceived by others who pulled 
me in. My sister used to write me that I must always be 
on my guard against my companions, ' For,’ she said, 
'you know. Grant, you make friends too easily; and 
you’re altogether too trusting, and ready to take up the 
cudgel for any one who hands you a plausible story of 
wrongs he wants some help to right.’ You see, she recol- 
lected some of my scrapes in school. But she doesn’t 
know how near she hit the nail on the head, and how 
little good her warnings did. 

" I got mixed up once in the overthrowing of one of 
those republic governments, and the kidnapping of the 
President, and the looting of the treasury — or a part of 
it. A revolutionary general I fell in with hired me to 
write him some documents in English ; and he finally 
gave me a great story of the wrongs against the people 
by the government that he was going to overthrow. He 
offered me a high office, and something like a statue, 
finally, in the park in the capital, as one of the liberators 
of the people. 

" Well, it was his story, not the office or the statue — 
I can say — that got me; and hardly a handful of us 
carried it through. We caught the Illustrious President 
in his garden in the evening. And since a prominent of- 
ficial in the president’s cabinet was in the plot, there was 
no difficulty in getting at and carrying off a considerable 
mass of portable funds of the treasury. We made a 


200 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


twenty mile ride into the country, stopping a collec- 
tion of huts the General called his headquarters. The 
kidnapped President was shoved into one, and a guard 
set; and my General, myself (Lieutenant General), and 
the member of the President’s cabinet, made ourselves at 
home in another of the buildings. 

“ Now, I had been told that we should find the revo- 
lutionary army here; and we did. It consisted of not 
over twenty armed men. And it didn’t take me ten min- 
utes, in that room, to learn that the whole game was be- 
tween these two men, and they had had no other thought 
or purpose than to get their claws on the treasury gold, 
and to gain further money by way of a ransom for the 
person of the President. They were using the name 
‘ Revolution ’ as a guise. Those two had no sooner sat 
themselves down, the money-bags under the table, than 
they began to discuss the division of the money and the 
ransom to be demanded for the President. And it was 
then I began to experience my punishment. 

Well, we were soon called into the next room to a 
feast. And while the two — forgetting their food — 
were trying to figure out how big they dared make the 
amount of the ransom, I made excuse to go and look 
after the guard (for that was my job as Lieutenant Gen- 
eral) ; and, passing through the other room, I grabbed up 
the money-bags and wrapped them in my coat ; went to the 
prison shack ; sent the guard on an errand ; pulled out the 
Illustrious President; put him on a horse with half the 


HOW NORRIS JOINED THE PIRATE 201 


loot; I mounted another; and we slipped out of camp on 
the road back to the capital — I wondering at what mo- 
ment those two back there would have decided on the 
amount of that ransom. 

“ The Illustrious President got loquacious when he 
found out what we were up to ; was going to do all sorts 
of things for me, for saving his precious government’s 
precious chunk of treasury, and so on. I told him to save 
his breath to cool his tamales, and keep his horse going. 
When we got to his palace gates, I handed him the stuff 
I had, and told him tor hike for the house, and to avoid 
the unwholesome air of the garden after dark. And then 
he wanted me at least to accept a paltry five thousand. 
I told him Pd seen enough of his government’s money. 
And he wanted my name, for connection with public ex- 
pressions of gratitude. 

'“Not on your life,’ I told him. And I gave my horse 
the spur, and made for the harbor ; turned my horse loose, 
and paid a fisherman to row me out to an American gun- 
boat. With the explanation that I was wanting to keep 
out of the way of the revolutionary crowd, the officer on 
duty gave me a bed. In the morning, I was taken to the 
captain, who began to cross-question me as to my move- 
ments. But I gave him no enlightenment beyond that I 
was afraid of the revolutionaries. 

" He smiled rather much while he was quizzing me ; 
and finally handed me a new sheet. Beginning in big 
black head-lines, there was a very glowing account of the 


202 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


affair of the kidnapping, especially of the rescue of the 
President by a very brave and mysterious American, who 
had proudly rejected all reward, and had been indiffer- 
ent to all expressions of gratitude, and who had disap- 
peared. And more of the usual rot — they’re a demon- 
strative lot. 

“ The gun-boat captain grinned, when I looked up from 
the reading, and said he thought he could point his finger 
at that American. When I told him the subject didn’t 
interest me, that I was a Britisher afraid of the revolu- 
tionaries, he wanted to know what he could do for me. 
I told him that I wanted to be set ashore at the next port 
he touched. 

“ And so, finally, I found myself up in Central Amer- 
ica. And there’s where I ran across this Lafitte Goya, 
with the dog, Gomez, at his heels. I’d begun to forget 
the South American lesson, I guess ; and Goya had a new 
kind of story about a fellow who, for a good many years 
had been stealing pearls at some islands belonging to the 
Central American country, and how he (Lafitte Goya) 
held a secret commission from the government to confis- 
cate the treasure of pearls, and moneys from sales, of 
which he was to receive half for his service. He drew a 
very strong picture of the villainous character of the 
pearler, and how he had a giant black man, whose par- 
ticular business it was to maltreat the men who were so 
unfortunate as to fall into the clutches of the pearl thief 
and become his slaves. Gomez he pulled forward as evi- 


HOW NORRIS JOINED THE PIRATE 203 

dence, he having been one of those slaves — escaped; and 
Gomez had horrible tales to tell. 

“ Well, I joined him. And after a time, he pkked up 
three villainous Dagoes. And we sailed to the island in 
a whale-boat. There were half a dozen Dagoes and two 
Japs there, besides the big black fellow and young Julian. 
Lafitte Goya began to get busy with the men — got them 
on his side. But the two Japs didn’t line up with him; 
and finally they disappeared from sight. I had no guess 
how, till I saw two fresh graves under the palms. I told 
Goya then, that I wouldn’t stand for any such doings. 
He protested that he had nothing to do with it, and it was 
some fight in the night. 

‘Wou can guess, I began to smell how things were; 
and I got it from the black fellow, Loyo, who was sick, 
that old Pedro had got from the government owning the 
island a franchise to fish for pearls there ; and I wormed 
it out of one of the men that no sort of cruelties had been 
practiced on them. Altogether it didn’t take me long to 
find out that I had allowed myself to be taken in again, 
as in South America. I finally decided to lay low, and 
watch my chance to get out of the scrape. And when 
we met up with you fellows, I began to hope the chance 
might come. But Goya and Gomez had got suspicious of 
me, and they kept a sharp eye on me, and managed to 
keep me away from you chaps, till I finally made the 
break.’^ 


204 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


You sure had a lonesome time,’’ said Ray, with all 
that crew around you.” 

What do you think Goya will do now? ” said Wayne. 

“ I think he’ll keep on trying to locate the treasure,” 
said Norris. He thinks you know how to go about to 
find it, and that he’ll someway get the information out of 
you.” 

And again the question as to what was next to be done 
forced itself forward. And Julian Lamartine spoke up. 

‘‘ I don’t want you folks, who have shown so much 
kindness,” he said, to run more risks on my account. I 
shall be perfectly willing to give up the treasure and go 
away.” 

Id mus’ be like you boys make thee decision,” said 
Captain Marat. ‘‘ Thees is your enterprise. W’at you 
say, so id shall be.” 

And then, for formality’s sake, Wayne addressed his 
comrades, stating the present situation, which was already 
plain to all. And he had them vote on the question. 
They all voted the one way. None were disposed to sail 
away from the islands without an earnest effort to recover 
Julian’s treasure for him. 

And now, that’s settled, here are some things I have 
been thinking about,” said Wayne. The letter of old 
Pedro Lamartine to Loyo indicates that Loyo had some 
knowledge of how to find the treasure. So if Loyo 
should get well of his injury, we stand a good chance of 


HOW NORRIS JOINED THE PIRATE 205 

finding it; if he doesn’t, our chance is perhaps as poor 
as those fellows now looking for it.” 

Now listen to him, fellows,” broke in Ray. He 
isn’t through; he’s got something up his sleeve that he’s 
been keeping to himself — to spring on us. See if I’m 
not right.” 

You remember,” went on Wayne, who had long ago 
got used to Ray’s quirks, when Doctor Stewart used to 
give us our First Aid Work; and how he sometimes took 
us with him to the hospital? and once showed us a man 
who had had his head hurt; and he couldn’t understand 
words spoken to him, or that he saw written ? ” 

The boys remembered. 

And you remember. Doctor Stewart said it was called 
word deafness and word blindness,” said Wayne. 

“ It was a case of aphasia,” interposed Grant Norris. 
‘‘ I saw such cases in the hospitals at home.” 

''Yes, aphasia — that’s a word Doctor Stewart used, 
too,” said Leslie. 

" And you remember,” continued Wayne, " they oper- 
ated on the man — lifted out the skull bone that pressed 
on that certain part of his brain — and he got well; and 
understood words as good as ever ? ” 

" Yes,” said the boys. 

" Well,” said Wayne, " I guess you know what I’m 
driving at. That’s just what’s the trouble with Loyo.” 

" That case you just told about,” said Julian, " seems 
just like Loyo.” 


206 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Well, then,” went on Wayne, you see what we’ve 
got to try to do. And Mr. Norris, here, is just the one 
who’s had some experience.” 

Well, I’ll tell you, boys,” said Norris. ** I didn’t get 
much experience in surgery — especially of the head. 
But I’ve seen some of that kind. And I’ve just got a no- 
tion maybe we can do it — between us. We can try, 
anyway. Let’s take a look at the injury.” 

They went to where the big black fellow lay — a list- 
less look in his eyes — on a pallet in the shade of an awn- 
ing, close to the house. 

I think his rheumatism is all gone,” said Julian. ‘‘If 
his head should get well, he’d be all right again.” 

Loyo looked up to Julian, hardly seeming to notice the 
others. And he allowed him to take off the bandage from 
his head. 

“Yes,” said Norris. “You see it’s. back and above 
his ear. I can feel the break.” 

The attempt to relieve Loyo was set for the next morn- 
ing; and the remainder of the day was utilized by Norris 
and Wayne in preparation. 


CHAPTER XXIII 


THE OPERATION ON LOYO THE ENIGMA 

I N the cool of the early morning things were set going. 

First Aid packets were spread open; Rufe supplied 
an abundance of fresh-boiled water. Loyo was laid on 
the table, under the awning, and Grant Norris shaved the 
poor darkey’s whole scalp, while a sharp knife-blade and 
a bit of wire hook were boiling on the stove. Then Nor- 
ris and Wayne thoroughly cleansed their hands and arms 
to the elbow in hot water; Joe and Julian stood by to wait 
on the surgeons. 

Now, Wayne,” said Norris, taking up the knife- 
blade, I am going to open a little flap of scalp. Your 
touch is a little more delicate, and you feel about under 
the break for any bits of broken bone. Of course it’s 
important to get every scrap, or the thing might prove a 
failure. So here goes.” 

Loyo did not wince; and soon Norris lifted the flap; 
and Wayne began to grope with his little hook, cautiously. 
In a moment he brought out a fragment of bone, half the 
size of his thumb. Not another bit could be find. 

Well,” said Norris, finally, from the look of things, 
that should be all anyway. Pull up a little on that edge 


208 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


of bone — so. Now, Julian, that dish with the piece of 
rubber tubing.’’ 

In a few minutes, with the rubber drain-tube at an end 
of the slit, a few stitches in the scalp, and the bandage was 
applied; and Loyo was gently lifted back to his pallet. 

And then began anxious hours, and days, of waiting. 
Julian continued to be nurse in chief, and he had no lack 
of helpers; Rufe was most assiduous. All during those 
days of suspense there was no excursion from the 
schooner, except one, in the dark hours, to renew the sup- 
ply of fresh water from a shore spring, and to recover 
the things left in the hollow oak. The Mercier’s crew 
got an occasional glimpse of the Spaniards, down shore ; 
enough to keep the boys from any thought of a spell of 
relaxation on the island. They employed themselves in 
various ways to relieve the tedium; largely in sea-craft 
under the tutelage of Captain Marat and Grant Norris. 
They improved the condition of the rigging, scraped and 
oiled the masts, and made better sailing rigs for the small 
boats. There was some fishing, not too close to shore; 
and here Marat’s cast-net was brought to play, with the 
result that there were made a number of experts in its 
handling. 

But the chief interest centered in Loyo; and the un- 
mistakable signs of improvement put cheer into all the 
crew. And then came the day when triumph, in big let- 
ters, was written over the hopes of all. 

On that morning, Norris, Wayne, and Julian held con- 


THE OPERATION ON LOYO 


209 


sultation over Loyo, whom, until now, they had kept at 
absolute rest and quiet, at times much against his in- 
clination to get about. The wound, from which the 
stitches had long ago been removed, was well healed; 
the look in his eyes had the normal knowingness; the 
movement of his arms, and his grasp, showed equal and 
much increased strength. For some time, the patient 
had been anxious to put his mental faculties to exercise 
in talk, but had invariably been cautioned to keep himself 
in a condition of sleep, as near as possible. 

Now Norris gave the signal to remove all restraint, 
and directed Julian to encourage Loyo in talk. 

“ How do you feel, now, Loyo? ” began Julian. 

“ I’m feeling just all right,” smiled Loyo, as I’ve 
been a-trying to tell you.” 

Do you remember things now? ” said Julian. 

‘‘ Yes,” said Loyo. But there’s some things ain’t 
quite plain. Seems like I’ve been in a kind of laziness ; 
my rheumatism put me a little out of my head, I guess.” 

Questioned, the darky recalled the events preceding the 
time he was struck down as he lay helpless under the 
rheumatism. 

Did you know,” said Julian, that Pedro is dead? ” 
Seems somehow like I knowed that,” returned Loyo. 

“ Do you feel tired,” interposed Norris, or does your 
head ache any from talking? ” 

No,” asserted Loyo. I feel just all right.” 

The word deafness is certainly all,” observed Norris. 


210 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Norris wrote a sentence on a piece of paper. 

Can you read that ? ” said he, handing the paper to 
Loyo. 

‘ Pedro ’ (and a blank space) ‘ gave me in- 

structions,’ ” read Loyo aloud. 

Suppose you fill in the blank space,” said Norris. 

‘‘ I suppose you mean that for the rest of his name,” 
said Loyo. And so he took the pencil and wrote in La- 
martine. 

Well, boys,” said Norris, smiling, “ the thing is a 
success.” 

And now Wayne brought out the copy of the letter 
addressed by Pedro to Loyo. 

“ Here is a letter to you, we found on the Mercier 
after Pedro died,” said Wayne. 

Loyo took the paper, expressing surprise that the secret 
drawer should have been discovered. But as his glance 
fell on the sheet, he looked up quickly to declare : 

This here ain’t written by Pedro. This here ain’t his 
writing.” 

“ No,” said Wayne. ‘‘ That’s a copy. Lafitte Goya 
took the original away from us.” 

Loyo read the letter through, and then showed signs 
of trouble. 

“ This here ain’t got what Pedro said I was to find,” 
said he. “ This here don’t tell me. It was the way it 
was wrote that was to tell me how to find the boy for 
Julian. And he told me some things so I could read it 


THE OPERATION ON LOYO 


2II 


the way he wanted. This here paper don’t do any good. 
Eve got to have the one he wrote. Oh, if he’d only just 
told me where he hid it ! He said he would like to take 
me and show me the place, but he was a-feared something 
might happen so others might get it out of me before the 
time.” 

Do you remember the directions,” said Wayne, ‘‘ so 
you can give them to Julian? ” 

“ Yes, he told them to me so many times I couldn’t 
forget,” said Loyo. “ But they don’t do no good with- 
out I had the paper Pedro wrote.” 

I remember some things a little odd about the original 
letter; but I don’t remember exactly what they were,” 
said Wayne, making visible effort to recall the appearance 
of the writing Goya had taken from him. “ I thought 
it was just some peculiarity of his writing.” 

“ Tell us what the directions were, Loyo,” prompted 
Julian. 

“ That part is easy,” offered Loyo. Pedro said the 
shape of the writing would be like a map ; and where 
there was the word ^ sentinels ’ it meant palms; and capi- 
tal T where there should be a small t, was the location 
of the palms : and a capital O where a small o should be, 
showed the location of a hole; and ' spar ’ meant a pine 
tree; and a capital F where a small f should be, showed 
the location of the pine ; and a capital Q with wavy lines 
showed a spring; and an X showed the exact loca- 
tion.” 


212 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


There followed a minute’s silence. The faces showed 
that the boys had begun to take Loyo’s hopeless view of 
the thing. Julian finally again begged his friends to 
give it up and sail for home. There was no answer; and 
Wayne, taking the copy of the letter, sauntered away to 
the Herder's bow. He blamed himself that he had not 
guessed that there was a hidden meaning in the peculiari- 
ties of that original writing of Pedro’s. He recollected, 
in the first place, that there was irregular form given to 
the two paragraphs. Now what were they? He shut 
his eyes in the endeavor to bring them back. Presently 
the first paragraph seemed to take shape; and then the 
second, with less distinctness. And then a thought 
startled him. He called Julian. 

Julian,” he said, when the latter came forward, do 
you know the shape of the little island, south of this one? 
Is it something like an Indian arrow-head — like this ? ” 
And he drew the shape. 

Yes,” said Julian, that’s about the way it’s shaped.” 

Wayne then clambered down into one of the small 
boats, and rowed away northward, within the reef-line. 

“ There he goes,” said Ray. Going off to get up a 
brain-storm. Funny thing — he has to have lots of 
room when he thinks. I can’t think at all unless I’ve got 
company. When he thinks, he puts things together; I 
can’t think except to tear things to pieces.” 

And that’s no joke,” broke in Charlie. “ Mr. Nor- 
ris, let me tell you what Doctor Stewart once said. He 


THE OPERATION ON LOYO 


213 


said : ' Ray, here, is the type of the humorist. Just let 

a fellow come along and show Ray his weaknesses — 
he’ll tear him to pieces and show up those weaknesses, 
just as a cartoonist does with his pictures.” 

“ There you go. You see,” said Ray, addressing Nor- 
ris, that’s the way they jump on me — even when I 
make a confession.” 

‘‘ Well,” laughed Norris, I’ll bet they don’t ever get 
much the best of you.” 

In the meantime, Wayne, out of earshot, threw out 
several heavy links of chain on a rope for anchor; and 
using a thwart for a table, set himself to the attempt to 
reconstruct Pedro’s codex. Drawing on his memory, 
and on Loyo’s account of the verbal directions he had of 
Pedro, he made a new writing. After a number of 
erasures and corrections, he viewed the result, breathing 
deeply of a sense of victory. And then, having been 
gone barely an hour, he pulled in his improvised anchor, 
and moved briskly toward the Mercier. 

There he comes,” announced Ray. ** Look at his 
stroke. Now fan everything, fellows; he’s got some- 
thing hot on.” 

But when Wayne got aboard, he went direct to Loyo, 
who sat leaning against the cabin. Loyo took the paper 
Wayne offered. He studied it for some time, and his 
face lighted up with gratified intelligence. 

“ That sure look more like master Pedro talked about,” 
he said. 


Ter" "• “X^^cx- t^u<^ ^iJ L U j-x^ 

^/w<_ .tfvuL ^ .-tx.a^ • a.JLtlxxx ^ X.‘ts=:Q:tjL^jicj\yy^ 
"*H> ^ -f* p r t t I f~*'* r^ — ^ji 

/CUvvt. •'p^Ucipt. x-orv^ — 


Ji-X. 


'” 9 ^ o-'tA.*- -JiL^ 

r <41 c<^^ 




■fe 










^•i^TZixyuJU V\fOu^ 

*S^ «U Q<*JLCfZZ ‘ 


^ JC=Li^ 


THE OPERATION ON LOYO 


215 

‘‘ Explain it to me/’ said Julian, looking over Loyo’s 
shoulder. 

‘‘ Well,” began Loyo, pointing to the first paragraph, 
‘‘ that’s the general shape of the big island; and that,” 
pointing to the second paragraph, “ is the shape of the 
little island. And see them capital Ts in ‘ sentinels ’ and 
‘ stand ’ — them’s the palms. And that capital O in 
‘ now,’ between — that’s for the hole. And that capital 
F in ‘ finger ’ — that’s the spar ; or like he said, the pine 
tree. And them wavy lines coming out of the capital Q 
— that’s for the water. And the X — that’s the exact 
spot where it’s buried; and it’s way down in the little 
island that’s shaped some like an arrow. I reckon we’re 
going to find the box for you now, Julian boy. It’s all 
just as plain, like he said.” 

“ It seems wonderful,” said Julian, addressing Wayne, 
“ that you could remember the way Pedro wrote the let- 
ter, when you didn’t realize those capital letters meant 
anything peculiar.” 

“ Well,” returned Wayne, “ we boys have practiced ob- 
serving and remembering what we see, so it’s a kind of 
habit. And what Loyo said caused me to remember that 
I noticed those capitals, which I had thought were just 
peculiar mistakes of Pedro’s writing. As long as Loyo 
knew what the letters were, it wasn’t so hard to find where 
they belonged — you know he mentioned ‘ sentinels ’ and 
‘ spar.’ ” 


2i6 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


The others had begun to flock round, so Wayne began 
to elucidate the things for them. 

“ He makes it look very easy,” observed Norris to 
Ray. 

'' Yes,” said Ray. ‘‘ As the fellow said, it’s easy when 
you know how. Next, he’ll be telling us we could work 
it out just as easy, if we liked puzzles well enough. I’m 
thinking we’d like puzzles well enough, if for us they 
were as easy.” 

You see,” continued Wayne, Pedro told Loyo that 
‘ sentinels ’ meant palms, and it was natural he would put 
one of the capitals in that word; and the next t comes in 
' stand,’ and ‘ now ’ comes between. Make a capital O 
there, and we have the ‘ hole ’ with a palm standing watch 
on either side. Now / in ‘ finger ’ comes about under the 
O, so that is likely where capital F should be. Besides 
the word ‘ spar ’ (meaning a pine tree) is just under it. 
So F — the pine tree — is in front of the hole, and has a 
branch (for a finger) pointing to the hole. The only q 
to capitalize is in * quiet,’ and the only x is in the word 
‘ unexposed,’ and the ' wavy lines ’ of q go through or 
over X — I kind of remember that in Pedro’s writ- 
ing.” 

Wayne ceased there, as if he had concluded, so Joe 
spoke up. 

But I don’t see the connection between the q and x 
and the rest,” he complained. 

Well,” said Wayne, “ I guess Pedro knew that would 


THE OPERATION ON LOYO 


217 


become plain to Loyo and Julian when they got down to 
the place. Pve got an idea, but Pd like to keep it to my- 
self till we are on the spot.'’ 

There now, listen to him,” said Ray. It wouldn’t 
be him if he didn’t keep us guessing about something or 
other.” 

“ Well, when are you going down? ” queried Phil. 

“Julian and Loyo, and Captain Marat will decide 
that,” said Wayne. 

“ I theenk,” said Marat, “ thad thees letter of Pedro 
make Loyo thee captain of thees expedition. I only sug- 
gest thad we mus’ theenk of those bad crew, who mois’ 
now be on the guard, and not let our boys run too much 
thee risk.” 

“ You-all,” said Loyo, “ have been very good to come 
to our help; and I can’t tell you how I feel about your 
curing me of my trouble up here,” putting his hand to his 
head, “ and Julian and I are very anxious that these 
boys shall not be put into no danger. I know Julian 
would rather lose the treasure.” 

Julian strongly corroborated the statement; and the 
boys more strongly protested any such thought. 

“If we could only induce those Dagoes to give up and 
git ! ” suggested Robert. 

“ Let Wayne alone,” asserted Ray. “ He’ll rig up 
some scheme.” 

“ Something like the fireworks,” smiled Grant Norris. 
“ It isn’t hard to scare those fellows with something they 


2i8 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


don't understand. But they’re afraid of that pirate, 
Lafitte Goya — and the sneaking Gomez.” 

Well, ain’t you-all ’bout done wid all dat palaverin’? ” 
called Rufe from the galley. Dis heah dinnah’s now 
a-waitin’ fo’ you.” 

For the first time Loyo took his place at table. And if 
any had any doubts as to his complete recovery his cheer- 
ful talk, his steadiness on his limbs, and his healthy ap- 
preciation of Rufe’s cookery, would have been convinc- 
ing. 

The wind had swung round into the northwest, and ac- 
companied by bundles of clouds, it brought a coolness, 
pleasantly putting the tail between the legs of a week of 
rather intense heat. 

Early in the afternoon, Wayne became abstracted; at 
times he leaned pensively on the bow bulwarks. “ Hatch- 
ing something again,” said Ray, pointing him out. 


CHAPTER XXIV 


SETTING UP A SCARECROW 

W AYNE finally turned from his musing, and as he 
came aft, Ray again had to have his say. ‘‘ At- 
tention, fellows,’' said he. ‘‘ He’s bringing his eggs to 
market.” 

Wayne began by pumping Norris about the Spaniards 
under Lafitte Goya. 

Yes, they’re superstitious,” said Norris, and rather 
easily scared by what they don’t know the meaning of.” 

‘‘Didn’t you say something about their being pretty 
near tired of their hunt for the treasure?” questioned 
Wayne. 

“Yes,” said Norris. “They’ve been ready to throw 
it up a number of times. But Goya bullies them, calls 
them cowards, and threatens them. They don’t like it, 
but they’re afraid of their hides, and Goya knows it. If 
they had a leader they might turn on him. Once or twice 
I thought of leading them against him. But that would 
mean bloodshed, and I don’t like to lead in anything that 
starts something like that. And then you can’t depend on 
them to carry a thing through. If it goes through in a 
hurry without a hitch, all right. But if it don’t, they’re 
down and out. But sooner or later they’ll do something.” 
219 


220 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


** Maybe we can do something to hurry it up,’^ sug- 
gested Wayne. 

Say, Wayne,” broke in Ray. You’ve got some- 
thing up your sleeve. Let’s have it.” 

Well,” evaded Wayne, let’s each suggest something, 
and put them all together and — ” 

** All right, let’s have yours first,” insisted the uncom- 
promising Ray. 

Let’s have it,” said Norris. 

Thus assailed Wayne complied. 

‘‘ Suppose some of us slip down there in the dark,” 
said he, ” and give them a little mysterious jolt. Say — 
prepare a kind of little cemetery, with crosses for head- 
stones, and the like; and hang up an effigy by the neck; 
and stick up a warning that this is a grave-yard prepared 
for the bunch of them — and so on.” 

Gee ! ” shuddered Ray. 

That sure would make those fellows squirm,” asserted 
Norris. 

“ And we might make some gun noise,” added Wayne, 
and set off a couple of palms.” 

We’ll do it ! ” enthused Norris. I’ll write the no- 
tice in Spanish, so they can all read it.” 

Preparations immediately went forward. An old pair 
of trousers and shirt were dug out; and a hat. A bit of 
rope, and some cord, and a shovel, completed the outfit. 
And Norris had soon written the paper. 

The moon was in its first quarter, furnishing increasing 


SETTING UP A SCARECROW 


221 


light, but was due to go down at midnight. It would not 
do to take the chance of the enemy seeing them rowing 
in to the beach, so it was wait till midnight to embark on 
the enterprise. By half past eleven the moon had dropped 
behind the range of hills, putting the lagoon in shadow; 
but the clouds had massed more, with seldom a break, and 
it was soon dark enough to venture. 

Wayne, Norris, and Rt)bert got down into the boat, 
followed by Joe and Ray, who were to ferry them across 
to the beach. The nor’ wester spread a chill all over ; the 
oarsmen sought warmth of their exercise, and the pas- 
sengers shivered on the thwarts. But they were soon 
on the beach. 

** Now,” said Wayne, when he, Robert, and Norris 
had got their outfit out, we may not be able to make it 
back to-night ; so don’t expect us till you get a signal. I 
may as well tell you — I have a notion to stay and see 
how they take it; and they might try to cut us off.” 

The three went south. Soon they turned, and passed 
over, between a pair of hill-tops, to the west side of the 
ridge. Wayne led with the bundle of clothes, Norris 
came next with his rifle, and Robert followed with the 
shovel and a hand-ax. It had grown quite dark, and they 
picked their way along the foot of the range with some 
difficulty, the flash-light being used very sparingly. They 
often stumbled on roots, unseen in the dark, and branches 
poked their faces. The exercise set the blood going and 
warmed them. 


222 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


The weather’s a good friend to our enterprise,” de- 
clared Grant Norris. “ Those cold-blooded cusses’ll 
never keep a sharp watch a night like this; they’ll just 
huddle up on the lee side of a tree or something, and 
shiver like those hairless Mexican dogs.” 

‘‘ I hope the thing we’ve got for them,” observed 
Robert, will make them shiver for another reason.” 

‘‘ It’ll do that,” asserted Norris. They don’t like 
that sort of thing. Even if they saw it being rigged up, 
and by one of themselves, they’d say it was a bad sign. 
They’re that superstitious.” 

The three had gone above two miles, and come out in a 
bit of grassy glade. Wayne flashed his light round an 
instant. 

“ Let’s fix up our man here,” he said. There’s plenty 
of dried grass.” 

So Norris and Robert began to collect the hay into a 
mound at Wayne’s elbow, while he undid his bundle and 
set to work, stuffing the garments, including a pouch of 
canvas, for the head. 

‘‘ That’s enough grass,” said Wayne, finally. “ Now 
you fellows might get some sticks for crosses, while I 
finish this thing.” 

Presently a dozen rustic crosses had been constructed, 
the sticks tied together with cord. 

“And now do you want to see our beauty?” said 
Wayne. “ You throw a flash on it, Slicky.” 


SETTING UP A SCARECROW 


223 

Wayne held up the effigy; and the light illumined, under 
the hat, a cleverly painted death’s head. 

‘‘ Wow! ” said Norris, in surprise. 

‘‘ Charlie did that,” said Wayne. He’s pretty good 
at the drawing.” 

Well, that’ll get those Dagoes right,” said Norris. 

Goya can tell them what he pleases.” 

They took up the march again, and it was not yet two 
o’clock when they found themselves at the edge of the 
forest, near the south end of the island, overlooking the 
habitation of the Spaniards. Many palms stood in 
groups, and singly, out beyond the undergrowth. They 
selected a spot among the palms, and j ust beneath an oak, 
as suited to their purpose. 

This looks good,” said Wayne. We can hang our 
man on that branch in the oak.” 

Just the thing,” agreed Norris. Now I’ll first take 
a peek around.” 

He stole along eastward, to opposite the long bunk- 
house, and then back, and down westward toward the 
mooring of the schooner Miguel; and was soon back. 

I don’t think they’re pretending to keep any lookout 
here,” he said. 

Well, let’s get busy,” said Wayne. And he took up 
the shovel and began to dig in the sand. 

Turn about, the three kept the shovel going an hour; 
and two rows of shallow graves, a dozen in all, resulted, 
a mound of sand beside each. 


224 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


And now the crosses,” said Wayne. 

At the one end of each grave they set up a rustic head- 
piece. 

“ Now let me see your rope,” said Norris, 

In a few minutes he exhibited, under Wayne’s flash- 
light, a slip-knot of many turns of the rope. 

** The hangman’s knot,” he explained. “ I hope you’ll 
never have occasion to make one.” 

He adjusted the noose, flung the rope, and directly, 
the effigy depended from the limb, over the first row of 
graves. 

A little out from the tree, and in a position visible from 
the house, Norris drove into the sand a pair of sticks, 
some five feet in height. To them he pinned the paper: 
at the top a death’s head and cross-bones, and below a 
notice written in Spanish. Translated, it went this wise: 

BANDITS 

Prepare yourselves. The cemetery is 
ready. The grave yawns for you. The 
rope is knotted. The time draws near. 

Pluto holds open the door of hades. 

‘‘ Well, that’s all ready,” said Wayne. “ And now I’ll 
tell you what I’d like to do. After we stir them up, they 
won’t come over here to see what’s the matter before day- 
light, will they ? ” 

Not on your life,” declared Norris. ‘‘ Even Goya 
won’t risk it before then.” 

“ Well,” pursued Wayne, “ I’d like to hide somewhere 


SETTING UP A SCARECROW 


225 


then, and see how they act when they do take this all in/’ 

“ And that’s just what I’ve been thinking,” said Nor- 
ris. “ Let me think a minute.” Presently he said, ” I’ll 
tell you what it is: We can see down here pretty fair 
from the top of that last hill, and there’s some bushes up 
there to hide in.” 

“ And I’ve got my binoculars,” said Wayne, and so 
has Slicky. Now suppose we do this way: When you 
fire your rifle to wake them up, Slicky and I will make 
torches of a couple of palms. Then we can run down 
west to the point and fire another palm, so they’ll think 
we’ve gone off in a boat there. And then we can cut 
back up through the woods and get up to the hill. 

Good! ” declared Norris. ” That’ll sure keep Goya 
from looking for us.” 

It had soon come four o’clock. 

“ Now’s a good time,” said Norris. An hour before 
sun-up.” 

Wayne and Robert each picked a cabbage palm with 
a profusion of dead, dried palm leaves below the green 
tops ; and each took up a dried palm- fan for a lighter. 

“ All right,” said Wayne. 

Now I’m going to fire three shots,” said Norris. 

And I’ll put some leaks in their roof. Wait for a 
minute after the last shot.” 

The first report rang out sharp. 

“ Now some of those Dagoes are sitting up,” said 
Norris. ” ‘ Diavolo ! ’ some one is saying. I’ll bet.” 


226 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


The second report cracked forth. 

Now they’re all taking notice,” said Norris. 

The third shot banged ominously. 

Now they’re all rushing for the windows and doors,” 
said Norris, and palavering like monkeys. Better let 
them have the rest of the fireworks.” 

First one and then the other of the palms flared up 
— a great flambeau of a few moments’ life. 

Now they’ve got another big guess on,” said Norris. 

The three hurried off to the southwest, past the little 
house in which Wayne and Robert had their first taste 
of captivity. 

Do you remember that house, Slicky? ” said Wayne. 

Never’ll forget it,” returned Robert. 

Wayne struck a match and set another palm ablaze. 
The great mass of flame mounted high, and was gone in 
a moment. 

I guess they’ll think there’s a bunch of volcanoes 
erupting,” observed Robert. 

'' They’ll think it’s the end of the world,” said Norris. 
“ And now for the hill.” 

They went down to the beach and trotted north to the 
little stream that had twice before figured in the doings 
on the island. To cross it they must go inland some way ; 
and soon they were pushing through the forest again, 
presently to come out at the foot of the hill. They 
climbed to its southern brow, and crawled into the 
bushes. 


SETTING UP A SCARECROW 


227 

'' We’ll snuggle up close,” said Norris, ‘‘ and we won’t 
notice the chill so much when we cool down.” 

They hadn’t long to wait for the first signs of dawn. 
And so soon as there was sufficient light to bring out ob- 
jects in the open spaces, the two pairs of binoculars — 
like big eyes peering out of the bushes — were brought 
to play on the region of the bunk-house. It was above 
a quarter mile down there, but the glasses made things 
come up, close; as it seemed, within speaking distance. 

They’re there by the house,” said Wayne, looking. 
He handed his glasses to Norris. 

Yes,” said Norris, as he peered. “ Goya’s making 
them a harangue — calling them cowards. I’ll bet.— 
There go two of them toward the woods — Goya’s going 
behind them with a gun — driving them, that’s what he’s 
doing.” 

He handed Wayne his binoculars. 

“ They’ve got out of sight behind the trees,” said Rob- 
bert. 

"" They’re having a look at their pretty representative, 
hanging in the tree,” observed Norris, ‘‘ and the cemetery. 
That won’t make them happy.” 

The others, back by the house,” said Wayne, ‘‘ are 
looking on mighty interested.” 

There they go back,” said Robert, and he offered 
Norris his glasses. 

No, I don’t want them,” said Norris. ‘‘ Just tell me 
what you see.” 


228 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


One of them’s got the paper,” said Wayne. Goya’s 
holding out his hand for it. — The fellow’s pretending 
not to see Goya, looks like, and he’s hurrying to the bunk- 
house with it.” 

Now he’s showing it to those fellows,” said Robert, 
presently. “ They’re reading it.” 

They’re working their hands like sixty,” said Wayne. 
“ Seems like we ought to hear them talking.” 

“ Telling one another it’s a sign they’re all doomed,” 
declared Norris. 

‘‘ Now Goya’s preaching to them,” said Robert. I 
can tell — the way he waves his arms. And they act like 
they’re mad.” 

‘‘ Goya’s mad anyway,” said Wayne. ‘‘ See him 
shake his fist.” 

'' You bet he’s mad,” said Norris. Let me see your 
glasses.” 

Robert handed over his. 

He’s calling them women — babies — fools — dogs ; 
I know his talk,” said Norris, looking. ‘‘ But that won’t 
do much good ; it’s his threats gets them.” 

“ There he goes off — west, with some one behind 
him,” said Wayne. 

” That’s Gomez,” said Norris, ** his dog.” 

“ He’s going down to where we fired that last palm,” 
observed Wayne. 

“ Yes,” said Norris. ‘‘ He’ll make up his mind some 
one went off in a boat there.” 


SETTING UP A SCARECROW 


229 

The others are having some kind of a session,” said 
Wayne. 

Trying to work up courage to go against Goya,” said 
Norris. They’ve tried that before.” 

The three continued their observation for half an hour, 
during which time the Spaniards very evidently kept up 
their excited chatter. Then Lafitte Goya and Gomez 
hove into view on the return. 

Well,” said Norris, “ we might as well hike. There’s 
nothing more to see. Goya’s not likely to give them a 
chance to get away today, if that’s what they’re wanting 
— and I’ll bet it is. And he might take a notion to take 
a run up to the other end of the island.” 

So they crept back over the hill, going down the north- 
west slope. They were soon close to the mouth of the 
cave wherein Wayne and Robert had passed those days 
in chains. They pushed through the bushes and looked 
in. 

They’ve quit this hole, I guess,” said Norris. 

As they moved onward toward the north, they ob- 
served that the wind had swung round and was coming 
out of the southwest. The sky began to clear, the sun 
breaking through to drive off the chill. The watch 
showed past seven when they got to the beach, opposite 
the Mercier. There was no need to whistle, for they 
were immediately seen ; and a boat put off to get them. 
Ray and Leslie were at the oars. 


230 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


“ Well,” said Ray, as the adventurers climbed in, “ how 
did it all come off ? ” 

Like a monkey sliding down an icicle,” said Norris. 

‘‘ It went smooth and to the point,” interpreted Ray, 
pulling at his oars. 

Breakfast was soon on the table, and the story of the 
night’s adventure was told. 

“ Well, do you think they’ll vamoose? ” asked Ray. 

‘‘ I can answer that they’re strong in the notion,” re- 
turned Norris; and they’ll do it if Goya goes to sleep 
before they get a little over the effect of this thing.’^ 
You think they are scared? ” asked Charlie. 

“ I know they are,” declared Norris. 

** But they may get over it if they don’t clear out right 
away,” observed Joe. 

“ They’ll never get over it, when you come to that,” 
said Norris. “ And it’ll have its effect in helping them 
finally to sicken of this job right, even if they don’t go 
now.’’ 


CHAPTER XXV 


ON THE LITTLE ISLE 



LL the day — which was August ninth — and half 


-Z JL of the next, was given over to anxious waiting, in 
the timid hope that the superstitious crew down there 
would have taken the warning seriously, and that they 
would be in the way of abandoning the islands. During 
this time there was not a sight had of the enemy any- 
where; and some one on the Mercier was almost always 
on the lookout, binoculars pointed southward. 

‘‘ Maybe they’re gone,” said Leslie at last. 

Well,” said Grant Norris, I say, let’s go down and 
see. This thing is getting tiresome.” 

“ Yes,” agreed Captain Marat, we have good south- 
west wind; we can sail.” 

The noon meal over. Captain Marat, Robert, Joe, and 
Charlie got into one of the boats, hoisted the sail, and 
made off around the broad north end of the island. In 
three quarters of an hour, they went about on the star- 
board tack, and made down the west shore. 

The middle of the afternoon saw them off the south- 
west point — out of gun range — eyes eagerly watching 
the steadily opening mouth of the sound. For they were 
about to come into view of the MigueVs anchorage. 


231 


232 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Robert was the only one of the four who had been 
about this part of the island. He crouched in the bow, 
eyes to his glasses. “ There she is — she’s still there,” 
he finally announced, a shade of disappointment in his 
tone. 

Captain Marat brought the bow to the wind, and for 
some minutes he joined the rest in an examination of the 
schooner. 

They have made no preparation to sail away,” he 
finally concluded. ‘‘ Lafitte Goya have hees way yet.” 

Captain Marat got the wind into the sail again and 
put the boat a little more to the south, opening out the 
beach up to the enemy’s quarters. Then they made out 
figures about the house, who soon gave evidence that 
the boat was seen; for they grouped themselves at the 
corner of the house, as if looking. 

Well, go about,” said Marat. And he brought the 
bow into the wind, quickly filling the sail on the port. 

We will go back.” 

The report they gave, when again they climbed aboard 
the Mercier, brought forth many expressions of disap- 
pointment ; though at bottom, none had entertained more 
than a half hope that Lafitte Goya and crew had gone. 

“ Well, why wait any more,” said Ray; why not go 
down to the little island tonight and try for the box ; and 
maybe we can sail for home tomorrow. We ought to 
make it, some way, over the reef ; we came in over it.” 

There were objections to the plan, for reasons already 


ON THE LITTLE ISLE 


233 


discussed : It was risky ; Goya was likely to be much on 
the alert against any such move. Of course, the depress- 
ing effect on Goya’s crew, of the warning, may have re- 
laxed vigilance. But that effect must be wearing away 
somewhat; and the sight of the boat would doubtless set 
them on the watch again, and it would be hard to get by 
undiscovered. 

Well,” said Norris, after there had been much dis- 
cussion of Ray’s proposal, “ the longer we wait, the more 
those Dagoes’ll be convinced that that graveyard warn- 
ing was all a bluff. And I hate to hang back for such a 
crew.” 

And then finally it was determined to attempt an ex- 
pedition to the small island that night. Had there been a 
suspicion of what would be the issue, it would not have 
been made. 

A bright moon shone that night, due to set not much 
before half past one; there would be only four hours of 
real darkness. So at midnight, the treasure-hunting 
party sailed away in the small boat — Captain Marat, 
Julian Lamartine, Loyo, Wayne, Ray, and Bert. A pair 
of shovels and a pick were the tools taken; and Jean 
Marat brought his precious rifle. They had determined 
on the western route, as being the one less under the 
enemy’s eye. 

The sea lay bright under the moonlight, the breaking 
wave crests sparkling. The wind still held from the 
southwest. Captain Marat took the boat well to the 


234 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


west before heading her to the south, hoping thus to 
avoid the observation of any of Goya’s lookouts. By 
half past one, with the moon just gone down, the boat 
was somewhat more than two miles off the little island. 
Then Jean Marat set the boat’s bow direct for the isle, 
the wind right behind. In twenty minutes she had cut 
through the breakers on the reef, and quickly drove on to 
the west beach, about five hundred yards above the south 
point of the isle. 

I hope they have not see us,” said Marat, as all 
clambered out. 

“ Well, they couldn’t see us coming in here anyway,” 
declared Ray. ‘‘If they saw us when there was any 
light, they must have thought we were sailing for South 
America.” 

“ I feel not so sure,” observed Jean Marat. “ Some 
one mus’ stand the guard by the boat,” he added. 

“ I’ll stay by the boat,” volunteered Ray. 

“ I better stay with you,” offered Bert Hill. 

“ No, you go and help the others, Bert,” said Ray. 
“ I won’t be lonesome.” 

Ray squatted on the sand by the bow of the boat, as 
the others plunged into the mirky brush, which here grew 
down close on the beach. Both Julian aad Loyo were 
somewhat familiar with this isle — a mile and a half by 
a half mile in extent — though neither had been here 
for above a year. Loyo led the ‘way into the interior, 
pushing through a broad patch of heavy undergrowth. 


ON THE LITTLE ISLE 


235 


to come out, finally, into a more open tract of wood. 

‘‘ Now we want to find a pine tree standing alone,’^ 
said Wayne. ‘‘ Too bad we couldn’t come in daylight.” 

I don’t remember any pine tree standing alone,” said 
Julian. 

Neither did Loyo remember any such. “ But there 
sure is one,” he declared. ‘‘ Pedro, he says so in the let- 
ter.” 

“ Here are both pine and palm,” observed Marat. 

“ They are not so close together up nearer the hills,” 
offered Julian. 

‘‘ Well, let’s try up that way,” said Wayne. ‘‘ And 
we want to find two palms away from the others, and 
the lone pine somewhere near.” 

They moved northward, slowly, and in time the trees 
thinned, and a hill showed in outline against the stars. 

‘‘ Here’s some pine trees cut down,” presently came 
from Bert. 

“ And there’s a pine standing alone! ” declared Wayne. 

** Ah, yes,” said Marat. Pedro cut these pines so 
thad one should stand by heemself.” 

And there’s the two palms,” said Wayne, sending a 
flash from his lamp around. “ See there ! he’s cut down 
some palms too, to make the two stand separate.” 

Suddenly a shrill whistle — short as the report of a 
gun — startled the hunters. It came from some place 
far up the island. 

“That’s Ray!” said Wayne. 


236 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Jean Marat was already hurrying off. Wayne caught 
up with him; the rest followed, soon to be crashing 
through the heavy undergrowth, reckless of scratches or 
torn clothes. That sudden breaking off of Ray’s alarm 
whistle had an ominous seeming. And it added to their 
alarm that the sound had come from so far from where 
Ray should be. 

Jean Marat and Wayne were the first to break through 
on to the beach. 

The boat was gone! 

Wayne flashed his light on the sands. Foot-prints 
showed, going from the brush to the marks of the boat’s 
prow. 

Then all ran up the beach, Marat still in the van. Soon 
they brought up at the head of the island; and readily 
made out two shadowy objects moving away across the 
sound. They could hear the oars in the thole-pins. 

There they go,” said Wayne. 

Marat fired his rifle into the air, to acquaint Ray that 
his comrades had become conscious of his predicament. 

Thees is ver’ bad,” said Jean Marat. “ And our 
boat, it ees gone.” 

** We’ll signal the Mercier/' said Wayne. Norris will 
come with the other boat.” 

It was a much dejected five who turned back from the 
beach, and, led by Julian and Loyo, moved through the 
shore palms, and through the scattering pines toward the 
hills. Julian expressed great sorrow that it was in his 


ON THE LITTLE ISLE 


237 

service that again one of his new friends had lost his lib- 
erty, and possibly put in jeopardy of his life. 

Don’t talk any more like that,” implored Wayne. 
“ They won’t harm him. Goya just wants one of us for 
a ransom for the treasure.” 

Well, we’ll give it to him,” declared Julian. 

“ Please don’t ! ” again begged Wayne. That’s all 
decided. We’ve beat them before — we can do it again, 
somehow. You can believe me — Ray would hate to 
be ransomed.” 

I like ver’ much to hear you talk thad way,” said Jean 
Marat. “You ver’ brave boys. We will make some 
way to get him free. Ah, you Goya, look out! ” he added 
in apostrophe. And there was something ominous in 
his tone. 

The party was soon at the foot of the northern slope 
of the first hill. At Wayne’s behest each collected an 
armful of wood; and this they bore to the brow of the 
hill. 

“ I hope Slicky’s keeping a good lookout, observed 
Wayne. And he set about the kindling of a fire. 

Then, as Bert kept the flames concentrated, Wayne, 
with his jacket screened the fire from the Mercier, in the 
lagoon three miles to the north, and with swinging of the 
jacket, let out flash after flash in regular succession. 

“Can they make out the signals so far?” asked Ju- 
lian. 

Easily,” said Wayne. “ I hope rattle-brained Phil 


238 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


isn’t on watch. He’s all right when he knows something’s 
up; but when everything is quiet, he doesn’t see any- 
thing is worth while.” 

When Wayne’s arm tired, Bert relieved him at the 
signalling. For half an hour the signals flashed forth 
unanswered. 

“ I don’t see what’s the matter with them,” complained 
Wayne. We’ll have to get them within an hour or 
it’ll be daylight.” 

Those left on board the Mercier turned from watching 
the sail of their comrades lose itself behind the point. 

Well, I hope they get down there without being seen,” 
observed Norris. 

What would that Goya do if he saw them?” asked 
Phil. 

‘Hf he could make his outfit believe our fellows were 
going after the treasure down there, and pretty sure to 
find it,” returned Norris, “ he’d attack. They’re a bunch 
of cowards generally; but if they see a chance for a hand- 
ful of filthy lucre, they’ll take chances all right, especially 
if they can do their shooting from cover. Well, whose 
watch — twelve to two ? ” 

‘‘ Mine,” said Leslie. 

The rest were soon in the blankets. At two Leslie 
called Charlie. 

It’s beastly dark,” said Charlie, yawning. “ Where’s 
the moon ? ” 


ON THE LITTLE ISLE 


239 


'' Gone over half an hour ago/’ returned Leslie. 

Charlie paced the deck for a time, to walk off his 
sleepiness. His thoughts turned back home, and he 
wished that he might send a letter to the folks, recount- 
ing the adventures of the Mercier’s crew. Three o’clock 
passed, and the minutes rolled on to four, and still his 
thoughts lingered far away from the islands. At last 
he awoke from his revery and set a light to his watch to 
find it pointing to a quarter past four. He started aft to 
call Phil. But he had not taken three steps, when a gleam 
of something came into the corner of his eye. 

He stopped short. “ Ah ! ” he said. “ I’m a poor 
watch.” 

Then he ran; and instead of calling Phil, he aroused 
Robert. Hurry up ! ” he said. They’re signalling! ” 

“ What? ” said Robert. 

"'They’re signalling!” 

Robert got on his feet with a jump. " I’ll get a lan- 
tern,” he said. " You call Norris.” 

The lantern was soon flashing forth answering signals. 
And all the company collected at the schooner’s rail. 

“ Joe, help me read them,” said Robert. " Charlie and 
Leslie, you take them down.” 

Slowly, Wayne’s message took form on paper, thus: 

Ray captured, boat gone. Norris and Slicky come. 
East side. W. 


“ Ray captured ! ” said Phil, slow to realize. 


240 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


“ And those Dagoes got their boat ! said Norris. And 
there was pent-up wrath in his tone. Get the sail in, 
Slicky,” he added, going for his gun. I’m getting my 
dander up,” he continued, coming from the cabin. I’m 
tired of monkeying with those cusses. First chance I 
get I’m going to let something into Mr. Lafitte Goya. 
Rufe, we want grub — no telling just when we’ll be 
back.” 

Norris and Robert got their sail up, and the remaining 
small boat went scudding southward, out beyond the reef. 

Day dawned before the boat’s prow touched the sand 
of the east shore of the little isle. Wayne and Julian 
stood on the beach, waiting. 

“ They saw us,” explained Wayne. Ray stayed by 
the boat, and they came over, landed on the north shore, 
and jumped on him from the bushes before he could 
whistle.” And the story was soon told. 

'' And now they’ve got the chain on Ray,” said Norris ; 
and he compressed his lips in his wrath. “ I like that 
boy,” he went on, and I know what I’m going to do 
when I get the chance. We’ve been fooling with those 
fellows long enough.” 

Julian went to the top of hill to join Bert in keeping 
watch across the sound, and Marat and Loyo came down 
to a council with Wayne, Norris, and Robert. 

'‘Well, Wayne,” said Norris, “you’re the most re- 
sourceful, what do you suggest?” 


ON THE LITTLE ISLE 


241 


What do you think Goya will do if we leave here 
and go back to the Mercierf ” asked Wayne. 

Norris's answer was prompt. 

“ He’ll come down here sniffing for that treasure. You 
bet he’s got a guess what we came down here for. And 
if he doesn’t find it, and thinks we’ve got it, he’ll offer to 
give up Ray for it. He isn’t afraid of our running away 
without Ray.” 

Well then,” said Wayne, “ suppose we try to locate 
the treasure now; and later, most of us sail back to the 
Mercier — three or four stay here. Goya will think 
we’ve all gone, and he won’t take so many over here, if 
he comes to hunt. We can stick up another warning 
for them, telling them about our wireless, and that if they 
don’t set Ray free within a certain time, we can telegraph 
to a gunboat to come and get them for the murder of the 
two Japs. And then maybe they’ll clear out,Too.” 

They’d be sure to,” suggested Robert, “ if we could 
only get a good big ball chained to Goya’s ankle so he 
couldn’t interfere.” 

“ A nice little lead ball might do,” offered Norris. 

“ Yes,” said Marat, and he smiled a sinister smile. 
'' Thad is id — one liddle lead ball. Maybe it can be 
arrange’.” And he mused on the thought. 

No more promising plan than Wayne’s could be of- 
fered; so they began at once to act on it. 


CHAPTER XXVI 


THE COPPER COFFER A SURPRISE FOR THE ENEMY 

T he boat was pulled high on the beach, and Robert 
climbed the hill, to send Julian to join the others. 
Then, Wayne, Marat, Norris, Loyo, and Julian took up 
the march to the south. On this side of the hills the 
brush grew not so rank, and they made good progress in 
the forest, oaks, pines, and palms predominating. 

They were soon to the south of the last hill, where it 
was a bit more open. The heavy growth of the west side 
extended itself round the foot of the hill; and in the 
midst, a little stream purled, coming, it seemed, from no- 
where. 

Wayne pointed out the lone pine, made lone by the fell- 
ing of four or five others ; and close to the brush and the 
hill’s foot, the two palms. Daylight now made them 
conspicuous, identifying them more surely with Pedro’s 
description. 

There’s the pine (the ‘ lone spar’),” said Wayne. 
And there are the two palms (the ^ t^o sentinels’). 
And now you can see what he meant by ‘ a finger ’ point- 
ing: That horizontal branch of the pine points in be- 
tween the two ‘ sentinel ’ palms. There’s the place.” 

242 


THE COPPER COFFER 


243 

Yes/’ said Loyo, “ that’s just like Pedro meant. I 
am sure on that.” 

Wayne led the way into the brush, between the palms. 
Laboring over a bit of boggy ground, they stepped over 
the small stream, and directly, they found themselves be- 
fore a hole in a broken point of the hill. The opening 
was partially grown over with vines. 

“ That,” said Wayne, ‘‘ is what Pedro meant by ‘ a 
quiet spot unexposed to the sun ’ — a cave.” 

‘‘ That’s just it,” said Loyo. “ He never told us he 
found a cave down here.” 

Pushing aside the vines, Wayne led the way in, stoop- 
ing. As usual, the roof soon heightened, and they were 
able to stand erect. Wayne flashed his lamp, moving 
forward ; and presently a stream showed before them, 
trickling into the ground at the side. 

“ There’s the water from the spring Pedro told you 
about, Loyo,” said Wayne. 

Yes, sir, that’s sure it,” said Loyo. 

And now to find the spring,” pursued Wayne. 

The party had traversed the passage some two hundred 
feet, when they came to the end. And here Wayne threw 
a light on a spot where the water bubbled out. 

There it is,” spoke Wayne. 

That’s sure it,” declared Loyo. 

The capital Q is for the spring,” said Wayne, “ and 
the wavy lines for the water ; and the X right in the water, 
close to the spring. There it is on the paper.” 


244 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


And he directed the light on the paper, so the others 
could see. 

** Then,’’ observed Julian, the box must be under the 
water.” 

Must be,” agreed Wayne. It’s sand bottom,” he 
added. 

You better try for it,” said Norris, handing Julian 
the shovel. 

Assisted by an occasional flash of Wayne’s lamp, Ju- 
lian began to dig in, below the water, close to the spring. 
The shovel was soon down half a foot. 

I don’t reckon it’s any deeper’n that,” said Loyo. 

Better try a little farther away from ^he spring,” 
suggested Wayne. 

So Julian again set in his shovel, a little below. A 
few inches, and the spade struck something harder than 
sand. He then dropped the shovel and plunged his 
hands in the water. He pulled out some pieces. 

“ Oyster shells,” said all the eager onlookers, together, 
when Wayne’s light flashed on the find. 

See what’s under,” said Wayne. 

Julian was already delving with his hands again. 
‘‘ The light, Wayne,” he said. 

He was rubbing something as the light flashed, show- 
ing through the water, a flat surface of reddish hue. 

It’s the box! ” broke from the sundry throats. 

Yes,” said Loyo. “ It’s that copper box of his, I 
see so many times. Thank the Lord 1 ” 


THE COPPER COFFER 


245 


Well/’ said Jean Marat, “ like Wayne have sugges’, 
it may be more safe whar it lie for the presen’. And 
eef we cannot .scare away those of Goya, we can try once 
more in thee dark.” 

Yes,” said Loyo, “ that is best.” 

So the box was again covered, and the stream con- 
tinued to flow over it, as the party made its way out of 
the cave into the day again. 

And now it came time to decide who were to remain 
on the isle, and who go back to the Mercier. Marat drew 
Norris to one side, and for some minutes they debated 
something between them. When they came back to the 
others, Norris made an announcement. 

Captain Marat and I,” he said, “ have a little amend- 
ment to your plan of action, Wayne, which we have de- 
cided to keep to ourselves for the present. You’ll learn 
what it is at the right time. And now it is to be decided 
who of us two is to stay here.” 

“ I have sugges’,” interpose Jean Marat, thad the 
bes’ shot weeth the rifle stay here. We can each take 
one shot at the mark, and thee one who make the bull’s- 
eye, he stay.” 

Wayne smiled as he recollected the sample of Marat’s 
shooting he had witnessed up on the Florida coast. 

You might as well save your ammunition, Mr. Nor- 
ris,” said Wayne. '' I have seen him shoot.” 

“ Well, that doesn’t sound encouraging.” And Norris 


246 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


scratched his head. But let’s try for it; if he beats me, 
I won’t feel so disappointed over not staying.” 

Wayne began to have a suspicion. His thought gave 
his face a look of anxiety, so Jean Marat spoke up. 

Ah, Wayne,” he said, “ you need nod be ’fraid. We 
do not plan something ver’ serious. It all right, you will 
see.” 

And so a pine was blazed — for a mark — some two 
hundred yards away, and a match stuck in the center, 
showing its colored fire end. A toss-up gave Norris the 
first shot. He took careful aim, and fired. Julian and 
Wayne ran to inspect. 

“ An inch above the match,” reported Wayne. 

‘Hf you so good as tie me. Captain,” Norris smiled, 

I’ll give it to you.” 

‘‘You fin’ the madch all right?” Marat questioned 
Wayne. 

“ Yes, the match is still there,” returned Wayne. 

Marat gave a little sniff of satisfaction. And with that 
he raised his rifle. Next instant it cracked. Then all 
hastened down to the tree. 

Wayne was highly entertained with watching Norris’s 
expression of face, when he approached the pine. 

“By jove!” said Norris, squinting close. “If he 
hasn’t driven part of the match into the tree! Say, Cap- 
tain, you’re a fiend of a shot ! ” 

“ My rifle, he never mees,” returned Marat. “ Eef 


THE COPPER COFFER 247 

you shoot jus’ so much weeth thees gun, you can do jus’ 
thee same.” 

And so it was decided : Marat was to stay and keep 
watch over the treasure, and Loyo, Wayne, and Bert 
with him. They all returned to the boat; and Wayne 
went to the hill-top, and sent down Robert, who was to 
go with Norris and Julian back to the Mercier. 

Before leaving, Norris made, and left with Marat, a 
copy of the new notice, in Spanish, which he meant to 
get into the hands of the men on the big island. Here is 
how the English version reads: 

NOTICE 

We have on the Mercier wireless telegraph, by which 
we can communicate with all vessels that have instru- 
ments. We give you twelve hours in which to free our 
comrade and leave the islands. Then, if you do not 
comply, all we have to do is to telegraph to a gunboat; 
and they will come and take you all, to be hung for the 
murder of the two Japanese. 

This is a final warning. 

It was just past ten o’clock when Norris, Robert, and 
Julian sailed out over the reef, on the return to the Mer- 
cier. Marat and Loyo climbed the hill to join Wayne and 
Bert on watch. And they were all very careful not to 
betray their presence on the isle, as they brought two 
pairs of binoculars to play, to observe what the enemy 
should do when the boat passed, going north. 

They’ll think there’s nobody left here, when they see 


248 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


the boat is gone/^ observed Wayne. ‘‘ What do you 
think Goya will do, Loyo ? ’’ 

“ I reckon likely he’ll get ready to cut off the Mercier, 
in case she comes down to try and get out of the lagoon 
by the east passage,” returned Loyo. And Gomez 
knows the schooner can’t get round the northwest corner 
of the island and come down the west side; so all he has 
to do is set a watch on the east side. And then I 
reckon — ” 

Here Bert broke into the talk, his eyes still at his 
glasses. 

They see our boat now,” he said, and they’re walk- 
ing up the beach to watch our fellows.” 

Well then,” pursued Wayne, “ Goya will figure it out 
that if we’ve got the treasure, we’ll try to run the Mercier 
out of the lagoon, ready to get away.” 

“ Yes,” said Loyo. 

“ But,” continued Wayne, “ he knows mighty well we’ll 
not go and leave Ray.” 

“ Jus’ so,” said Marat, and he put down the binocu- 
lars he had been using. “ He know we do not abandon 
our comrades. But jus’ like Loyo say, he weel watch 
to keep thee Mercier inside the lagoon till he make some 
way to get the treasure. And he weel be not so sure we 
have the treasure yet.” 

“But,” added Wayne, getting the drift, “he’ll suspect 
we got on the trail of it down here; and he’ll likely come 
and try to pick up the track himself.” 


THE COPPER COFFER 


249 


Jus’ so,” affirmed Marat. He weel depend that we 
leave some mark where we have been.” 

They’re getting a boat ready,” reported Bert. And 
I can see our other boat, pulled up close to the pile of 
oyster shells.” 

Marat again took up the glasses. 

Yes,” he said. Goya make prepare to come now, 
I theenk.” 

Marat seemed to find some satisfaction in the thought, 
for there was half a smile in his face as he watched the 
preparations over there. When four of the men had 
pulled their boat to the water, they went to the house, 
directly returning, variously equipped. Two bore 
shovels and a. pick, it appeared, and two were armed with 
rifles. Goya came behind, also rifle laden. 

Before entering the boat, Goya turned, and was seen 
to gesticulate to three others, who, also armed with rifles, 
were making off toward the east shore. Shouting or- 
ders to them about watching the Mercier/' was Wayne’s 
interpretation. 

Goya’s boat pushed off, two of the men took the oars, 
and the prow was pointed diagonally across the sound. 

** They’re coming down the west side,” said Wayne. 

“ Yes,” said Captain Marat. And now we have to 
move. Bert, I theenk better you stay on the wadch here ; 
and thee res’, we go down and make something prepare’ 
for thad Goya.” 

And so Marat led the way down the east slope of the 


250 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


hill, Wayne and Lo*yo following. There was no word 
spoken during the whole march down to the region of 
the cave; but Wayne was busy brooding over Captain 
Marat’s purposes, which, as Marat’s demeanor argued, 
must be of a very definite nature. He took some comfort 
of the captain’s cheerful confidence ; but he could not for- 
get the sinister look of Norris, when he confessed a secret 
understanding between himself and Jean Marat. 

The three were soon amongst the heavy growth that 
barred the passage to the cave. Marat then stepped down 
through the open space to a pine something under two 
hundred yards to the south. And on the trunk he fas- 
tened the copy of the notice of warning which Norris had 
penciled. Returning, he stationed Wayne and Loyo be- 
hind trunks of trees. 

** Now, Wayne,” said Marat, w’en they come, I go- 
ing to make my gun to talk once — to make accentuat’ 
to thee warning on the tree. Be ver’ careful and keep 
yourse’f behin’ the tree then.” 

Jean Marat then took up his own position in a screen of 
brush, away to the right. And the wait began. 

Wayne was blessed with patience above the average 
lad of his age; but the uncertainty as to what was coming, 
and withal, the apparent certainty that it was not to be in 
the nature of a game of “ ring around the Rosy,” kept 
Wayne in a fevered state. And so the twenty or thirty 
minutes seented to loiter in even more exasperating 


THE COPPER COFFER 


251 


fashion than had time during his confinement in that 
cave of the other island. 

But finally the curtain lifted. Wayne kept his eyes 
cn the fringe of rank growth over west. Suddenly, 
some way down, there broke into the open a figure, then 
four others — Lafitte Goya and his men. Goya had his 
eyes on the ground, as he appeared. But now he lifted 
them to take in the prospect just opened to him. A few 
moments’ gaze, and his eyes went to the ground again, 
and the party moved forward. 

They had not gone far, when Wayne saw one of the 
men suddenly point, as if to the tree on which Marat had 
pinned the notice. Goya moved forward quickly, and 
soon had the paper in his fingers, and began to read, the 
other men peering eagerly over his shoulders. 

When Goya looked up from his reading, the others 
shrank back, looking about in a manner apprehensive. 

It was then Jean Marat pushed out from his screen of 
bush into the open, his rifle at ready, and in a manner 
of challenge. Lafitte Goya saw him, and jerked his 
gun to his shoulder. The two rifles cracked closer to- 
gether than two ticks of a watch. But it was Marat’s 
got the mark. 

Wayne saw Lafitte Goya sink to the ground, grasping 
his foot. But then, mindful of Marat’s caution, he with- 
drew his head and held himself close up behind his tree- 
trunk. There came a volley from the enemy. Then 


252 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Wayne peered out cautiously, to see Goya’s men scamper- 
ing for the cover of the brush whence they had come. 
Marat, he saw, was now sheltered by a stump. 

Goya had rolled behind the pine. But very soon 
Wayne saw him, too, crawling off, apparently dragging 
one leg as he went. And at last he was swallowed up 
by the brushwood. 

It was then Wayne became conscious that he had dis- 
covered Norris’s and Marat’s secret. They had planned 
to cripple Lafitte Goya, and so put an end to the fear of 
him that so much possessed his men. With Goya put 
out of the power of activity to interfere, the men would 
follow their own inclinations, which the Mercie/s crew 
hoped would take the form of flight. And he found much 
satisfaction in the thought that Marat had so contrived 
that Goya should make the first move to shoot. 

Directly, Wayne heard Jean Marat’s voice calling him 
and Loyo to follow, as he meant to crawl through the 
brush to a vantage point by the beach, and so observe what 
should become of the enemy. 


CHAPTER XXVII 


THE MESSAGE ON THE ARROW — THE MIGUEL SAILS 



O sooner had Norris, Robert, and Julian got their 


jL ^ boat over the reef, and their sail trimmed, than 
Norris — at the steering oar — set the boys at so dispos- 
ing hats and jackets as to make it appear — from a dis- 
tance — that the skiff bore a goodly number of pas- 
sengers. 

May as well do all we can to make those Dagoes be- 
lieve weVe all left the little island,’' he said. 

He kept the boat well out to sea, to cripple the vision 
of the enemy. They were soon well in view of the bunk- 
house. 

“ There they are — they see us,” said Robert. 

They’re going up the beach,” added Julian. 

‘‘ Wondering if we’ve got the treasure,” said Norris. 

Come on, you loggerheads ; take a look at our hat shop.” 

Goya will soon be going down to the little island to 
see what we’ve been doing,” observed Julian. 

‘‘ Yes,” agreed Norris, and he’ll meet up with some 
kind of a surprise when he gets there. — Well, we’ve got 
to hurry and fix up our little entertainment for those that 
stay behind.” 


253 


254 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


** I wish I could see something of Ray/’ said Robert. 

I wonder where they’ve got him ? ” 

‘‘ You’ll never pick him out with your binoculars,” 
offered Norris. They’ve got him in the bunk-house, 
under a guard. And I’ll bet they wish they had a chain 
for his tongue,” laughed Norris. 

“ Yes, they’ll worry Ray nix” said Robert. “ It 
wouldn’t be Ray if he didn’t get some fun out of even 
those fellows.” 

Haul in a little on the sheet, Julian,” said Norris, 
veering some toward the coast. “ We’ll soon be there.” 

The boat had left the lower end of the island far be- 
hind, and soon it splashed through the breakers on the 
reef, and covering a short space of the lagoon, nestled 
up to the side of the Mercier. Joe, Phil, Leslie, Charlie, 
and Rufe stood by the rail. 

‘‘What luck, fellows?” said Phil. 

“And where are the others?” from Charlie. 

“ Oh, we left them to guard the treasure,” said Rob- 
ert. 

“ And what about it — did you find it? ” said Joe. 

“ Yes, we located it,” returned Norris. 

“ Hurrah! ” cried Phil. “ Where is it? ” 

The sail furled, the three tumbled over the Mercier's 
rail, and the story was soon told. 

“ And now,” said Norris, “ we’ve got to hustle and do 
our bit.” 

Rufe hurriedly fixed up a snack ; and before noon had 


THE MESSAGE ON THE ARROW 


255 

passed, Leslie and Charlie rowed Norris, Robert, Joe, and 
Phil to shore. 

Now, boys,’’ said Norris, as Leslie and Charlie pre- 
pared to row back to the schooner, ** don’t worry about 
us; we may stay some time. Just keep a lookout. 
Good-bye.” 

The shore party made across the ridge, and went at a 
good pace down the west side of the hills. Norris bore 
Goya’s rifle; the others were unburdened. They trudged 
on above a mile, in silence, each busied with his own 
thoughts. 

Now, I’ve been thinking,” then said Norris, about 
how we’re going to get this notice to those fellows. We 
want them to get it and read it in a hurry. We want 
to rush the thing while everything is hot.” 

“ Shoot it to them on an arrow,” suggested Robert. 
“ Can’t we make a bow ? ” 

''Good!” said Norris. "The stem of a palm leaf 
will make a good bow; but we’ve got to have a cord.” 

" I always carry some in my pocket,” said Robert. 

Joe proclaimed that his pockets also held cord, and 
of various sizes. 

" Well, here’s the place,” said Norris, " where we 
stopped to stuff our effigy, when we went down to give 
those Dagoes that other invite to dig out. We’ll make 
our preparations here again.” 

Joe had soon fashioned the bow; for it meant merely 
to cut notches for the string at either end of a length of 


256 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


palm-leaf stem. And Robert found a handful of strong, 
straight reeds, which made very good arrows. Robert 
practiced with the improvised arm, and found that he 
could send the arrows a goodly flight. 

“ That’ll do our business,” declared Norris. We can 
easily get one of those to the house from some cover.” 

The march was resumed. Twenty minutes’ walk 
brought the four close to the southern end of the forest, 
and at the very edge of the screening undergrowth. The 
bunk-house was in view; and Norris pointed out to Joe 
and Phil the mounds that marked the little make-believe 
cemetery. But Robert was pointing to another object. 

‘'Yes, by jove!” said Norris. “There’s the effigy 
still hanging in the tree. They’re too superstitious to 
touch it.” 

“ Gee ! ” said Phil. “ Don’t half blame them ; it’s an 
ugly-looking thing. And see how it swings when the 
breeze hits it.” 

Robert had his binoculars turned across the op^n space 
to the house. “ Don’t see a soul,” he said. 

Norris tried a look. “ I hope they haven’t all gone 
down to the little island,” said he. 

“ What would they do with Ray? ” questioned Joe. 

“ Oh, they’re in the house, or on the other side, I 
guess,” said Norris. “ Let’s crawl down to the bunch 
of brush, out there. That’s as close as we can get.” 

Presently all four crouched in the shelter of the clump 
of brush. 


THE MESSAGE ON THE ARROW 


257 


Better try the range with an arrow,” suggested Nor- 
ris, “ while no one’s looking.” 

Robert let fly one of the arrows; and it went fairly 
under the shelter where stood the long table. 

“Fine!” declared Norris. “Now let me have your 
best one.” 

Norris produced the paper on which he had written the 
notice — the exact copy of the one he had left with Jean 
Marat, on the little island. He wound the paper round 
the arrow and tied it smooth, and then handed it to 
Robert. 

“ Now we’ve got to attract them if they’re there,” he 
said. “ Phil, you’ve got a good bellows, let’s hear you 
breathe in your whistle. — Wait till Slicky’s ready.” 

Robert set the message-bearing arrow to the bow- 
string. 

“ Ready,” he said. 

Phil then put his whistle to his mouth. The result sent 
a flock of cranes into the air. And directly, two forms 
appeared round the corner of the house; another came out 
the back door. 

“ Now, Slicky,” said Norris. 

Robert pulled on the bow-string. The arrow went out 
on its curved flight, and struck somewhere close to the 
table. The men were seen to dive for it. In a few mo- 
ments the boys’ binoculars revealed the interesting ex- 
pressions in some of the faces, as the men held the un- 
rolled message of warning up to a reading. 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


258 

“ It^s doing its work, I guess, said Norris, as he 
gazed through the glasses. 

‘‘ Yes,'' said Joe, just watch their mouths going." 

And they do a lot of talking with hands too," said 
Robert. 

‘‘ Yes," said Norris. You tie a Dago's hands and 
he's as dumb as a cracked bell that’s lost its clapper. Say, 
I’ve just got to have a shot at something. Now just 
watch that cook-house smoke-stack.” 

He raised his rifle and fired. 

‘‘ A miss," and “ No go,” declared the boys. 

Don’t tell Marat,” begged Norris. But now look 
again." 

Norris fired again. 

“There! You plunked a hole right through her!" 
said Phil. 

“ But to see the men get inside at the first shot ! ” said 
Joe. 

“ Now back to the woods, boys," said Norris. 

Crawling and running, heads down, they got back in 
the shelter of the forest. 

“ Now then," began Norris, as the four stopped 
amongst the trees, “ we can climb this last hill, and get 
into the low brush and see what’ll be doing.” 

On the way, Joe found a spring, at which he replen- 
ished his canteen ; and when they had gained the vantage 
point on the hill’s brow, they made a meal out of their 
pockets, as they watched. The house and most of the 


THE MESSAGE ON THE ARROW 259 

south beach was in view, and as well the schooner Miguel, 
where she lay at anchor, down near the point. But again 
there was no sign of life anywhere, that they could see. 

I guess they’ll keep under cover for a little while,” 
said Norris. But,” he added, I’d give something to 
know what’s going on down on the little island.” 

“ I’ll bet that Bert or somebody is on that hill down 
yonder,” said Robert. I could easy see him with the 
glasses if he was to stand up — it’s only a mile and a 
half. But of course he’s keeping down just as we are.” 

And then a long hour, the hottest of that August day, 
passed slowly on without any sight of those at the bunk- 
house. It was Joe that aroused the others to a sitting 
posture with an announcement. 

There’s a boat ! ” he said. 

Other eager glasses joined his, to watch the coming of 
a boat round the northwest point of the little island. 

“ It’s Goya’s crowd,” said Norris. 

The oars flashed in the sun, as the boat came steadily 
nearer. When it touched the beach, men from the house 
hurried down. And then the boys saw them lift a man 
from the boat and bear him toward the building. 

'‘That’s Goya, his fangs pulled,” declared Norris; and 
his tone and manner showed his satisfaction. 

" I don’t see how you can tell,” said Joe, dubiously. 
" Phil’s ‘glasses aren’t any stronger than mine.” 

Norris laughed. “ You see. I’ve a little double sight 
of my own.” And he winked slyly. 


26 o 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Robert looked round from where he crouched in the 
brush; and his eyes shone with a sudden, new light. 

Aw ! ” he said. “ Now I know why you and Cap- 
tain Marat wanted to find out whlb was the best shot. 
And I guess I know what you were ’getting your heads 
together about, down there.’’ 

Smiling, Norris nodded confession to Robert’s implica- 
tion. And then he related to the boys how he and Marat 
had agreed between them that there appeared to be but one 
way to break Lafitte Goya’s power over his men. 

“ You see,” said Norris, the men would have cleared 
out before this, if Goya hadn’t got them cowed. And 
Captain Marat and I figured that if we could cripple him 
a little, enough so he couldn’t get round — why, the men 
would up sail and light out the next time they got good 
in the notion. And I guess our notice of warning — 
about the wireless and the gunboat — will do that busi- 
ness, now they’ve got it.” 

Well, then Captain Marat did it for Goya down 
there,” ventured Robert. 

^‘Yes,” assented Norris. ‘‘He was going to lay for 
him and give him a lead pill in the foot. And I guess he 
did, all right. I never saw a fellow shoot like he can. 
Of course it isn’t pleasant to take a pot-shot like that, 
but—” 

“ Well, he deserved worse than that,” declared Phil. 

(Of course, it was not till later that Norris learned 
that Marat had given Goya his chance.) 


THE MESSAGE ON THE ARROW 261 


For some little time, there was no further movement 
visible down at the house. Then suddenly several of 
the men appeared out at the back ; and at once there began 
the business of pulling things out of the cook-house. 

‘‘By Jove! the thing’s working all right, or I’m mis- 
taken,” said Norns. “ They’re after the stores.” 

“ There’s a fellow with a rifle,” said Robert, “ going 
down toward the house from the east shore.” 

“ Been watching the Mercier” suggested Norris. 
“ He’ll soon get some news.” 

The man disappeared from view behind the house. 
But soon he, or another, was seen hurrying back eastward. 

“ There he goes back to tell the rest of the guard,” 
said Joe. 

The men down at the house were now seen to be carry- 
ing goods round the corner of the building. 

“ That settles it — they’re going to clear out,” said 
Norris. 

“ Look there! ” bade Robert. “ I see our fellows on 
the hill down there.” 

' The three pairs of binoculars were trained on the high- 
est point of the little island. 

“ Suppose we signal them,” said Robert. 

“ Go to it,” returned Norris. 

“ Come on, Joe.” And Robert led the way, crawling 
back out of view of the house, but still keeping in view 
of the hill-top on the little isle. 

With a signal-flag tied to a stick -out of the brush, Rob- 


262 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


ert had soon got the attention of those on the island be- 
low. 

“ Tell them about the stores,” called Norris. And 
as soon as the Dagoes have gone, we’re coming after 
them.” 

The slow exchange of signals was finally completed, 
and Joe and Robert crawled back to their comrades. 

What did they say? ” questioned Norris. 

‘‘ Only, ‘ Glad ’ and * No hurry,’ ” returned Robert. 

Half the afternoon was now gone, and the sun was los- 
ing some of its intensity. There was an end to all visible 
activity down at the house ; and, except once, when some 
one visited the well, for some hours, scarcely a bird was 
to be seen moving near the place. The boys grumbled, 
now and then, over the suspense. 

Maybe they aren’t going, after all,” suggested Phil. 

Norris shook his head. I guess maybe they’re wait- 
ing for dark,” he said. Goya can’t interfere; he’s got 
all he can attend to, you bet, in his leg.” 

The sun was gone pretty low, when some one appeared 
at the back. And directly, smoke came out of the cook- 
house stack.” 

“ They haven’t lost their appetites, anyhow,” said Phil. 

I wish Rufe would bring us something good.” 

I hope they’re treating Ray right,” said Joe. 

‘‘ Yes,” said Robert. But they didn’t starve Wayne 
and me none, even if the cooking wasn’t exactly like 
Rufe’s.” 


THE MESSAGE ON THE ARROW 263 

And Ray’ll get it out of them somehow,” said Nor- 
ris, ‘‘ trust him for that. — I guess we’ll have him with 
us again tonight.” 

The sun set, and dusk came on, and still there were no 
signs of a final pulling up stakes on the part of the enemy 
below. 

Well, boys,” then said Norris, we’ll have to get 
down there somewhere, if we’re going to see anything 
right. The moon’s pretty bright, but the shadows are 
all the blacker; and we can hide among the trees.” 

So down the hillside and through the forest the four 
went, finally to take a stand in the dark shadows close to 
the swinging effigy again. The figure hung there, an 
eerie mass, sometimes spinning round as a moderate puff 
caught it in the clothes; now and again a moonbeam 
struck, and lighted, the death’s-head face of it. 

Here again there was a long, uninterrupted wait. At 
Norris’s suggestion, the watchers took turns, two and 
two, for some sleep. 

“ We could all go to sleep here,’^ said Norris, for all 
chance of being bothered by those fellows — with that 
thing hanging there.” 

It was half after two, the moon just gone down, when 
Robert shook Norris and Phil awake. 

“ I just heard a noise from the boats,” explained 
Robert. 

There it is again,” said Joe. Sounded like throw- 
ing in oars.” 


264 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Yes, I heard that,” said Norris. 

Ten minutes passed, and they made out two dark 
masses moving westward along the shore ; and they ‘heard 
the muffled sounds of the oars in the thole-pins. 

They’re off at last,” said Norris. 

The four stole on in the shadows, and presently passing 
the little house toward the west, stopped opposite the 
schooner Miguel, Soon they heard voices from the 
Miguel. Next came the rattle of the anchor chain. 
Then the schooner began to move toward the passage. 

Towing her out,” suggested Norris. 

After a time came the distant rattle of the blocks. 

The sails are going up,” said Robert. 

And then the dark mass of the Miguel gradually faded 
away to the west. 

Well, boys,” said Norris, they’re gone.” 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


NEWS OF RAY 

T he boys responded to Norris’s annunciation with 
sighs of relief. 

‘‘ I never felt so good ! ” declared Phil. I wish I 
could holler.” 

I always knew we’d beat them,” said Robert. 

And now for Ray,” said Joe. 

All turned and walked briskly back toward the bunk- 
house. They had barely turned the nearest comer of the 
house, when Norris, spreading his arms, brought a halt. 

Light shone out of a near window. Norris crept for- 
ward and looked in on empty bunks. The light came 
fiiom the far end. He led the way thither. 

I believe they’re all gone, but it looks like they left 
Ray a light,” he said, as he went. 

The curtain was drawn over the end window; but 
through an interstice at the edge, Norris could see a bed 
illumined by a candle. And there lay Lafitte Goya, a 
pair of revolvers on the blanket, within reach of his hand. 
Goya groaned and swore alternately. Once he seemed 
as if going to rise, but fell back with a groan. 

Come behind me, Slicky,” said Norris. Joe, you 
knock on the window when I get to the door.” 

265 


266 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Norris, rifle at ready got round to the door, Robert at 
his back. Then came a knocking at the window, near 
Goya’s head. Norris pushed open the door and stepped 
in ; and, moving down between the bunks, he commanded 
Goya to hold up his hands. 

Robert, without awaiting a bidding, hurried forward 
and snatched up the two revolvers from beside Goya. 
Joe and Phil were summoned in, and all looked about for 
Ray. There was none but Goya visible in the house. 
Robert ran up and down among the bunks with his flash- 
light. No Ray there. 

Norris then demanded of Goya the whereabouts of the 
prisoner. 

Goya shook his head. I don’ know. I don’ see 
w’at they do.” And he wandered off in a storm of 
cursing, directed against those who had abandoned him. 

‘‘ I don’t believe they took him along,” said Norris. 
” Wouldn’t do them any good.” 

Maybe they freed him, and he’s gone up to the Mer- 
cier” suggested Robert. 

Norris turned again to the groaning Goya. 

Did they free the prisoner? ” he demanded. 

‘‘ Na-na ! ” broke out Goya, in the impatience of his 
pain. I don’ see w’at they do.” And again he mixed 
groans with cursing. 

Robert slipped out, and directly returned with the in- 
formation that the Mercier’s second boat lay by the shell 
pile, the oars and sail still in it. 


NEWS OF RAY. 


267 


Well/' said Norris, suppose you and Joe row over 
after Wayne and the rest. Phil and I’ll stay here/’ 

Four pairs of hands grasped the boat, and dragged it to 
the water. It was a row of but a third of a mile. About 
midway of the passage, Robert blew a shrill blast of his 
whistle. This was answered from the hill of the little 
isle. Then he blew a signal — Come.” 

When the boat touched the beach, the two boys had not 
long to wait. Wayne, Captain Marat, Bert, and Loyo 
were soon heard to holla, back among the palms. 

Here! ” called Joe and Robert. 

What’s the news? ” said Wayne, coming up. 

They’ve sailed away,” said Robert. And they left 
Lafitte Goya in the house. He’s in bed cursing them, 
and groaning with a sore foot. Ray isn’t there — no 
sign of him.” 

‘‘ Maybe they free’ heem,” said Marat, and he have 
gone to the Mercier.” 

All had embarked, and the boat moved back across the 
sound again. 

That’s what we suppose,” said Robert. 

"‘Won’t Goya tell?” asked Wayne. 

“ He says he doesn’t know,” returned Robert ; doesn’t 
know anything except that he’s been abandoned and has 
got a big pain in his foot.” 

“ Ha I thee plan work ver’ good,” said Marat. 

Again the boat touched the beach, and all gathered in 
the bunkhouse, where lay the groaning Goya. 


268 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


But little time Was given io mutual explanations, and a 
final attempt was made to gain news of Ray from Lafitte 
Goya, who again impatiently protested ignorance. Then, 
on Captain Marat’s suggestion, Norris and Robert hoisted 
sail in the recovered boat and voyaged to the Mercier; 
first to seek news of Ray, next to navigate the schooner 
down to a new anchorage between the islands. 

Day was dawning as the boat moved away. Wayne, 
Bert, and Loyo turned from the beach into the house. 
Goya continued to give expression to his pain in groans. 
Wayne addressed Marat. 

I’d like to dress his foot,” he said. 

Yes,” said Marat, nodding. 

Goya’s boot had already been cut away from the foot. 
The self-styled pirate descendant offered no protest, as 
Wayne unwound a filthy rag from the injured member. 
Joe and Phil got out to the cook-house, and soon had 
water boiling ; and Loyo made a hurried trip to the little 
house down the beach for some clean white cloth. The 
rifle-ball had torn through the flesh of the foot’s sole, 
making a painful wound ; letting out considerable blood, 
thus furnishing a leak to most of the spunk of this miser- 
able outcast. The wound was soon cleansed, and a clean 
white bandage covered the foot. Goya’s lessened pain 
was shown in the greatly lessened groaning. But if he 
was grateful, he showed nothing of it. 

Loyo and Joe, the while, were busying themselves in 
the cook-house, with preparing a meal out of some stores 


NEWS OF RAY 269 

left there. Joe suddenly burst into the house with a 
paper in his hand. 

“ Found it pinned on the outside of the back door,” 
he explained. 

Marat took the paper in his fingers and gave it a mo- 
ment’s study. 

‘‘ Ah ! ” he said, thees is sign’ by Gomez. It ees in 
Spanish. He say he weel sell to us the ^ much talk ’ 
prisoner for hees (Gomez’s) life. And he say, sen’ the 
answer by one boy — alone, who shall go in the forest 
back of the little house ; and then he should make whistle, 
and Gomez, he come.” 

Then they left Gomez behind, too,” observed Wayne; 
“ and Ray’s all right.” 

“ Yes,” said Marat. And he have take Ray into the 
forest for ransom for hees life.” 

Loyo was setting the food on the table under the shel- 
ter at the back. While they ate, Jean Marat and the boys 
discussed their new situation, especially with relation to 
the two of the enemy camp left behind — the worst of the 
lot. 

We could Ian’ them on the coas’ some place,” Marat 
was saying, “ but thee boat they sail here in is down on 
thee beach; and I theenk they be ver’ glad if we led them 
go ’way in thad.” 

Wayne insisted on his selection for the one to go to 
meet Gomez. And he was soon moving down the path, 
now in broad day, to the little structure where he and 


270 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Robert had first slept on their coming to the islands. 
Arrived at the house, he passed in among the oaks and 
palms at the back. When he had come to the fringe of 
the underbrush, he put his signal-whistle to his mouth and 
blew two blasts ; then waited. 

Some minutes passed, and he heard a crackling in the 
brush. Directly, Gomez appeared. The man crept for- 
ward cautiously, holding a rifle in his hands, and looking 
about as if fearful of an onslaught. 

It’s all right,” said Wayne. I’m all alone — and 
I’m not armed.” 

You fin’ w’at I write? ” said Gomez. 

Yes,” said Wayne. 

The man stood silently attentive, waiting on further 
speech from Wayne. 

We have decided,” continued Wayne, if you free 
our comrade, we’ll let you go.” 

“ You led me go ’way — sure? ” persisted Gomez. 

‘‘ Yes,” said Wayne. We’ll let you go away in the 
boat you came over here in last. But you will have to 
take Goya with you.” 

Gomez grunted ready acceptance of this condition, and 
beckoning Wayne to follow, led the way back through 
the brush. They had gone nearly a mile, as it seemed 
to Wayne, when Gomez came to a sudden stand, fronting 
a small oak, on the same instant letting out a grunt of 
surprise and discomfiture. He stooped at the tree’s foot 


NEWS OF RAY 


271 


and examined the ground, and fumbled a knotted rope, 
round the tree. 

Wayne was quick to divine the trouble; Ray had es- 
caped. 

“ That’s all right,” Wayne reassured Gomez. ‘'If he’s 
got away, he’ll find us. And we’ll accept your intention 
to free him, and let you go just the same.” 

Gomez’s face was eloquent of the relief he felt. 

“ You tell ’em? ” he said. 

“ Yes, I’ll tell them,” said Wayne. “ It’ll be all right.” 

So they went back, Gomez mumbling to himself, doubt- 
less in wonderment as to the how of Ray’s deliverance. 
Wayne on his part gave himself to wondering if Ray 
would be in time to catch the Mercier before it should 
have left its old anchorage to go down to the new. 

And so the two, so recently of enemy camps, trudged 
on together, to all appearance in perfectly friendly rela- 
tion, each to the other. Arrived at the little house, 
Gomez expressed a wish to remain there till he should 
sail away; doubtless he feared to meet Loyo. And so 
Wayne went on alone, back to his comrades. 


CHAPTER XXIX 


RAY IN THE ENEMY CAMP 

N OW back to that night when Ray’s comrades left 
him squatting by the boat, while they groped into 
the interior of the little island, in search of Julian’s trea- 
sure. He presently rose, and took a few turns up and 
down the beach ; and finally he seated himself on the bow 
of the boat, and listened to the surf breaking on the reef, 
which was here fairly close in. He tried through the 
dark to discern the white of the breach, and so had his 
back to the wood encroaching on the beach. 

Suddenly he heard something behind him, and turned ; 
but hands gripped his arms, and a voice hissed in his ears 
— No call out ! ” and he felt a revolver-butt, pushed 
against his cheek, warning of a clubbing if he should not 
comply. 

He was pushed into the boat he had been guarding ; his 
captors shoved off, and two of the four took up the oars 
and sent the boat at a lively rate up the shore. The men 
spoke but little, and that in whispers — in Spanish. Ray 
recognized Lafitte Goya as he that hissed the warning in 
his ear. Presently they joined the boat in which Goya 
had rowed over to the little isle ; and both boats were then 
pointed toward the larger island. 

272 


RAY IN THE ENEMY CAMP 


273 

Ray felt much dissatisfied with himself — to be caught 
napping while on guard; he had not even time to sound 
an alarm to his friends. He determined to make effort 
to mend the thing. So, when the boats had got some 
way from shore, and the man holding Ray had relaxed 
his vigilance somewhat, Ray contrived to get hold of his 
whistle. He took a deep breath and blew hard. He was 
pounced on at once, his call cut short off ; and he supposed 
his effort had been vain. But, as we have learned, his 
call, maimed as it was, was yet heard. 

He got no second opportunity; and Goya cursed him 
roundly — in language Ray did not pick the words of, 
though he sensed the heat of it — and urged the men at 
the oars. And then Ray heard Marat’s gun, and he knew 
his friends were alive to the situation. 

Though Ray suffered discomfort of his predicament, he 
experienced nothing like despair. They wont eat me, 
anyhow,” he reasoned. “ They wouldn’t size me up as a 
juicy piece if they were cannibals. It’s just their old 
game of having somebody for ransom. I wonder if 
they’ll figure me worth all of that treasure they’re after. 
I wonder what kind of a sty they’ll put me into. I’ll 
squeal right if they shove me into that cave.” Thus ran 
his thoughts. 

The boat touched shore, and Ray was attended to the 
house by ungentle hands. 

“ Must think I’m a desperate character,” said he, aloud. 


274 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Vm the most harmless little cuss you ever saw — ask 
Wayne.’^ 

The men only grunted, and pushed him in through the 
door, and down to an end bunk. A boat-chain was then 
produced, and linked to both ankles, so close that he could 
not have put one foot six inches before the other. And 
then a guard was appointed, who began his duties by 
searching the captive for a possible file. The others 
went out. 

Ray, always philosophical, was quite ready to make the 
most of his situation. He sat on the edge of his bed, 
jingled the chain with his feet a bit, and attracting the 
guard, pointed down to it. 

“ That thing’s no good,” he said. When the time 
comes that’ll melt off and go up in smoke.” And he 
snapped his fingers to show how quick it would go. 

The man shrugged his shoulders and set a puzzled look 
on his prisoner — half inclined to take him seriously. 

There came a short period of quiet, during which Ray 
gazed at the lantern and whistled abstractedly. Then he 
looked up again to his guard. 

Say ! ” he began, so suddenly as to cause the guard 
to jump. Did your mamma ever spank you on the 
bare ? ” 

The man again shrugged his shoulders incomprehen- 
sively, though like all his comrades he understood English. 

Oh, she did,” said Ray, assuming an answer. Did 
it sting? ” 


RAY IN THE ENEMY CAMP 


275 

The man merely continued his puzzled gaze on the 
prisoner. 

‘'If your mother was here/' continued Ray, “ she’d 
tell you that Goya’s only stringing you. He wouldn’t 
give you a piece of that treasure even if he got it. — And 
he won’t ever see it.” And Ray smiled his assurance. 
“ He won’t ever get a look in. No, sir, that treasure’s 
safe!” 

Ray lay down for a time. And then came in Goya and 
some of the others, talking at a rate. So Ray sat up 
again; and watched the men roll into their bunks. 

Presently Ray got an inclination to break in upon the 
guard’s comfortable lethargy. With a sudden movement, 
he turned a startled look on his man, held up a finger, and 
appeared to listen. 

The guard pricked up his ears for the sound. 

“Sh!” said Ray. “I hear them making knots — 
hangman’s knots.” A momentary pause; then suddenly 
— “ Did you see that thing hanging out there in the tree ? ” 
And he made as if pulling on a rope, round his neck, and 
protruding his tongue in mimickry of choking. 

The guard fairly squirmed in his chair, with discom- 
fort. And he called something down the aisle between 
the bunks; and Goya came forward. Ray lay down 
again, face to the wall, while the guard rattled off his 
complaint. Then Goya spoke. 

“ Na I No talk — you ! ” he thundered at Ray. “No 
talk!” 


276 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Ray turned to look, and waved his hand, and said : 

Aw, cheese the racket — vamoose! Go to bed, you 
— I want to go to sleep.” And he turned his head, and 
began to breathe audibly, simulating sleep. The while, 
Goya sought to ease his discomfiture with cursing. 

Ray’s scoffing, cavalier manner upset him, quite. He 
began to see he’d caught a Tartar, and could not but real- 
ize that it was likely to hurt discipline — his hold on the 
men — if it should appear to them that this boy had 
power to belittle him. 

Ray was soon asleep in truth, and slept none the worse 
for the situation he was in. 

In the morning, he awoke to find a different man on 
guard. He got himself to a sitting posture, and looked 
at the man ; rubbed his eyes, and looked again. 

‘‘ Hello ! ” he says. A new porter. Is breakfast 
ready in the dining ky-ar ? Order ham and eggs for two. 
I like them turned over.” 

Beside Goya, a number of the men chanced to be near ; 
and they observed Ray curiously, as he carried himself 
so boldly. Goya strode forward, furious in mien ; Ray’s 
attitude again irritated him. 

You no give order here ! ” He glared menacingly. 

‘‘ Hello — who are you ? ” returned Ray, arms on 
knees, and glancing toward Goya with exasperating non- 
chalance. And then he looked down at the chain on his 
ankles and laughed, in a manner of forgetting Goya’s 
presence. 


RAY IN THE ENEMY CAMP 


277 


Goya sputtered impotently, but couldn’t find a word. 
Ray completely nonplussed him. Then he turned to the 
men and ordered them out, and he followed. 

Ray presently looked up, feigning surprise, and ad- 
dressed his guard. 

‘‘ Well, what’s become of the show? ” he said. Then, 
hearing dishes rattle on the table outside, he added: 
“ Say — come to think of it. I’m not hungry this morning. 
Tell the cook to hold off on that ham and egg order. But 
when you go to your breakfast, John, bring me a biscuit 
or something. I may want it after a while. Now see 
you don’t forget it.” And he shot the man a mandatory 
look — so masterful, it made him wince. 

Ray was a quick thinker. And he had reasoned that 
Goya — irritated by his breakfast order, and all — would 
command the cook to withhold food from the prisoner; 
and so rehabilitate, in the minds of the men, his authority, 
so much belittled by Ray’s demeanor. So Ray deter- 
mined to be before him. 

He read Goya rightly; for such was Goya’s intention, 
though he had not as yet acted on it. And when the 
guard was sent out by a relief, to get his own breakfast, 
Goya’s ears were singed with hearing the guard telling 
the cook that the prisoner had instructed him to say that 
nothing was to be prepared for his breakfast; he was not 
hungry. 

Losing self-control, Goya, in a voice weak of rage, 


278 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


told the cook to give the boy nothing all day — or any 
time — any time. 

Some of the men exchanged glances. An intelligent 
onlooker would have observed that Goya had lost caste 
with his men by his exhibition of weakness. 

When the guard went back to his post, he carried some 
bread anJ meat in his pocket. He doubtless felt that his 
blooming, imperturbable, imperious prisoner would, some- 
how, make it extremely uncomfortable for him if he came 
back empty-handed. He and the prisoner were soon 
alone, and this food found its way into Ray’s hand. Ray 
took it with a condescending air. 

“ Well,” he said, “ I guess I better eat it now — one 
time’s as good as another.” And he ate the food, with ap- 
parently indifferent relish, though he was really very hun- 
gry, and it filled the bill quite to his taste. 

Long before the morning had passed, Ray got evidence 
that something or other was forward. The men bustled 
in and out in some excitement. Three men went out 
carrying rifles. And Goya, he made out, was off on some 
expedition. Finally, a remaining four settled down 
within, and jabbered away for some time. At last, Ray 
began to have a craving for variety; time dragged with 
him. 

“ Looky here, fellows,” says he. I suppose you’ve 
all been out to have a look at the cemetery? — grave- 
yard? — bone-yard? And did you notice the far little 
grave? — the little grave? That’s for little Goya — a 


RAY IN THE ENEMY CAMP 


279 


little man who tries to make a big voice. He ought to be 
hanging onto his mamma’s apron-strings.” And he 
laughed. And the men looked as if in wonder at his reck- 
lessness. He’ll soon have on his last neck-tie,” he con- 
tinued. And he made show of a man, tongue out, chok- 
ing in a hangman’s noose. 

At this eloquent suggestion, the men eyed one another 
uneasily. It was just then a shrill whistle, somewhere 
without, caused the men to jump in alarm. Some hur- 
ried out the back, some out the front door. 

Next, Ray heard much excited talking outside. And 
he would have been much entertained, had he known it 
was over the notice of warning, just shot to the house on 
an arrow, by Robert. 

Ray had made a number of unsuccessful attempts to get 
it out of the men — the cause of all the excitement, when 
Goya’s party returned. And he was not a little puzzled 
when he observed the wounded Goya being carried in, 
groaning, and laid on his bed at the far end of the house. 

Then, while Gomez waited on Lafitte Goya, all the 
others got their heads together outside Ray’s end of the 
house; and the excessive buzzing of voices equalled that 
of a school-yard in recess time. Worse than a sewing- 
bee,” said Ray, aloud. Wonder what’s up.” 

Even the guard had deserted his post to join the caucus 
without. 

That Goya’s been stung,” Ray continued his specu- 
lations. '' I’ll bet our fellows are up to something. 


28 o 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


That whistle was one of theirs; and Til bet a firecracker 
our fellows know how Goya got hurt” 

The chattering outside the wall finally ceased; the ex- 
cited conference was over. That the men had come to 
some determination directly became plain to Ray, for 
there began a bustling activity that told of preparations 
for some definite movement. 

“ Something doing all right, Ray confided to himself. 

At last there came a lull. And then the men fell into 
another kind of activity. It was the activity of unem- 
ployment. It seemed to Ray, they behaved very much 
like a bunch of passengers in a railway station, awaiting a 
train reported some hours late. Mostly, they wore their 
hands in their breeches pockets. Some tramped up and 
down between the bunks, oblivious of, or indifferent to, 
Goya’s groaning and cursing ; there was now no cringing 
avoidance of his sharp tongue. Others moved out and 
in the front door, as if on the lookout for the belated train. 
They talked but seldom. The uneasiness and suspense 
were manifest in every movement. They kept away from 
Lafitte Goya. They ignored Gomez, whom they seemed 
to have ostracised. Gomez dogged it back and forth 
among them, at times, always as if alert to dodge a blow 
or a kick. 

And so it continued to sundown, and even far into the 
night. Ray lay in his bunk, waiting for some new turn 
in events. At last he spoke up, startling some of the 
silent ones from their gloomy reveries. 


RAY IN THE ENEMY CAMP 281 

Say I ’’ he began. YouYe the most unsociable 
bunch of owls that ever hooted at the moon. Why don’t 
you whistle — tune up — dance a ‘ hoe-down,’ fandango, 
or something? Enjoy yourself your last day on earth.” 

The men looked, grunted, shrugging their shoulders, 
and relapsed into their uneasy quiet again. 

But when at last Ray could no longer see the white of 
the moonlight at the edge of the window-shade, there 
came a general buzz of low muttering. And in five min- 
utes the front door vomited the whole company, barring 
Goya, who still lay at the other end of the house, voicing 
his pain. 

Gee ! Some one must have found a gold-mine,” ob- 
served Ray. 

Ten minutes passed; and then Gomez stole in at the 
back door. Ray saw that he shook in some sort of per- 
turbation. He set a candle on the table, and producing 
a piece of paper, began to write. When he finished, he 
went out at the back, directly to come in again with a 
hammer and chisel, and some pieces of rope, and a lan- 
tern. This time he came creeping toward Ray’s bunk. 
A knife gleamed in his belt. 

I gon’ sell you to your peoples,” he said, half facing 
Ray, in his usual manner. '' Stan’ up an’ make your 
ban’s behin’.” 

Ray complied. Going to sell me to my peoples,” he 
said, half in soliloquy. Wonder what they think I’m 
worth?” Gomez was knotting the rope on his wrists. 


282 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


At the other end of the house, Goya continued his quarrel 
with his pain. Say,” Ray addressed Gomez. Sell 
Goya, too. My peoples will give more for him — just 
to hear his music. It’ll sound good to them, you bet ! ” 

Then he sat on the edge of the bunk, while Gomez 
worked at prying open links of the chain, soon freeing 
his feet. Gomez then set Ray’s hat on his head, and said : 

Go oud the back.” 

Ray moved forward, Gomez following, holding a rope 
leash, fast to the bonds. Out the back door into the black 
night they went. The one driven, the other driving with 
a To righ’ — to lef’,” they moved toward the forest. 
On the way Gomez pulled a rifle out of a bush. 

Times stumbling, times scratched by the brush, they 
marched thus in the black forest for near a half hour. 
Then Gomez called a halt in a circle of brush at the foot 
of a tree. And soon he had the rope leash round the 
tree-trunk. 

Well,” now began Ray, “ what’s next, you old scare- 
crow? ” 

‘'We wait,” said Gomez. 

“Wait for what?” said Ray. “What is it you’re 
going to sell me for ? ” 

“ Na — no talk,” ordered Gomez. And Ray could get 
nothing more out of the man. 

The only sound was the distant breaking of the water 
on the reef. From time to time, Gomez made excursions 
away, short at first, but gradually lengthened in duration. 


RAY IN THE ENEMY CAMP 


283 

It was a weary time ; but finally day dawned. During the 
absences of Gomez, Ray worked at stretching his bonds, 
using his long fingers. And at last he slipped out one 
slender hand; a few moments, and the other hand was 
free. 

He pushed through toward the sound of the surf. 
Quickly gaining the beach, he took to the hard, moist 
sand, and made good speed to the north. 

Presently he stopped short. He thought he heard a 
whistle. A minute he listened. He heard no repetition, 
and decided he must have been mistaken. And so he set 
ofif on the run again. He came to marshy ground. He 
was near the stream that came from the hills. He turned 
east and plunged into the forest ; soon arrived at the base 
of the ridge. He climbed the ridge. Arrived at the top, 
he looked down on the lagoon to the Herder's anchorage. 
There was no Herder there ! He held his breath as his 
eyes swept all visible waters. Not a sight of her! 

He rushed down the east slope, through the trees, to 
the shore. 

“ She's gone! ” he told himself. And he felt an awful 
sinking within. 

But he soon got a grip on himself. 

“Oh, pshaw!” he said. “They’ve just moved her, 
somehow. — But they might have broken it to a fellow 
gently,” he complained. 

Since there was but the one way the Herder could have 
gone, Ray took up the march southward, on the beach. 


284 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


As he hurried on, he gave his mind to speculation as to 
the meaning of the Mercier's leaving the anchorage. He 
reasoned nothing ill of the thing, in view of Lafitte Goya’s 
state, and the actions of the men. It was Goya’s party 
that was in a bad way, if anything. And so he continued 
on, hoping to come up with good news. 

A half hour had hardly gone, when he turned the cor- 
ner of the island and came in view of the house where he 
had so recently lain captive. One glance down the beach 
revealed the other schooner still at the old anchorage, 
There was life on board. That’s where the men went,” 
he said. But no sign of the Mercier (it seemed). His 
heart began to fall again. 

He crept closer to the house, behind a screen of brush. 
Presently his eye glimpsed what seemed a familiar form, 
at the door. Hope urging, he ran to the house. Arrived 
at the corner, he heard Goya’s groaning through the 
boards. Then he crept along the wall, and a pleasing 
sound came to his ear. It was Wayne’s voice, within. 

Three strides brought Ray to the door. He knocked. 

Suddenly the talk within ceased. 

‘‘What’s that!” Again Wayne’s voice* 

“ Anybody home? ” called Ray. 

The door burst open. 

“ Ray ! ” called a number of voices, 

“ Hello, fellows,” said Ray. He stepped within. 
‘‘ How’s your liver? ” 


RAY IN THE ENEMY CAMP 285 

Looking round, Ray missed some of the company. 
** Where’s Slicky and Norris, and the rest? ” 

‘‘ They’re anchoring the Mercier down where the 
Miguel was,” said Wayne. 

Miguel was? ” said Ray. 

‘^Yes,” returned Wayne. '^Didn’t you know the 
Miguel had sailed ? ” 

“ Here they come, now,” said Phil, outside the door, 
** $ome in the boat, some on shore.” 


CHAPTER XXX 


THE TREASURE 

N orris brought every one from the Mercier, even 
Rufe, who had barely set foot on the island since 
the arrival three weeks ago. All faces beamed with good 
cheer. 

Well, by Jove! There's Ray I " said Norris, coming 
from the boat. Well, boy, what have you done with 
your Dago friends ? " 

Dunno," returned Ray. I guess they got peeved 
at Goya and me. All at once they hiked out — didn’t 
say where they were going, good-bye, or anything. But 
they left Gomez to play with me, seeing Goya had a sore 
toe, or something.” 

Gomez 1 ” said Norris, and his eyes went big. 

‘‘ Yes,” said Ray. '' I guess they got sore at him, too. 
He and I played horse, and he drove me up in the woods 
and hitched me to a tree, and — ” 

Say, you-all,” broke in Rufe. ‘‘ Whah is dat ’ar 
cook shanty you b’en a-talkin’ ’bout?” 

While Rufe took possession of the cook-house, and 
banged things about, setting to rights that important limb 
of the establishment, Marat, Norris, and the boys held 
final council over the disposition of Lafitte Goya and 
286 


THE TREASURE 287 

Gomez. The result of the conference was communicated 
to Goya by Captain Marat. 

** Thee boys have decide,’’ he said, “ to allow you and 
Gomez to sail away in your whale-boat.” 

Goya’s expression showed with what eagerness he 
grasped this offer of freedom. 

‘‘ W’en you will like to go? ” said Jean Marat. 

The man rose on his arms in bed. 

** Go now ! ” he said. 

“You feel well enough?” questioned Marat. 

“ Yez — yez ! Goya squirmed round and set his well 
foot on the floor in his eagerness. 

Marat and Wayne walked down to the little house to 
Gomez. Gomez was no less eager to quit the island at 
once. 

“ Well, come along w’en we call,” said Marat. 

“ You keep Loyo ’way? ” begged Gomez. 

“ Yes,” said Jean Marat. “ We won’t let Loyo see 
you.” 

And so, while some dragged the whale-boat to the 
water, others got sufficient food together; and a pair of 
crutches were improvised for Goya’s use; and the sail 
loosed. 

When Goya had taken his seat at the tiller, a whistle 
was blown ; and Gomez came sneaking up the beach, and 
with the nimbleness of a cat, leaped into the boat. Then 
the boys gave a strong shove, and the last remnants of 
the enemy left the shore. 


288 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


Ray spoke the parting shot. 

** Well, away you go” he said. ‘‘If you fellows de- 
cide to come back, the cemetery's all there waiting for 
you." 

‘‘ They’ll never come back if they can help it," said 
Norris. 

Gomez hauled up the sail, that caught the breeze at 
once ; and the boys watched till the boat was a wee speck 
on the western horizon. 

"Well, we’ve got it all to ourselves now," observed 
Robert. 

" Hurrah ! " shouted Phil. 

"Yes, all right," said Ray. "Whoop her up, Phil. 
It’s all a picnic from now on." 

" I want to thank all you boys," said Julian Lamartine, 
" and Captain Marat, and Mr. Norris." 

" That’s all right, Julian, boy," said Norris. " I, for 
one, never had so much good sport — and that’s saying 
some. And I’m going home and tell my folks about it — 
all that are left." And there was a wee pensive note in 
that last. 

Ray’s story of his adventures was interrupted by a 
banging on Rufe’s dish-pan. " Pan pan — pan pan — 
pan pan — pan pan ! ’’ it rang. 

" Eight bells, fellows," said Ray. " And I’m as hun- 
gry as a Shanghai rooster." 

Dinner over, preparations were made to get after Ju- 
lian’s treasure. The boat left the shore bearing Julian 


THE TREASURE 


289 

and Loyo, the principals in the business, and with them 
Wayne, Norris, Leslie, and Charles. Across the sound, 
and down the west shore of the little island they rowed, 
mindless of the broiling tropic sun. Happy faces turned 
to the west. It was down, over that rim of sea, the 
enemy had dropped out of their lives, never again to har- 
row them. 

They put the boat on the beach at the spot where Ray 
had been taken captive; and there being now no need to 
guard the boat, after pulling it out of reach of the tide, 
all pushed through the brush, and straight to the mouth 
of the cave. A light was made in the lantern, and then 
a few steps forward in the cool cavern, and the party 
stood where the little spring bubbled up. Wayne gave 
the shovel to Julian, and in a few minutes the copper coffer 
was uncovered again. 

‘'Well I say!’* said Norris. “That old fellow sure 
knew how to find a good hiding-place.” 

“ It is just like Mr. Pedro,” said black Loyo. “ He 
was alway very clever.” 

Wayne helped Julian to clear away sand and oyster 
shells from one side. 

“ Now pry it out with the pick,” suggested Wayne. 

The square copper box was pulled out of the little 
stream, and stood completely revealed, on the floor of the 
cave. 

“ He’s got it sealed all round the cover with pitch,” 
said Norris, looking close. 


290 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


And then the coffer was borne out into daylight and 
down to the boat; and within the hour, it stood on the 
table in the bunk-house, a wonderful show for a baker’s 
dozen pairs of eyes. 

'' I think I see that box last time jest about a year ago,” 
said Loyo. Pedro use’ to keep his papers in there — 
and I never noticed that he took it away.” 

Julian and Loyo knocked the pitch off the sides where 
the cover joined. And then Julian swung back the lid. 
A padding of old newspapers first presented, and then a 
square of white oilcloth; and on the top of a number of 
packets (all tied) lay a paper on which was written: 
$175,000.” In one corner nestled a soft leather bag; in 
another corner a large-mouthed bottle in which could be 
seen a paper, rolled. Julian had out the bottle, removed 
the cork, and pulled forth the paper. This he unrolled. 

A will,” said Norris. 

Julian read the will aloud. It bequeathed to Julian 
Lamartine all the possessions, real and personal, of Pedro 
Lamartine, including two store buildings on Chartres 
Street, New Orleans, and a business property in Pensa- 
cola. The will was duly attested, and bore the name of a 
Pensacola attorney. 

Next, Julian seized out the leather bag. He poured 
the contents into a large soup plate — handsfull of vari- 
ous-sized pearls. Even Loyo marvelled over the gems, 
so perfect in form and luster. 


THE TREASURE 


291 
He saved 


Pedro saved all the best ones,” he said, 
them for Julian.” 

Julian drew out of the bag a bit of paper. It was ad- 
dressed to himself, and recommended him to take the 
pearls to Paris, where they would find a most profitable 
market. 

** And from the looks of all those beauties,” said Nor- 
ris, they’ll bring a nice, comfortable fortune in them- 
selves.” 

‘‘ Yes,” said Loyo, who smilingly, and with a practiced 
eye, peered among the wee, white, glistening marbles, pok- 
ing with his contrasting black finger. Yes, and there 
ain’t less than twenty thousand dollars’ worth there, if I 
have learnt anything about pearls.” 

Say, I’d like to tell Goya what he missed,” interposed 
Ray. 

‘‘ There’s over a dozen mighty rare pearls there,” added 
Loyo. See this one, Julian — and this — and this here. 
Ain’t she jest got the color? ” And he pushed it with his 
finger. 

Yes,” said Julian. You see,” and he turned to the 
boys, “ Pedro taught Loyo and me a good deal about 
pearls. Loyo understands them almost as well as Pedro 
did.” 

And finally, after a peek at some of the green and 
yellow bills of money, the treasure was all tucked back in 
the copper box again, and shoved under a bunk in a cor- 


292 THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 

ner. And then Rule set out an early supper. And after, 
the boys got out and looked about them, .realizing their 
hard-won release from the tension of anxiety and dread. 
And they seemed now for the first time, to come to real 
appreciation of the beauty of the place they were in : the 
palms — royal palms, cabbage palms, cocoanut palms — ■ 
backed by grand, rugged live oaks hung with festoons of 
Spanish moss, and the other varied woods ; and the pretty 
hill peeking over the tree-tops ; and the white beach ; and 
the clear water of the sound; and beyond — the shore, 
and the palms and hills of the little island. 

“ I shall hate to leave the islands,’’ said Wayne to Ju- 
lian, “ now since we’ve got them all to ourselves.” 

It’s been my home a good many years,” returned 
Julian. It all seemed very beautiful to me till Lafitte 
Goya came.” 

Many a time,” said Loyo, I threatened Pedro, if he 
didn’t take Julian back, I would. But Pedro was so 
scared of his life, and I see Julian so contented, and so — 
mostly happy, I jest had to give in and wait, like Pedro 
said.” 

The boys were bubbling over. Ray started a game of 
leap-frog with Phil. Robert joined in. And then one 
after another all the other boys got in the line, including 
Wayne and Julian. Then Norris, catching the fever, 
bantered Jean Marat; and they two were directly leaping 
over the backs of the boys. And finally, out from the 
cook-house came running — Rufe, who seized on Loyo. 


THE TREASURE 


293 

“ Say, you black niggah,” he said, grinning. We-all 
has jes’ got to be in dis heah.’' And so the two blocks 
rushed into the undulating line. 

Halleluyah ! ” called out Rufe, as he went scrambling 
over boy after boy. Li’le Julian uster go ovah mah 
back jes’ about like Tm a-doin' — 0-wee! Mah bref is 
jes’ ’bout gone up.” 

With shouting and laughter, the line rolled on, cater- 
pillar fashion, down toward the little house, old Rufe 
falling out twice or thrice for breath; but always coming 
back to the charge again. 

Arrived at the house, the line broke; and, led by Nor- 
ris, they went in through the door. One look around, and 
Norris strode to a tool-chest in a corner. Reaching in, he 
pulled out a violin-case. 

“ Ah ! here’s my old squeaker, safe and sound,” he 
said. And he brought forth the fiddle. 

A few moments of hurried tuning, and with easy grace, 
he struck up a quick-step. Rufe jumped to the middle 
of the floor ; Loyo followed ; and the two darkies, facing 
one another, danced with vigour. Many hands clapped 
to the time ; and voices shouted, darky fashion. The two 
blacks vied with one another in queer antics, and the 
boys roared their glee. Presently, Norris struck into the 
Virginia Reel.” And then all lined up, and went caper- 
ing up and down, a pair at a time. And next, the fiddle 
gave forth a Spanish dance tune. And here Jean Marat 
snapped his fingers — for castenets — and danced with 


294 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


the correct step, till the boys, urged by the music and the 
example, set their fingers snapping, and their feet going, 
with greater or less success; but with entire enthusiasm 
and no end of fun. 

When at last dusk gave the signal, Norris’s fiddle 
stopped, and they all marched back to the bunk-house, 
laughing and chattering, like a gay party back home in 
civilization; and that sombrous, anxious time of but a few 
hours back, had begun to seem like an old memory. 

Captain Marat, seconded by Loyo, recommended an 
early turning in. When all were in their bunks, and 
Rufe had blown out the light, Ray, as usual, had the last 
word. 

'' Gentlemen I ” he called from his bunk, I have to 
thank you for a most hilariously — excruciatingly — ram- 
bunktiously pleasant evening. Good night.” 


CHAPTER XXXI 


HOME BOUND 

T he first of the boys awake in the morning, were 
not long routing out the others. At breakfast, 
Captain Marat said it was time to determine on the next 
move. The boys were loud for an excursion about the 
larger of the Pearl Islands ; and there were those who de- 
manded to be shown the cave and the hollow Signal Oak, 
so much talked about by those who had visited them. 

The excursionists made an early start; all went, except 
Jean Marat and Loyo, who stayed to keep camp. Loyo 
planned to gather together the effects of Julian and Pedro, 
ready to be taken aboard the Mercier. 

First, Robert took his comrades to the bush where 
first he concealed the wireless set, and pointed out the 
very spot. Then the march went back to the second hill 
and into the cave; and a lighted candle revealed the nar- 
rows where the sentinel was posted, and farther up, the 
place where Wayne’s blanket had been spread. 

When I found him,” explained Robert, “ he had his 
foot chained to that stalagmite.” 

Then it was out by the little hole in the east slope of the 
hill. And here Robert told again how he had discovered 
this wee exit. Recrossing the ridge, Robert led the way 

295 


296 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


to where the stream forked. Getting the boys into the 
oak, he showed them the place in the thicket into which 
he had lowered himself from the limb by a rope, and 
where he lay so many hours while the search party passed 
and dusk drew slowly on. Next, the way went up over 
the hills again, to the northeast corner of the island. And 
here each of the boys had to squirm under the Spanish 
bayonet plant into the hollow oak, and up the rope ladder 
to the perch above, whence Robert had signalled the Mer- 
cier by wireless. And he had to go all over the experi- 
ence again, in detail. 

Rufe showed a wry face, and rubbed himself, all the 
while he clung to his limb. And when they made ready 
to descend, he said: 

Say, you-all kin go down dat ’ar debbil’s way. Ah’m 
a-gwine to git down by de outside fire-oxcape. I reckons 
I has got ’bout two inches ob a Spanish-bay’net in me; 
an’ I gwine to sit lop-sided tells some o’ you pulls it out.” 

The noon hour had just passed, when the party got 
back to the bunk-house. Smoke was coming from the 
cook-house stack. Marat had been busy with his cast- 
net, and showed a goodly mess of fish. And Loyo had 
been to the oyster beds, and had something, as well, to 
show for it. 

It was a gay time at the turtle-turning that night, under 
the full moon. In the morning, everything was hustled 
aboard the schooner Mercier; and the time approached, 
to set sail homeward. 


HOME BOUND 


297 


It became somewhat a solemn occasion for Julian ; and 
his last act was to lay wreaths of wild flowers on the 
graves of the two loyal Jap divers. When he took his 
seat in the boat, his treasure-filled copper coffer at his 
feet, he looked back at the little house ; and his eyes over- 
flowed. 

The schooner floated out the west passage on the ebbing 
tide. Then the blocks rattled, as the sails went up to 
catch the westerly breeze. Julian stood by the rail, as 
the island’s shore swept by; and he was still there when 
the island showed as but a little speck on the south sea, 
some hours after. And Loyo, some way off, on the deck, 
kept his eyes on Julian. 

I know just how he feels,” observed Wayne to Loyo. 

Loyo’s eyes filled at this expression of sympathy. 
“ It’s the only home Julian’s knowed much about for 
many year. And I been longing for this day — oh, a 
mighty long time.” 

The Mercier sailed back over the self same route she 
had come. And at the first touch with civilization, there 
went many a letter home; and a telegram to Marvin 
Blaisdell, with good news for Julian’s grandfather, 
Charles Lamartine. At Pensacola, a day’s stop was 
made. The lawyer who had drawn old Pedro Lamar- 
tine’s will was found, and Julian’s interests there left in 
his care. Then on to New Orleans — more messages 
going ahead. Lake Borgne, the Rigolets, Lake Ponchar- 
train were passed. And the Mercier was picked up in 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


298 

the New Basin by a tug, on a September day, before 
noon. She was dropped at Claiborne Street, her old 
mooring. 

Two figures stood on the quay. 

“ Oh, there’s Mr. Blaisdell ! ” called out several of the 
boys at once. 

And Mr. Lamartine! ” said Wayne. 

Marvin Blaisdell caught the mooring-rope. 

“ Well, boys, and here you are safe back again,” said 
Marvin Blaisdell, leading Mr. Lamartine over the 
schooner’s rail. 

Old Mr. Lamartine had his eyes fixed on Julian, who 
stood, returning the gaze. Then in another moment the 
lad stepped forward, and grandfather and grandson — 
not a word spoken — were in each other’s arms. 

And then old Mr. Lamartine put his slender hand on 
Julian’s shoulder. My little Julian,” he said. 

I knew you, grandfather,” said Julian. I didn’t 
think I would.” 

You look just so natural,” declared the old man. 

Only some grown.” 

“ Well, friends,” soon interrupted Marvin Blaisdell, 
‘‘ we are all due at Madame Marat’s.” 

Julian’s copper coffer — in a trunk — was put in a 
waiting carriage with Mr. Lamartine, Julian, and Loyo. 
Other carriages were got, while the Mercier was made 
snug; and soon the whole crew, including Rufe, went 
rolling to Madame Marat’s domicile. 


HOME BOUND 


299 


The greetings between mother and son over, the guests 
were put to a feast as only such as Jean Marat’s mother 
knew how to put together. 

The happy party had not long been seated, the beaming 
Madame Marat heaping the boys’ plates with her cook- 
ery, when there came a jingling of the door-bell. And 
Madame must hurry out, in a minute to usher in, with 
words of welcome, a sailor man, a stranger to the boys. 

‘‘ Ah ! ” said Jean Marat, rising. “ Roget Martel ! ” 
And then some talk in French, followed by introductions 
all round ; and a new place set. Marat requested the new- 
comer to tell his news to the whole table. 

Roget Martel, it was explained, was an old friend of 
the Marats, and master of a fruit-schooner, plying be- 
tween Central America and New Orleans. 

I jus’ come in,” he said, an’ w’en we come by Clai- 
borne Strit, in the Basin, I see the Mercier; an’ I say: 
* Ah, Jean is home once more’; an’ I call to one, who say 
the Mercier have jus’ come in. An’ w’en we dock, I come 
righ’ over to tell Jean thee news.” 

And then he went on to tell how, when lying in a Cen- 
tral American port, one of his men came with a report 
that a fellow was on the lookout for a buyer for a small 
schooner to be sold cheap. 

I sen’ for thee fellow,” Martel said. An’ we row 
to the schooner. An’ ver’ quick I see id is the Miguel, 
thee name all paint out an’ new one paint on. An’ I take 
thee man back to my schooner — to bargain — an’ I tell 


300 


THE HIDDEN ISLANDS 


thee man how I know the Miguel, an’ I know he an’ hees 
frien’s have steal her. He get scare’, an’ tell me ’bout 
thee island.” 

And here came a short and imperfect account of doings 
on the Pearl Isles. 

‘‘ I move my schooner,” continued Martel, close to 
thee Miguel, led the man go, an’ sen’ for the harbor mas- 
ter, an’ explain to him. An’ we feex up the paper’ ; and 
w’en we sail, I put some men on the Miguel. An’ now 
she lie over in thee Basin.” 

The story of Captain Roget Martel gave the boys a 
sharp turn of surprise, little as they had thought ever to 
hear of either their vanquished enemies of the islands or 
the schooner Miguel again. And before dark it was be- 
yond resistance, to go and have a look at the schooner, 
over in the canal, which they had last seen — and with 
pleasurable emotions — sailing away to the west. 

And now they trod the deck of the Miguel with a new 
feeling; here had come home the last piece of Julian’s 
property, bequeathed him by Pedro Lamartine. It 
seemed the enemy were destined to have no profit of their 
ill pursuit on the isles. 

‘‘ Look here, fellows,” called Ray, pointing. ‘‘ Look 
what a chunk that bomb gnawed out of the deck when 
it went off that night.” 

“Well, I say!” marvelled Norris. “That was some 
vicious barker. I never hope to enjoy fireworks like I 


HOME BOUND 


301 

did that night — and didn’t we keep those cusses 
guessing ! ” 

For nearly a week, our boys remained in New Orleans, 
guests of the Lamartines. And before they took train 
for their homes in the north, Julian had worked out plans 
for a cruise in the West Indies, which should be in the late 
winter, and was to take in the Pearl Isles. Old Mr, La- 
martine and Marvin Blaisdell were to be of the party; 
and Madame Marat promised to sail with them and 
mother the crew. For Julian, now fairly rolling in 
wealth, meant to charter, or buy, a fully-appointed yacht, 
with staterooms and. all, a vessel of which he declared 
Jean Marat would be proud to be captain. 

Grant Norris was the only one of all the friends who 
gave a doubtful reply. 

Three months ago,” he said, I would have had only 
one answer. But it's you boys got me in the notion of 
going home. And home is as far ahead as I can see, 
now. But let me hear from you a month or two before 
you sail again in the direction of the Pearl Isles.” 


THE END 


^'!m^im\ Vv'li M ii l ; y:- • 


»• * •■ 

t* 


^ • .' 


.(. 


./;<■ ^ ' r.^u 

•'■ ■ - ■ ' ■ ' .'M 


1 ,' 


. ) . •{ t«,‘ 


I* 


» 


p ;, 

I « 


'*■ -V :V lit’’'? ^ '' ' V ■' * ■' ‘. 

'■:. ^ -;-yv,:^W,v 

:v': >■'"'."■ • ■■'■•* ' ' 'v ^ -■ ■■ 

. ,_ • ‘ J ^ * i • 'v •' vM* ^ “it, =,*• . • I ' » • V .Vi ■! * ' * > ' 

-■ i! A ■^' 'V,. ■ hi. ' .-■• 


' I 

f 




10 


) . 




■ ly 


as 


. •" :'•, i' ■ 


u. . 


>< 


- » ■ V ' 

*• \* w 


r 

\ 


\\ i >* 

*'A * ' 


• / 


■iV 


' w "’• ' ’ -V'-' • '• • ' * 

y -: m 


a ' ,»y?WTSBB 

V' ■■ ‘ ^•■ 





• • • '• '‘►Vi 

*• . . -• N ' * ' 


vy./--; . ' ■ ■ 


->..- ‘ 



V i 




’ r ■ ' - . ' •' r> I ^ 

.- q;.- •;• 7/.*ii-i 

V . . 

f V 


, t 


i ■. 


‘a 

/t 

■' '»t 


^ • 


p. \ » 


K. 


■ -i . 


*■ 


"' v,"-’V';ar 

■■ V. „ .v'.;-^'.'; ' 

I ' * ' * 




y>*‘ • ‘ .' 

i.. tV'f ’J • • -i'*- 

a'!*;'; V'^i 



4 a' ;» ■ 

< . • ..v. • Jfj,. ■ ,-■ ^ . 

A I '. . Y ’ 4 -.'I • ■ ' ' 4 


' t 






P ' '« 


‘‘if 


I1 I - • 4. / 

• 4’» 


7 




: ' V->' 

. r>/ 




• »' ♦ 

J ■ 


> M 


i) ^ •: 


• S 


.’• h 


t t 


'I •■ .. ■ 1 ;!' »»J-* 


' ■. ■•;/•• 
sC 


i * 


^ 'i 




{ . 


4,rVy-Vl , ■ ''-‘Ut'* . 

k. . ' :%»' ■■ >' ■ ,iy,., 


;v4" 

£ 







*t . ' 


. fjj' . ■> <, .'V, ' . '• / ,v ■ • A w ‘ '• 


. -y 1^1 


t‘ 


* 

• -• fs '■ 

r'* 


»• 

» •• 

' .' ii 

» 


i 


, •:..*• • •' •. '■, '•■/•'-. ■ 1 ,. v><« " •• ' • 

■i ’ 4^‘ . ^ i, 

->v y. -v x :r. ' ■ ‘ ; • . . - . V 

• ■ •■ *, * .-w.-: v‘-'' T '■ ,• ■ ‘ ' 


>K 

• ’>, 

• / 


t ’. J 

» 


• . V 


•f * 


. t 


■y 


V , 


■ ! 4 , /s/' ' -v/. ' ‘ :■ ' ' , • . • ' \ .• ^ ‘ 

7 . '■•» ' • - .' t . I*'. ,/' r'f •'• v^' 


,,..,y 






. * 

I 

4 

•# t 

f 

A 


<'■ * ^■' ' : '.? < ■> ' ^ ■ "^'v ' 

*>Vyr:\V/y 4- ' ^'7 :' 

•■ . . ■ ' ' ’• V -V^-. 


. M • 


. ■ y-' , ' ’ 4 ' ' ’• 

■ 'i .i':.'h ^ ’•‘ : ■, 

V . ■',• ..' ■• '■ I y 

I ® • 


. ' ) 


« • * 
I f 


j 

I i 


I 


f t 


» 


.-fi' -IC 


'.s- 




’ ^' • ■ '-■' y. . . : i '•- 

I»444 .;44::/ ;'44> 4‘ ' 


• i'i 


i 


, ■',,,, 4 T/ ' ^ ■. . -V'-v/.y^. /V' J ; , 


• ’ If ' 


■ ■: '■' y m' 


"r- ■ ^.. •■ 

, , 4 


4*: 

7 

v*. 


■V/V' 


i|ll^®l 


.V 


if‘y: • '.A- 

'.V'* 

■ ( ?’• '7 

- V' y r ' 


I t 




r 


f-‘ 

I? 


'^. . ; 

>t ' *■'*>/ 

^ t ' t . (a 


' ' •. .t 


•, I ’ » ’r « i» ' , . ,' * ./ ', 

'T'^ j.« 'T \ lt , »l' 

hf. 


v> k'J >. 4 

’ ■ ■' . H - 

.. 4 '. jy 






hJ/uAf'-' 


S'. ^'.' 1 . . ... . ■ 


4^C.'"£V,:y,.v- 








n 








f 

t 




,r 

4 

< 



■ T. 





If -I- 


iff 


) 


r 


I 




I 


I 




« « 

» 



i 


\ 


I 


\ 


\ 


« 







vV 


r 

9 




1 > 









I • 

i 



mar 16 '9'^» 


/ 


/ 


« 


1 * 

f 

« 


1 



9 







1 . 


1 


4 



W 





